SEAT recommends
SEAT GENUINE OIL
SEAT recommends
Castrol EDGE Professional
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Leon
5F0012720BG
Inglés
5F0012720BG (11.16)
Leon Inglés (11.16)
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the
time this manual was published. Some of the
units described herein will not be available
until a later date or are only available in cer-
tain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the LEON
range, some of the equipment and functions
that are described in this manual are not in-
cluded in all types or variants of the model;
they may vary or be modified depending on
the technical requirements and on the mar-
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details.
The steering indications (left, right, forward,
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-
cept when otherwise indicated.
The audiovisual material only is intended to
help users to understand certain car function-
alities better. It does not replace the instruc-
tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-
al to obtain more comprehensive information
and indications.
The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as op-
tional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with
®. Although the copyright symbol does
not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
>> The section is continued on the follow-
ing page.
Important warnings on a given page
Detailed contents on a given page
General information on a given page
Emergency information on a given page
Audiovisual material on a given page
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
mation on safety. They warn you about possi-
ble dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
vant information concerning environmental
protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
This manual is divided into six large parts,
which are:
1. The essentials
2. Safety
3. Emergencies
4. Operation
5. Tips
6. Technical data
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed
alphabetical index that will help you quickly
find the information you require.
Foreword
This Instruction Manual and its correspond-
in
g s
up
plements should be read carefully to
familiarise yourself with your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of
the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre-
serve its value.
For safety reasons, always note the informa-
tion concerning accessories, modifications
and part replacements.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board
documentation to the new owner, as it
should be kept with the vehicle.
You can access the information in this man-
ual using:
●
Thematic table of contents that follows the
manual’s general chapter structure.
●
Visual table of contents that uses graphics
to indicate the pages containing “essential”
information, which is detailed in the corre-
sponding chapters.
●
Alphabetical index with many terms and
synonyms to help you find information.
WARNING
Read and always observe safety informa-
tion concernin
g the passenger's front air-
bag ››› page 83, Important information
regarding the front passenger's airbag.
»
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
The e
s
senti
als . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Interior view (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 60
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Correct position for passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Why wear a seat belt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 74
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Vehicle tool kit anti-puncture kit* . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Manual unlocking/locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 87
Towing and tow-starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 88
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Change the front bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing incandescent rear light bulbs . . . . . . 97
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . 104
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 110
System settings (CAR)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Rear lid (luggage compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Panoramic sliding sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Windscreen wiper and window wiper sys-
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Adjusting the seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . 143
Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 148
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-
box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Engine management and exhaust gas purifica-
tion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Auto Hold Function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5
Table of Contents
Front Assist system including City emergency
br
ak
in
g and pedestrian monitoring* . . . . . . . . 207
Lane Assist system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
SEAT Drive Profile* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Fatigue detection (break recommendation)* . . 224
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Accessories and modifications to the vehi-
cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Vehicle exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Caring for the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Progressive steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Important . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
6
The essentials
Interior view (left-hand drive)
1
››› page 13
2
››› page 10
3
››› page 24
4
››› page 25
5
››› page 39
6
››› page 40
7
››› page 26
8
››› page 30
9
››› page 27
10
››› page 25
11
››› page 45
12
››› page 17
13
››› page 42
14
››› page 24
15
››› page 15
16
››› page 12
17
››› page 54
18
››› page 16
19
››› page 14
20
››› page 14
9
The essentials
How it works
Un
loc
k
ing and locking
Doors
Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons.
Fig. 2 Driver door: central locking switch.
Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the
k
ey
●
L
oc
king: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.
●
Locking the vehicle without activating the
anti-theft system: Press the ››› Fig. 1 button
for a second time within 2 seconds.
●
Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.
●
Unlocking the rear lid: Hold down the
››› Fig. 1 button for at least 1 second.
Locking and unlocking with the central lock-
ing switch
●
Locking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button. None
of the doors can be opened from the outside.
The doors can be opened from the inside by
pulling the inside door handle.
●
Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button.
››› in Description on page 116
››› page 116
››› page 10, ››› page 11
Unlocking and locking the driver's
door
Fig. 3 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.
If the central locking system should fail to op-
er
at
e, the driv
er door can still be locked and
unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
As a general rule, when the driver door is
locked manually all other doors are locked.
When it is unlocked manually, only the driver
door opens. Please observe the instructions
relating to the anti-theft alarm system
›››
page 116.
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 117.
●
Insert the key blade into the lower opening
in the cover on the driver door handle
››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the cover up-
wards.
●
Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder
to unlock or lock the vehicle.
10
The essentials
Special Characteristics
●
The anti-theft alarm will remain active when
v
ehic
l
es are unlocked. However, the alarm
will not be triggered ›››
page 116.
●
After the driver door is opened, you have
15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once
this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
●
Switch the ignition on. The electronic im-
mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and
deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.
Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the
vehicl
e is locked manually using the key
shaft ›››
page 116.
Manual locking of the doors with no
loc
k
cylinder
Fig. 4 Locking the door manually.
If the central locking system should fail to
w
ork
at
any time, doors with no lock cylinder
will have to be locked separately.
A mechanical locking device (only visible
when the door is open) is provided on the
front passenger door.
●
Pull the cap out of the opening.
●
Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it
to the right as far as it will go (if the door is
on the right side) or to the left (if the door is
on the left side).
Once the door has been closed it can no lon-
ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-
rior door handle once to unlock and open the
door.
Rear lid
Fig. 5 Rear lid: opening from the outside.
The rear lid opening system operates electri-
c
al
ly
. It is activated by using the handle on
the boot lid.
To lock/unlock, press the button or button
››› Fig. 1 on the remote control key.
A warning appears on the instrument panel
display if the rear lid is open or not properly
closed.* An audible warning is also given if it
is opened while the vehicle is moving faster
than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
Opening and closing
●
Opening the rear lid: Pull on the release
lever and lift it up ››› Fig. 5. The rear lid opens
automatically.
●
Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of the
handles on the interior lining and close it by
pushing gently.
››› in Tailgate automatic lock on
page 126
››› page 126
››› page 12, ››› page 12
11
The essentials
Manual release of the rear lid
3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC
Fig. 6 Luggage compartment: access to man-
ual
r
el
ease.
The rear lid can be unlocked manually from
in
s
ide in the ev
ent of an emergency.
●
Insert the key in the opening in the lining
of the tail gate
1
and move the key in the di-
r
ection of
the arr
ow until the lock is released.
Manual release of the rear lid
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
Fig. 7 Luggage compartment: access to man-
ual
r
el
ease.
The rear lid can be unlocked manually from
in
s
ide in the ev
ent of an emergency.
●
Remove the cover by inserting a screwdriv-
er in groove ››› Fig. 7 A.
●
Insert the key into the opening and turn it
in the direction of the arr
ow until the latch
››› Fig. 7 B has been released.
Bonnet
Fig. 8 Release lever in the driver's footwell
ar
e
a.
Fig. 9 Cam under the bonnet
●
Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever under
the d
a
shbo
ard
›››
Fig. 8
1
.
●
Lift up the bonnet. Press the release catch
u
nder the bonnet
up
wards
›››
Fig. 9
2
. The
arr
e
s
ter hook under the bonnet is released.
12
The essentials
●
The bonnet
c
an be opened. R
elease the
bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-
signed for this in the bonnet.
››› in Work in the engine compartment
on page 262
››› page 262
Electric windows*
Fig. 10 Detail of the driver door: controls for
the w
indo
w
s.
●
Opening the window: Press the b
utt
on.
●
C
losing the window: Pull the button.
Buttons on the driver door
Window on the front left door
Window on the front right door
Window on the rear left door (only 5-door
vehicles)
Window on the right rear door (only 5-
door vehicles)
Safety switch for deactivating the electric
window buttons on the rear doors (only 5-
door vehicles)
››› in Opening and closing of the elec-
tric windows* on page 127
››› page 127
Panoramic roof*
Fig. 11 On the interior roof lining: use the ro-
t
ar
y
button for opening and closing
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 12 On the interior roof lining: press the
b
utt
on and p
ull on it to raise and lower the
sunroof.
●
Opening: Turn the switch to position
›
›
›
Fig. 11
3
.
●
Convenience position: Turn the switch to
po
s
ition ›
›› Fig. 11
2
.
●
Closing: Turn the switch to position
›
›
›
Fig. 11
1
.
●
To tilt open: Push the switch to position
›
›
›
Fig. 12
4
. For an intermediate position,
ho
l
d do
wn the switch until you reach the de-
sired position.
●
Lowering: Pull the switch to position
››› Fig. 12
5
. For an intermediate position,
ho
l
d do
wn the switch until you reach the de-
sired position.
»
13
The essentials
››› in Opening or closing the panoramic
sliding sunroof on page 129
››› page 129
Before driving
M
anua
l
ly adjusting the front seats
Fig. 13 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.
Forward/back: pull the lever and move
the se
at
f
orwards or backwards.
Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.
1
2
Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.
L
umb
ar s
upport: Press the button in the
corresponding position.
Folding down the backrest (only 3-door
vehicles): pull the lever and push the
backrest forward.
››› in Manual adjustment of seats on
page 143
Electric adjustment of the driver's
se
at*
Fig. 14 Driver's seat: electric seat adjust-
ment
.
Adjusting the lumbar support: press the
b
utt
on ac
cording to the desired position.
Seat up/down: Press the button
up/down. To adjust the front of the seat
cushion, press the front of the button
up/down. To adjust the rear of the seat
3
4
5
A
B
cushion, press the rear of the button
up/do
wn.
Se
at
forwards/backwards: press the but-
ton forwards/backwards.
Backrest further upright/further reclined:
press the button forwards/backwards.
››› in Electric driver's seat adjustment*
on page 143
Adjusting the head restraints
Fig. 15 Front seat: adjustment of the head re-
s
tr
aint
.
●
Grab the sides of the head restraints with
both h
and
s
and push upwards to the desired
position. To lower it, repeat the same action,
pressing the
1
button on the side.
C
14
The essentials
››› in Correct adjustment of front head
restraints on page 69
››› page 69, ››› page 144
Adjustment of the seat belt
Fig. 16 Positioning and removing the seat
belt
b
uc
kle.
Fig. 17 Correct seat belt and head restraint
position
s, viewed from front and the side.
To adjust the seat belt around your should-
er
s, a
dju
st the height of the seats.
The shoulder part of the seat belt should be
well centred over it, never over the neck. The
seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the
upper part of the body.
The lap part of the seat belt lies across the
pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat
belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-
vis.
››› page 72
››› page 74
Seat belt tensioners
During a collision, the seat belts on the front
seats ar
e retracted automatically.
The tensioner can be triggered only once.
››› in Service and disposal of belt ten-
sioners on page 76
››› page 75
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Fig. 18 Detail of the driver door: control for
the e
xt
erior mirr
or.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob
t
o the c
orr
esponding position:
Turning the knob to the desired posi-
tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver
»
L/R
15
The essentials
side (L, left) and the passenger side (R,
right) t
o the dir
ection de
sired.
Depending on the equipment fitted on
the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated
according to the outside temperature.
Folding in mirrors.
››› in Adjusting the exterior rear view
mirrors on page 142
››› page 142
Adjusting the steering wheel
Fig. 19 Lever in the lower left side of the
s
t
eerin
g column.
●
Adjusting the position of the steering
wheel: P
u
l
l the ››› Fig. 19
1
lever down,
mo
v
e the s
teering wheel to the desired posi-
tion and lift the lever back up until it locks.
››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po-
sition on page 67
Airbags
Front airbags
Fig. 20 Driver airbag located in steering
wheel
.
Fig. 21 Front passenger airbag located in
d
a
sh p
anel.
The front airbag for the driver is located in
the s
t
eerin
g wheel ››› Fig. 20 and the airbag
for the front passenger is located in the dash
panel ››› Fig. 21. Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
When the driver and front passenger airbags
are deployed, the covers remain attached to
the steering wheel and dashboard, respec-
tively ››› Fig. 20 ››› Fig. 21.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the front occupants ad-
ditional protection for the head and chest in
16
The essentials
the event of a severe frontal collision ›
›
›
in
Fr
ont
airb
ags on page 78.
Their special design allows the controlled es-
cape of the propellant gas when an occupant
puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are protected by the airbag. After the
collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to
allow visibility.
››› page 78
Deactivating the front passenger front
airb
ag
Fig. 22 Front passenger front airbag switch.
To deactivate the front passenger front air-
b
ag:
●
Open the glo
v
e compartment on the front
passenger side.
●
Insert the key blade into the slot provided
in the deactivation switch.
●
Approximately ¾ of the length of the key
blade remains inserted (the maximum).
●
Turn the key blade, changing its position to
. Do not force it. If you have difficulty, en-
sure that you have inserted the key as far as
it will go.
●
Finally, check the control lamp on the in-
strument panel where it shows
the following should appear .
››› in Front passenger front airbag
switch on page 82
››› page 81
Knee airbag*
Fig. 23 On the driver side: location of the
knee airb
ag
Fig. 24 On the driver side: radius of action of
the knee airbag.
The knee airbag is located on the driver side
belo
w the d
a
sh panel ››› Fig. 23. Airbags are
identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
The area framed in red (deployment area)
››› Fig. 24 is covered by the knee airbag when
it is deployed. Objects should never be
placed or mounted in this area.
››› page 78
17
The essentials
Side airbags*
Fig. 25 Side airbag in driver's seat.
Fig. 26 Illustration of completely inflated side
airb
ag
s
on the left side of the vehicle.
The side airbags are located in the backrest
c
u
shion
s of the driver seat ››› Fig. 25 and the
front passenger seat as well as in the back-
rest of the side rear seats*. The locations are
identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper
region of the backrests.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side
airbag system provides additional protection
for the upper body in the event of a severe
side collision ›››
in Side airbags* on
p
ag
e 78
.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce
the risk of injury to passengers to the areas
of the body facing the impact. In addition to
their normal function of protecting the occu-
pants in a collision, the front and rear outer
seat belts also hold the passengers in the
event of a side collision; this is how these air-
bags provide maximum protection.
››› page 78
Head-protection airbags*
Fig. 27 Location of head-protection airbags.
The head-protection airbags are located on
both s
ide
s
in the interior above the doors
››› Fig. 27 and are identified with the text
“AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-
protection airbag system gives the vehicle
occupants additional protection for the head
and upper body in the event of a severe side
collision ›››
in Curtain airbags* on
p
ag
e 79
.
››› in Curtain airbags* on page 79
18
The essentials
Child seats
Impor
t
ant
information regarding the
front passenger's airbag
Fig. 28 Airbag stickers - version 1: on the
fr
ont
p
assenger's sun visor and on the rear
frame of the front passenger's door .
Fig. 29 Airbag stickers - version 2: on the
fr
ont
p
assenger's sun visor and on the rear
frame of the front passenger's door .
A sticker with important information about
the p
a
s
senger airbag is located on the pas-
senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger
side door frame.
››› in Important information regarding
the front passenger's airbag on page 83
››› page 82
19
The essentials
Securing child seats with the seat belt
Fig. 30 On the rear seats: Possible installations
for the chi
ld seat.
Figure ›
›› Fig. 30
A
shows the basic child re-
s
tr
aint
system mounting using lower retain-
ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig-
ure ››› Fig. 30
B
shows the child restraint
sy
s
t
em mounting using the vehicle seat belt.
The seat belt may be used to secure univer-
sal type child seats to the vehicle seats
marked with a U in the table below.
If the front passenger seat lacks a height ad-
justment, child seats cannot be mounted is
this location
1)
.
To correctly use a child seat in the back, the
front backrest must be adjusted so that there
is no contact with the child seat in the back
in the case that it goes opposite to the direc-
tion of the car. In the case of front facing re-
straint systems, the front backrest must be
adjusted so that there is no contact with the
child's feet.
To adjust the passenger seat to accommo-
date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a
perfect position, adjust the passenger back-
rest as far forward as possible.
1)
.
Starting with Group 0+ child seats should not
be mounted facing backwards in the passen-
ger seat given that due to the size of some of
them, they can be difficult to install.
1)
.
1)
Compliance with current national legislation and
the manufact
urer's instructions is required when us-
ing or installing child seats.
20
The essentials
Weight
group
Seating position
Front pas-
senger
seat
a)
Rear
side
seat
Rear
central
seat
Group 0
to 10 kg
U* U U
Group 0+
to 13 kg
U* U U
Group I
9 to 18 kg
U* U U
Group II
15 to 25 kg
U* U U
Group III
22 to 36 kg
U* U U
a)
Compliance with current national legislation and the manu-
facturer's instructions is required when using or installing child
seats.
Suitable for universal restraint systems
for use in this weight group.
Only compatible for models with adjust-
able seat height. Place the seat in the
backmost and highest position possi-
ble.
The systems include the child restraint sys-
tem mounting with an upper retaining strap
(Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on
the seat.
››› in Safety instructions on page 84
U:
*:
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether child seat mounting system*
Child seats can be secured quickly, easily
and s
af
ely
on the rear outer seats with the
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system.
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on
each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings
are secured to the seat frame and, in others,
they are secured to the rear floor. The “ISO-
FIX” rings are located between the rear seat
backrest and the seat cushioning. The Top
Tether* rings are located at the rear of the
backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat
backrest or in the boot).
To understand the compatibility of the "ISO-
FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table
below.
The body weight permitted and information
regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la-
bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi-
universal” certification.
»
21
The essentials
Weight group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction
Vehicle Isofix positions
Rear side seats
Baby carrier
F ISO/L1 Backward-facing X
G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
Group 0+ to 13 kg
E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU
Group I 9 to 18 kg
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing IU
B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU
B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU
A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU
Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Suitable for ISOFIX universal child re-
s
tr
aint
systems approved for use in this
weight group.
ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX
child restraint systems for this weight
group or size class.
››› in Safety instructions on page 84
IU:
X:
22
The essentials
Attaching the child seat with the
“ISOFIX
sy
s
tem”
Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings.
You are obliged to follow the seat manufac-
t
ur
er's
instructions.
●
Remove the protective caps of the “ISOFIX”
rings by placing a finger in the hole and pull-
ing up ››› Fig. 31.
●
Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-
taining rings until the child seat can be heard
to engage securely. If the child seat is equip-
ped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it
to the correspondent ring ››› Fig. 32. Observe
the manufacturer's instructions.
●
Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-
sure that it is properly anchored.
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
attachment system are available from Techni-
cal Services.
Attachment of the child seat with the
Top Tether* retainer straps
Fig. 32 Position of the Top Tether rings on the
b
ac
k
of the rear seat.
Child seats with the Top Tether system come
w
ith a s
tr
ap for securing the seat to the vehi-
cle anchor point, located at the back of the
rear seat backrest and provide greater re-
straint.
The objective of this strap is to reduce for-
ward movements of the child seat in a crash,
to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from
hitting the inside of the vehicle.
Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted
seats
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please
carefully read and follow the seat manufac-
turer instructions to learn the proper way to
install the Top Tether strap.
Securing the Top Tether* to the an-
chorage point
Fig. 33 Retainer strap: correct adjustment
and fittin
g.
Securing the retainer strap
●
Follow the manufacturer's instructions to
dep
lo
y
the child seat Top Tether retainer
strap.
●
Guide the strap under the rear seat head re-
straint ››› Fig. 33 (lift the head restraint where
necessary).
●
Slide the strap and secure it properly with
the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 32.
●
Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-
facturer's instructions.
Releasing the retaining strap
●
Loosen the strap following the manufactur-
er's ins
tructions.
»
23
The essentials
●
P
u
sh the loc
k and release it from the an-
choring support.
››› in Safety instructions on page 84
Starting the vehicle
Ignition lock
Fig. 34 Ignition key positions.
Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni-
tion and s
t
ar
t the engine.
Locking and unlocking the steering wheel
●
Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove
the key from the ignition and turn the wheel
until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic
gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi-
tion in order to remove the key. If necessary,
press the locking key on the selector lever
and release it again.
●
Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key
into the ignition and turn it at the same time
as the steering wheel in the direction indica-
ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn
the steering wheel, it may be because it is
locked.
Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow
plugs reheating
●
Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the
2
position.
●
Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the
1
position.
●
Diesel vehicles :
The glo
w p
lugs reheat
when the ignition is switched on
Starting the engine
●
Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all
the way down and move the gearbox lever in-
to neutral.
●
Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal
and move the selector lever to the P position
or into N.
●
Turn the key to the
3
position. The key au-
t
om
atic
ally returns to the
2
position. Do not
pr
e
s
s the accelerator.
Start-Stop System*
When you stop and release the clutch pedal,
the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.
The ignition remains switched on.
››› in Switching the ignition on and
starting the engine with the key on
page 168
››› page 167
Lights and visibility
Light
sw
it
ch
Fig. 35 Dash panel: light control.
●
Turn the switch to the required position
›
›
›
Fig. 35.
24
The essentials
Sym-
bol
Ignition switched
off
Ignition is
switched on
Fog lights, dipped
beam and side lights
off.
Light off or daytime
driving light on.
The “Coming home”
and “Leaving home”
guide lights may be
switched on.
Automatic control of
dipped beam and
daytime running
light.
Side light on.
Dipped beam head-
light off
Dipped beam
switched on.
Front fog lights: mo
ve the switch to the
first position, from positions , or .
Rear fog light: move the switch completely
from positions , or .
●
Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or
turn it t
o the position.
››› in Side light and dipped beam head-
light on page 131
››› page 131
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 36 Turn signal and main beam lever
More the lever to the required position:
Right
t
urn s
ignal: Right-hand parking
light (ignition switched off).
Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light
(ignition switched off).
Main beam switched on: Control lamp
lit up on the instrument panel.
Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is
pushed. Control lamp lit up.
Lever all the way down to switch it off.
››› in Turn signal and main beam lever
on page 132
››› page 131
1
2
3
4
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 37 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-
in
g lights.
Switched on, for example:
●
When approaching a traffic jam
●
In an emergency
●
The vehicle has broken down
●
When towing or being towed
››› in Hazard warning lights
on
page 136
››› page 135
25
The essentials
Interior lights
Fig. 38 Detail of headliner: front interior light-
in
g.
Knob Function
Switches interior lights off.
Switches interior lights on.
Switches door contact control on (central po-
sition).
The interior lights come on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is
opened or the key is removed from the igni-
tion.
The lights go off a few seconds after all the
doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the
ignition is switched on.
Knob Function
Turning the reading light on and off
››› page 138
Windscreen wipers and window wiper
bla
de
Fig. 39 Operating the windscreen wiper and
r
e
ar w
iper
More the lever to the required position:
0
Windscreen wiper off.
More the lever to the required position:
1
Windscreen wipers interval wipe.
Using the control ››› Fig. 39
A
adjust the
interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or
the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
2
Slow wipe.
3
Continuous wipe.
4
Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold
the lever down for more time to increase
the wipe frequency.
5
Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer
function is activated by pushing the lever
forwards, and simultaneously the wind-
screen wipers start.
6
Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper
will wipe the window approximately every
six seconds.
7
The rear window wash function is activa-
ted by pressing the lever, and the rear
wiper starts simultaneously.
››› page 139
››› page 63
26
The essentials
Easy Connect
CAR menu settin
g
s
(Setup)
Fig. 40 Easy Connect: Main menu Fig. 41 Easy Connect: CAR menu
To select the settings menus, press the Easy
C
onnect
button and the
S
ETUP
function
b
utt
on.
The act
ual number of menus available and
the name of the various options will depend
on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If the Infotainment System is off, switch it
on.
●
Press the system's
button and then
the f
u
nction b
utton
Vehicle
›
›› Fig. 40
, or the
sy
stem's
button to go to the menu Vehi-
cle ›
›
›
Fig. 41.
●
Press the function button
SETUP
to open
the menu Vehicle settings ›
›
›
Fig. 41.
●
To select a function in the menu, press the
desired button.
When you press the menu button, the last se-
lected menu will always be displayed.
When the function button check box is activa-
ted , the function is active.
Any changes made using the settings menus
are automatically saved on closing the
BACK
menus.
Menu Submenu Possible setting Description
ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 176
Tyres
Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 275
Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value ››› page 279
»
27
The essentials
Menu Submenu Possible setting Description
Driver assistance
ACC (adaptive cruise control)
Activation/deactivation: Gear programme, temporary distance from the vehicle in front (dis-
tance level)
››› page 196
Front Assist (ambient traffic
monitoring system)
Activation/deactivation: monitoring system, advance warning, distance warning display ››› page 207
City emergency braking func-
tion
Activation/deactivation of the City emergency braking function. ››› page 211
Lane Assist (system warning
you if you leave the lane)
Activation/deactivation: Lane Assist, Adaptive Lane Guidance ››› page 213
Detection of traffic signs
The following functions can be activated and deactivated:
– Display of traffic signs on the multi-function display
– Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer)
››› page 222
Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 224
Parking and ma-
noeuvring
ParkPilot
Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound settings,
adjust volume
››› page 225
Vehicle lights
Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and switch lighting, footrest lighting ››› page 138
Coming home/Leaving home
function
Start time for “Coming home” function, start time for “Leaving home” function
››› page 134
››› page 135
Motorway light Activation/deactivation ››› page 136
Headlamp height adjustment Adjust the height and reach of the headlights according to the vehicle's load. ››› page 137
Mirrors/wind‐
screen wipers
Mirrors Synchronised regulation, lower the rear-view mirror when reversing, fold in after parking
››› page 15,
››› page 142
Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing ››› page 26
Opening and clos-
ing
Radio-operated remote control Convenience open function ››› page 128
Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation ››› page 116
28
The essentials
Menu Submenu Possible setting Description
Multifunction
display
–
Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience consumers,
ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, digital speed display, average speed, speed-
ing warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data “from start”, restore data
“total calculation”
››› page 30
Date and time –
Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone, time for-
mat, set the date, date format
–
Measurement units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption –
Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 37
Factory settings –
All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view mir-
rors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, multi-function display
–
››› in CAR menu on page 110
››› page 110
29
The essentials
Driver information system
Intr
oduction
With the ignition switched on, it is possible
to re
ad the different functions of the display
by scrolling through the menus.
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,
the multifunction display can only be operat-
ed with the steering wheel buttons.
The number of menus displayed on the in-
strument panel will vary according to the ve-
hicle electronics and equipment.
A specialised workshop will be able to pro-
gramme or modify additional functions, ac-
cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec-
ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is at a standstill.
As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it
will not be possible to read the menus. Some
warning messages can be confirmed and
made to disappear with the windscreen wiper
lever button or the multifunction steering
wheel button.
The information system also provides the fol-
lowing information and displays (depending
on the vehicle's equipment):
Driving data
›››
page 34
■
Vehicle status
■
MFD from depar
ture
■
MFD from refuelling
■
MFD total calculation
Assist systems ››› table on page 31
■
Activate/deactivate Lane Assist
■
Reverse (optional)
Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system
Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga-
tion system
Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book-
let Navigation system
Vehicle ››› table on page 31
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of
injury.
●
Do not operate the instrument panel con-
trols when driving.
Using the menus on the instrument
p
anel
Fig. 42 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-
t
on
s.
Fig. 43 Right side of multifunction steering
wheel: c
ontr
o
l buttons.
The driver information system is controlled
w
ith the mu
ltif
unction steering wheel buttons
››› Fig. 43 or with the windscreen wiper lever
››› Fig. 42 (if the vehicle is not equipped with
multifunction steering wheel).
30
The essentials
Enabling the main menu
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If a message or vehicle pictogram appears,
pr
e
s
s button ››› Fig. 42
1
on the windscreen
w
iper l
ev
er or button
on the multifunction
s
t
eerin
g wheel ››› Fig. 43.
●
If managed from the windscreen wiper lev-
er: to display the main screen ››› page 31 or
to return to the main menu from another
menu hold down the rocker button ››› Fig. 42
2
.
●
If managed from the multifunction steering
whe
e
l:
the main menu list is not displayed.
To go from point to point in the main menu,
press button
or
several times
›
›
›
Fig. 43.
Select a submenu
●
Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 42
2
on the
w
ind
s
creen wiper lever up or down or turn
the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering
wheel ››› Fig. 43 until the desired option ap-
pears marked on the menu.
●
The selected option is displayed between
two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is
displayed on the right:
●
To consult the submenu option, press but-
ton ››› Fig. 42
1
on the windscreen wiper
l
ev
er or b
utton
on the multifunction steer-
in
g wheel
›
›› Fig. 43.
Making changes according to the menu
●
With the rocker switch on the windscreen
wiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multi-
function steering wheel, make the desired
changes. To increase or decrease the values
more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster.
●
Mark or confirm the selection with button
››› Fig. 42
1
on the windscreen wiper lever
or b
utt
on
on the multifunction steering
wheel
›
›
› Fig. 43.
Button for the driver assistance sys-
tems*
Fig. 44 On the turn signal and main beam
he
a
dlight
lever: button for the driver assis-
tance systems
With the turn signal and main beam head-
light
l
ev
er button, you can activate or deacti-
vate the driver assistance systems displayed
in the Assist systems menu
›››
page 191.
Activate or deactivate a driver assistance
system
●
Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 44 in the di-
rection of the arrow to open the menu As-
sist systems.
●
Select the driver assistance system and ac-
tivate or deactivate it ››› page 30. A mark indi-
cates that driver assistance system is switch-
ed on.
Menu
Menu Function
Driving
data
Information and possible configurations
of the multifunction display (MFD)
››› page 34, ››› page 110.
Assist
systems
Information and possible configurations
of the driver assistance systems
››› page 110.
Naviga-
tion
Information instructions from the activa-
ted navigation system: when a route guid-
ance is activated, the turning arrows and
proximity bars are displayed. The appear-
ance is similar to the Easy Connect sys-
tem.
If route guidance is not activated, the di-
rection of travel (compass) and the name
of the street along which you are driving
are shown ››› Booklet Navigation system.
»
31
The essentials
Menu Function
Audio
Station display on the radio.
Track name on the CD.
Track name in Media mode ››› Booklet Ra-
dio or ››› Booklet Navigation system.
Tele-
phone
Information and possible configurations
of the mobile phone preinstallation
››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation
system.
Lap tim-
er
In a racing circuit, measurement and
memorisation of lap times by the vehicle
and comparison with previously measured
best times ››› page 36.
Vehicle
status
Display of the current warning or informa-
tion texts and other system components,
depending on the equipment
››› page 110.
Outside temperature display
When the outside temperature is below +4°C
(+39°F), the “ic
e c
r
ystal” symbol (warning of
risk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, this
symbol flashes and then it remains lit until
the outside temperature rises above +6°C
(+43°F) ›››
in Indications on the display on
p
ag
e 107
.
When the vehicle is at a standstill or when
travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be higher than the true
outside temperature as a result of the heat
produced by the engine.
The temperatures measured range from
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).
Gear-change indicator
Fig. 45 Instrument panel: gear-change indica-
t
or (m
anual
gearbox).
A gear change will be recommended if the
g
e
ar
you are in is not the most economical
choice. If no gear-change is recommended, it
means that you are already in the most eco-
nomical gear.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The following display symbols ››› Fig. 45
mean:
●
Change to a higher gear: the suggested
gear appears to the right of the current gear
when a higher gear is recommended.
●
Change to a lower gear: the suggested
gear appears to the left of the current gear
when a lower gear is recommended.
The gear recommendation may occasionally
skip a gear (2nd 4th).
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox*
The display is only visible in tiptronic mode
›››
page 182.
The following display symbols mean:
●
Shifting up a gear
●
Shifting down a gear
CAUTION
The gear-change indicator is intended to help
save f
uel, but it is not intended to recom-
mend the right gear for all driving situations.
In certain situations, only the driver can
choose the correct gear (for instance when
overtaking, driving up a steep gradient or
towing a trailer).
Note
The display disappears from the instrument
panel when
you press the clutch pedal.
32
The essentials
Bonnet, rear lid and doors open
Fig. 46 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C:
fr
ont
l
eft door open; D: rear right door open
(5-door vehicles only).
When the ignition is switched on or when
driv
in
g, the bonnet, r
ear lid or doors that are
open will be indicated on the instrument pan-
el display, and, as applicable, this will be in-
dicated audibly. The display may vary accord-
ing to the type of instrument panel fitted.
Illustra-
tion
Key to ››› Fig. 46
A
Do not continue driving!
The bonnet is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 262.
B
Do not continue driving!
The rear lid is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 126.
C, D
Do not continue driving!
A vehicle door is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 116.
Warning and information messages
The system runs a check on certain compo-
nents
and f
u
nctions when the ignition is
switched on and while the vehicle is moving.
Faults in the operation are displayed on the
screen using red and yellow symbols and
messages on the instrument panel display
(›››
page 109) and, in some cases, with
audible warnings. The display may vary ac-
cording to the type of instrument panel fitted.
Priority 1 warning (red symbols)
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
warnings.
Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warning
and control lamps on page 109 !
Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa-
ry, request assistance from specialised personnel.
Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
warnings.
A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct
levels may cause damage to the vehicle! ›››
in Warn-
ing and control lamps on page 109
Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces-
sary, request assistance from specialised personnel.
Informative text
Information relating to different vehicle processes.
Submenu Assist systems
Assist
systems
menu
Function
ACC
Display of Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) ››› page 196.
Front As-
sist
Switching the monitoring system on
and off ››› page 207.
Lane As-
sist*
Switching the Lane Assist system on
or off ››› page 215.
Detection
of traffic
signs
Display of traffic signs ››› page 222:
Fatigue de-
tection*
Switching the fatigue detection on or
off (pause recommendation)
››› page 224.
33
The essentials
Driving data
M
emor
y
The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ-
ent v
alues for the journey and the consump-
tion.
Changing between display modes on the
MFD
●
In vehicles without multifunction steering
wheel: Press the rocker switch
on the
winds
creen wiper lever
›››
Fig. 42.
●
Vehicles with a multifunction steering
wheel:
turn the thumbwheel
›››
Fig. 43.
Multifunction display memory
The multifunction display is equipped with
three memories that work automatically: MFD
from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD
total calculation. On the screen display, you
can read which memory is currently dis-
played.
●
Toggle between memories with the ignition
on and the memory displayed: Press the
button on the windscreen wiper lever
or the
button of the multifunction steering
wheel
.
Menu Function
MFD from
departure
Display and storage of the values for
the journey and the consumption from
when the ignition is switched on to
when it is switched off.
If the journey is continued in less than
2 hours after the ignition is switched
off, the new data is added to the data
already stored in the memory. The
memory will automatically be deleted if
the journey is interrupted for more than
2 hours.
MFD from
refuelling
Display and storage of the values for
the journey and the consumption. By
refuelling, the memory will be erased
automatically.
MFD total
calcula-
tion
The memory records the values for a
specific number of partial trips, up to a
total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99
hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km or
9999 km, depending on the model of
instrument panel. On reaching either of
these limits
a)
, the memory is automati-
cally erased and starts to count from 0
again.
a)
It varies according to the instrument panel version.
Erasing a memory manually
●
Select the memory that you wish to erase.
●
Hold the
button of the multifunction
s
t
eerin
g wheel or the
button of the multi-
f
u
nction wheel
pressed down for about 2 sec-
onds.
Personalising the displays
In the Easy Connect system you can adjust
which of the possible displays of the MFD can
be shown on the instrument panel display
with the button
and the function button
S
ETUP
›
››
p
age 110.
Dat
a summary
Menu Function
Current fuel
consumption
The current fuel consumption dis-
play operates throughout the jour-
ney, in litres/100 km; and with the
engine running and the vehicle
stopped, in litres/hour.
Average fuel
consumption
a)
After turning on the ignition, aver-
age fuel consumption in li-
tres/100 km will be displayed after
travelling about 100 metres. Other-
wise horizontal lines are displayed.
The value shown is updated approxi-
mately every 5 seconds.
ACT
®
*: Depending on the equip-
ment, number of active cylinders.
Operating
range
a)
Approximate distance in km that can
still be travelled with the fuel re-
maining in the tank, assuming the
same style of driving is maintained.
This is calculated using the current
fuel consumption.
Travelling
time
This indicates the hours (h) and mi-
nutes (min) since the ignition was
switched on.
34
The essentials
Menu Function
Distance
covered
Distance covered in km (m) after
switching on the ignition.
CNG quality
Whenever you refuel the quality of
the natural gas is automatically veri-
fied and is displayed when the igni-
tion is switched on. The display is
made in a percentage of between
70% and 100%. The greater the per-
centage displayed the lower the con-
sumption may be.
Average
speed
The average speed will be shown af-
ter a distance of about 100 metres
has been travelled. Otherwise hori-
zontal lines are displayed. The value
shown is updated approximately ev-
ery 5 seconds.
Digital dis-
play of
speed
Current speed displayed in digital
format.
Speed warn-
ing at ---
km/h or Speed
warning at
--- mph
If the stored speed is exceeded (be-
tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 -
155 mph), an audible warning is
given together with a visual warn-
ing.
Detection of
traffic
signs
The traffic signs detected are dis-
played.
Oil tempera-
ture
Updated engine oil temperature dig-
ital display
Menu Function
Coolant tem-
perature
gauge
Digital display of the current temper-
ature of the liquid coolant.
a)
In vehicles with a natural gas engine, range and average con-
sumption refer only to data or natural gas consumption. If you
are in “petrol mode”, the information of both data only appears
on the dash panel and not on the multifunction screen.
Storing a speed with the speed warning
●
Select the display Speed warning at
--- km/h (--- mph)
●
Press the button
on the windscreen
w
iper l
ev
er or the button
on the multifunc-
tion s
t
eerin
g wheel to store the current speed
and activate the warning.
●
To switch system on: adjust to the desired
speed within 5 seconds using the rocker
switch
on the windscreen wiper lever or
b
y
t
urning the thumbwheel on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel. Next, press the button
or
again or wait several seconds.
The s
peed i
s
stored and the warning activa-
ted.
●
To switch system off: press the but-
ton
or
. The stored speed is de-
l
et
ed.
En
gine oil temperature display
Vehicles without multifunction steering
wheel
●
Press the rocker switch ›››
Fig. 42
2
until
the main menu appe
ars. Enter into Driving
data. With the button
2
move to the oil
temperat
ure gauge.
Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
●
Enter the submenu Driving data and
turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera-
ture display appears.
The engine reaches its operating temperature
when in normal driving conditions, the oil
temperature is between 80°C (180°F) and
120°C (250°F). If the engine is required to
work hard and the outside temperature is
high, the engine oil temperature can in-
crease. This does not present any problem as
long as the warning lamps
›››
table on
page 41 or
›››
table on page 41 do not
appear on the display.
Additional electrical appliances
●
Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*:
Pr
e
s
s the rocker switch
›››
Fig. 42
2
until the
m
ain menu ap
pe
ars. Enter into the section
Driving data. With the rocker switch,
move to the display Convenience con-
sumers.
»
35
The essentials
●
Oper
ation with
the
multi-function steering
wheel*: Move with the buttons
1
or
2
to
Driving data and ent
er w
ith
OK. Turn the
thumbwheel to the right until the Conven-
ience consumers display appears.
In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur-
rent sum of all the additional appliances.
Saving tips
Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in
c
ondition
s
that increase fuel consumption.
Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi-
cations appear automatically only with the ef-
ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will
disappear automatically.
If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately
after it appears, press any button on the
windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer-
ing wheel*.
Note
●
If y
ou hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-
ter you switch the ignition on again.
●
The saving tips do not appear in all situa-
tions, but rather with a large separation of
time.
Timer*
You can access the timer via the selection
menu ›››
page 31.
It allows you to manually time lap times on a
racing circuit, memorise them and compare
them to the vehicle's previous best times.
The following menus can be displayed:
●
Stop
●
Lap
●
Pause
●
Partial time
●
Statistics
Change from one menu to another
●
Vehicles without multifunction steering
wheel:
press the rocker switch
in the
w
ind
s
creen wiper lever.
●
Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:
press
or
.
Menu “Stop”
Start
The timer starts.
If there are existing laps and they are in-
cluded in the statistics, it will begin with
the number of laps in question.
It is only possible to begin with a new
first lap if the statistics have been reset
first in the Statistics menu.
Menu “Stop”
Since
start
The timer begins when the vehicle sets
off.
If the vehicle is already moving, the timer
begins once the vehicle has stopped.
Statis-
tics
The Statistics menu is displayed on
the screen.
Menu “Lap”
New lap
The timer of the current lap stops and a
new lap starts immediately. The time for
the lap you have just completed is inclu-
ded in the statistics.
Partial
time
For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis-
played. The timer continues in parallel.
Stop
The current lap timer will be interrupted.
The lap does not end. The Pause menu
is displayed.
Menu “Pause”
Continue The interrupted timer continues.
New lap
A new timer starts. The halted lap ends
and is included in the statistics.
Interr.
lap
The timer of the current lap ends and is
cancelled. It is not included in the statis-
tics.
End
The current timer ends. The lap is inclu-
ded in the statistics.
36
The essentials
Menu “Partial time”
Partial
time
For about 5 seconds a partial time is dis-
played. The timer continues in parallel.
New lap
The timer of the current lap stops and a
new lap starts immediately. The time for
the lap you have just completed is inclu-
ded in the statistics.
Stop
The current lap timer will be interrupted.
The lap does not end. The Pause menu
is displayed.
Menu “Long-term Statistics”
View of the latest lap times:
– total time
– best lap time
– worst lap time
– average lap duration
A maximum of 10 laps is possible, and a
total duration of 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds.
If one of the 2 limits is reached, you will
have to reset the statistics in order to be-
gin a new timer.
Back This returns to the previous menu.
Resetting
to zero
All the memorised statistical data are re-
set.
WARNING
Do your best to avoid handling the timer
while driv
ing.
●
Only set the timer or consult statistics
when the vehicle is stationary.
●
While driv
ing, do not handle the timer in
complicated driving situations.
Speed warning device
The speed warning device warns the driver
when they hav
e exceeded the pre-set speed
limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning
signal sounds, and the warning lamp and
the driver message Speed limit excee-
ded! will be displayed simultaneously on the
instrument panel. The warning lamp
switches off when reducing speed below the
stored maximum limit.
Speed warning programming is recommen-
ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi-
mum speed, such as when travelling in a
country with different speed limits or for a
maximum speed for winter tyres.
Setting speed limit warning
You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to
set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.
●
Vehicles with radio: pres
s the button
SETUP
> control button Driver Assistant >
Speed warning.
●
Vehicles with Easy Connect: pr
e
s
s the but-
ton Systems or else Vehicle systems >
Driver assistant > Speed warning.
The warning limit can be set from 30 to
240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustment
is made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals.
Note
●
Plea
se bear in mind that, even with the
speed warning function, it is still important
to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the
speedometer and to observe the legal speed
limits.
●
The speed limit warning function in the ver-
sion for some countries warns you at a speed
of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set
speed limit.
Service intervals
The service interval indication appears on the
in
s
trument
panel display
›››
Fig. 120
3
.
S
EA
T di
stinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and
services without engine oil change (e.g. In-
spection).
In vehicles with Services established by time
or mileage, the service intervals are already
pre-defined.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-
vals are determined individually. Thanks to
technological progress, maintenance work
has been greatly reduced. Because of the
technology used by SEAT, with this service
»
37
The essentials
you only need to change the oil when the ve-
hic
l
e so r
equires. To calculate this change
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of
use and individual driving styles are consid-
ered. The advance warning first appears 20
days before the date established for the cor-
responding service. The kilometres (miles)
remaining until the next service are always
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles)
and the time is given in complete days. The
current service message cannot be viewed
until 500 km after the last service. Prior to
this, only lines are visible on the display.
Inspection reminder
When the Service date is approaching, when
the ignition is switched on a Service remind-
er is displayed.
Vehicles without text messages: a span-
ner will be displayed on the instrument
panel plus an indication in km.
The kilometres indicated are the maximum
number of kilometres that can be travelled
until the next service. After a few seconds,
the display mode changes. A clock symbol
appears and the number of days until the
next service is due.
Vehicles with text messages: Service in
--- km or --- days will be shown on the
instrument panel display.
Service due
When the service date is due, an audible
warning is given when the ignition is switch-
ed on and the spanner displayed on the
screen flashes for a few seconds .
Vehicles with text messages: Service now
will be shown on the instrument panel dis-
play.
Reading a service notification
With the ignition switched on, the engine off
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current
service notification can be read:
Press and hold the button ›››
Fig. 120
4
for more than 5 seconds to consult the serv-
ic
e me
s
sage.
When the service date has passed, a minus
sign is displayed in front of the number of kil-
ometres or days.
Vehicles with text messages: the following
message is displayed: Service --- km
(miles) or --- days ago.
The time can also be set via the
button
and
S
ETUP
function button in the Easy Con-
nect
sy
s
tem ›››
page 110.
Resetting service interval display
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
lows:
●
Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-
ton ›››
Fig. 120
4
.
●
Switch ignition back on.
●
Release the
4
›
››
Fig. 120
b
utton and
press it again for the next 20 seconds.
Note
●
The servic
e message disappears after a few
seconds, when the engine is started or when
OK/RESET
is pressed on the windscreen wiper
lever
, or
OK
on the multifunction steering
wheel.
●
In v
ehicles with the LongLife system in
which the battery has been disconnected for
a long period of time, it is not possible to cal-
culate the date of the next service. Therefore
the service interval display may not be cor-
rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum
service intervals permitted in the ››› Book-
let Maintenance Programme.
●
If you reset the display manually, the next
service interval will be indicated as in vehi-
cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea-
son we recommend that the service interval
display be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer.
38
The essentials
Cruise control
Oper
atin
g the c
ruise control system
(CCS)*
Fig. 47 On the left of the steering column:
sw
it
c
hes and controls for operating the CCS
Fig. 48 On the left of the steering column:
thir
d l
ev
er to operate the CCS.
Operation of the turn signal lever
●
Switching on the CCS: Move switch
›
›
›
Fig. 47
1
to .
The system is on. If no
s
peed h
as been programmed, the system will
not control it.
●
Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 47
2
in the ar
e
a.
The current speed is
memorised and controlled.
●
Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move
switch ››› Fig. 47
1
to
or push the
br
ak
e. The cruise control system is switched
off temporarily.
●
Reactivating the CCS: Press button
››› Fig. 47
2
in
. The memorised speed
i
s saved and controlled again.
●
Increasing stored speed during CCS regula-
tion: press button
2
in
. The vehicle ac-
c
elerates until the new stored speed.
●
Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-
tion: press button
2
in t
o lower the
s
peed b
y 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced
until reaching the new stored speed.
●
Switching off the CCS: Move switch
››› Fig. 47
1
to .
The system is disconnec-
t
ed and the memori
sed speed is deleted.
Operation using the third lever
●
Switching on the CCS: move the third lever
to ››› Fig. 48. The system switches on but it
does not control the speed as no speed has
been programmed.
●
Activating the CCS: press the ››› Fig. 48
button. It memorises and maintains the cur-
rent speed.
●
Temporarily switching off the CCS: move
the lever to ››› Fig. 48 and release it or
press the brake pedal. The cruise control sys-
tem is switched off temporarily.
●
Reactivating the CCS: move the lever to
››› Fig. 48 and release it. The memo-
rised speed is saved and controlled again.
●
Switching off the CCS: move the third lever
to position ››› Fig. 48. The system is dis-
connected and the memorised speed is de-
leted.
››› in Operation on page 196
››› page 195
39
The essentials
Warning lamps
On the in
s
trument
panel
Fig. 49 Instrument panel, on dash panel
Red warning lamps
Central warning lamp: additional
information on the instrument pan-
el display
–
Parking brake on.
››› page
172
››› page
175
Do not continue driving!
The brake fluid level is too low or
there is a fault in the brake system.
Lit up or flashing:
Do not continue driving!
Fault in the steering.
››› page
253
Driver or passenger has not fas-
tened seat belt.
››› page
71
Use the foot brake!
Yellow warning lamps
Central warning lamp: additional
information on the instrument pan-
el display
–
40
The essentials
Front brake pads worn.
››› page
176
it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis-
connection caused by the system.
flashes: ESC or ASR activated.
ASR manually deactivated.
ESC in Sport mode or OFF
ABS faulty or does not work.
Rear fog light switched on.
››› page
131
lights up or flashes: fault in the
emission control system.
››› page
189
it lights up: pre-heating of diesel
engine.
››› page
190
flashes: fault in the diesel engine
management.
fault in the petrol engine manage-
ment.
››› page
190
lights up or flashes: fault in the
steering system.
››› page
253
Tyre pressure too low, or fault in
the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem.
››› page
275
Fuel tank almost empty.
››› page
104
Fault in airbag system and seat
belt tensioners.
››› page
76
Lane Assist is switched on, but not
active.
››› page
213
Other warning lamps
Left or right turn signal.
››› page
131
Hazard warning lights on.
››› page
135
Trailer turn signals
››› page
234
it lights up: Press the foot brake!
flashes: the selector lever locking
button has not engaged.
››› page
180
it lights up: cruise control activated
or speed limiter switched on and
active.
››› page
195
flashes: the speed set by the
speed limiter has been exceeded.
green warning lamp: Lane Assist is
switched on and active.
››› page
213
Main beam on or flasher on.
››› page
131
Natural gas operating mode
››› page
108
On the instrument panel display
Fig. 50 On the instrument panel display: door
open.
Do not continue driving!
With the corresponding indica-
tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnet
open or not properly closed.
››› page
116
››› page
126
››› page
262
Ignition:
Do not carry on driv-
ing! Engine coolant level too low,
coolant temperature too high
››› page
266
Flashing: Fault in the engine
coolant system.
»
41
The essentials
Do not continue driving!
Engine oil pressure too low. If
the warning lamp flashes, stop
driving, even if the oil level is
correct. Do not even run the en-
gine at idle speed!
››› page
264
Fault in the battery.
››› page
269
Driving light totally or partially
faulty.
››› page
93
Fault in the cornering light sys-
tem.
››› page
131
Diesel particulate filter blocked
››› page
190
Level of windscreen washer fluid
too low.
››› page
139
Flashing: Fault in the oil level de-
tection. Control manually.
››› page
264
Ignition: Insufficient engine oil.
Fault in the gearbox.
››› page
187
Light Assist on.
››› page
132
Immobiliser active.
Service interval display
››› page
37
Mobile telephone is connected
via Bluetooth to the original tele-
phone device.
››› Book-
let Radio
or
››› Book-
let Navi-
gation
system
Mobile telephone battery charge
meter. Available only for devices
pre-installed in factory.
Freezing warning. The outside
temperature is lower than +4°C
(+39°F).
››› page
32
Start-Stop system activated.
››› page
191
Start-Stop system unavailable.
Low consumption driving status
››› page
31
On the instrument panel
Fig. 51 Warning lamp for disabling the front
p
a
s
senger airbag.
Front passenger front airbag is
disabled (
).
››› page
76
The front passenger front airbag
is activated (
).
››› page
76
››› in Warning and control lamps on
page 109
››› page 109
Gearbox lever
M
anua
l
gearbox
Fig. 52 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed
m
anual
g
earbox
The position of the gears is indicated on the
g
e
arbo
x lever ››› Fig. 52.
42
The essentials
●
Pr
e
s
s the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
sition.
●
Release the clutch.
Selecting reverse gear
●
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it
upwards, move it to the left as far as it will go
and then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 52
R
.
●
Release the clutch.
››› in Changing gear on page 179
››› page 179
Automatic gearbox*
Fig. 53 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po-
s
ition
s.
Parking lock
R
ev
er
se gear
Neutral (idling)
Drive (forward)
Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards
(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to
go down a gear.
››› in Selector lever positions on
page 181
››› page 180
››› page 43
P
R
N
D/S
+/–
Manual release of the selector lever
Fig. 54 Selector lever: manual release from
po
s
ition P
.
Should the power supply be interrupted,
ther
e i
s
a manual unlocking device located
under the console of the selector lever, on
the right. Releasing the selector lever re-
quires a certain degree of practical skill.
●
Unlocking: use the flat part of a screwdriver
blade.
Removing the cover from the selector lever
●
Apply the handbrake ›››
to ensure that
the c
ar doe
s
not move.
●
Carefully pull the corners of the selector
lever boot and twist it upwards above the lev-
er handle.
»
43
The essentials
Releasing the selector lever
●
Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel-
lo
w u
n
locking tab sideways ››› Fig. 54.
●
Now press the interlock button on the se-
lector lever
A
and move the selector lever to
po
s
ition
N.
●
After carrying out the manual release, at-
tach the selector lever boot on the gearbox
console again.
If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis-
charged battery) and the vehicle has to be
pushed or towed, the selector lever must first
be moved to position N, after operating the
manual release mechanism.
WARNING
The selector lever may be moved out of posi-
tion P only when the h
andbrake is firmly ap-
plied. If this does not work, secure the vehi-
cle with the brake pedal. On a slope the vehi-
cle could otherwise start to move inadver-
tently af
ter shifting the selector lever out of
position P - accident risk!
44
The essentials
Air conditioning
Ho
w doe
s
Climatronic* work?
Fig. 55 In the centre console: Climatronic con-
trol
s
To switch a specific function on, press the ap-
pr
opri
at
e button. Press the button again to
switch off the function.
The LED on each control lights up to indicate
that the respective function of a control has
been switched on.
1
Temperature
The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: Turn the control to adjust the temperature
2
Fan
The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. The fan is also adjusted manually by turning the control.
3
Air distribution
The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons
3
.
4
Indications on the temperature display screen selected for the right and left sides.
»
45
The essentials
Defrost function
The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind-
screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.
The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.
Air distribution towards the footwell.
Upward air distribution.
Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.
Air recirculation
Seat heating buttons
Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.
Press the button to make maximum cooling capacity available. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distri-
bution adjusts automatically to the position
.
When the warning light for button
lights up, the settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side. Press the button or the temper-
ature control on the passenger side
Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Press the button: the warning lamp on the button will light up
.
Press the configuration button
: the air conditioning operation menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect system screen.
Switching off
Turn the blower control to the
position or press the
button.
››› in Introduction on page 163
››› page 163
46
The essentials
How does the manual air conditioning work*?
Fig. 56 In the centre console: Manual air condi-
tioning contr
ols
To switch a specific function on, press the ap-
pr
opri
at
e button. Press the button again to
switch off the function.
The LED on each control lights up to indicate
that the respective function of a control has
been switched on.
1
Temperature
Turn the control to adjust the temperature
2
Fan
Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off
Level 6: maximum fan level.
3
Air distribution
Rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.
Defrost function
The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the
windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.
The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.
Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area.
»
47
The essentials
Air distribution towards the footwell.
Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.
Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.
Air recirculation
Seat heating buttons
Maximum cooling power. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distribution adjusts automatically to the
position
››› in Introduction on page 163
››› page 163
How does the heating and the fresh air system work?
Fig. 57 In the centre console: heating system and
fresh air c
ontrols.
48
The essentials
To switch a specific function on, press the ap-
pr
opri
at
e button. Press the button again to
switch off the function.
The LED on each control lights up to indicate
that the respective function of a control has
been switched on.
1
Temperature
Turn the control to adjust the temperature. The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot cool
or dehumidify the air
2
Fan
Setting 0: blower, heating and fresh air systems switched off
Level 6: maximum fan level
3
Air distribution
Rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.
Defrost function
The airflow is directed at the windscreen.
The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.
Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area.
Air distribution towards the footwell.
Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.
Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes
Air recirculation ››› page 166
Seat heating buttons
››› in Introduction on page 163
››› page 163
49
The essentials
Fluid Level control
Fi
l
lin
g capacities
Tank level
Petrol and diesel
engines
50 l, of which, approx. 7 l reserve
Vehicles with all-wheel-drive:
55 l, of which, approx. 8.5 l re-
serve
Natural gas en-
gine
a)
approx. 15 kg
a)
The capacity depends on the efficacy and characteristics of
the natural gas pumps. The capacity indicated is based on a
minimum loading pressure of 200 bar.
Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid container
Versions without
headlight washer
system
approx. 3 litres
Versions with
headlight washer
system
approx. 5 litres
Fuel
Fig. 58 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked
and loc
k
ed aut
omatically using the central
locking.
Opening the fuel tank cap
●
Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the
left side.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
●
Place it in the space on the hinge of the
open flap ››› Fig. 58.
Closing the fuel tank cap
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go.
●
Close the lid.
››› in Filling up on page 257
››› page 256
Oil
Fig. 59 Engine oil dipstick.
Fig. 60 In the engine compartment: Engine
oi
l
fi
ller cap
50
The essentials
The level is measured using the dipstick loca-
t
ed in the en
gine c
ompartment
›››
page 262.
The oil should leave a mark between zones
A
and
C
. It should never exceed zone
A
.
●
Zone
A
: Do not add oil.
●
Zone
B
: You can add oil but keep the level
in th
at
zone.
●
Zone
C
: Add oil up to zone
B
.
T
op
pin
g up engine oil
●
Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.
●
Add oil slowly.
●
At the same time, check the level to ensure
you do not add too much.
●
When the oil level reaches at least zone
B
,
u
n
s
crew the engine oil filler cap carefully.
Oil properties
Engine type Specification
Petrol without flexible
service interval
VW 502 00/VW 504 00
Petrol with flexible serv-
ice interval (LongLife)
VW 504 00
Diesel. Engines without
Particulate filter (DPF)
VW 505 01/VW 506 01/VW
507 00
Engine type Specification
Diesel. Particulate Filter
Engines (DPF).
With or without flexible
service interval (with
and without LongLife)
a)
VW 507 00
Natural gas engines VW 502 00
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the
engine.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
››› in Changing engine oil on page 266
››› page 264
Coolant
Fig. 61 Engine compartment: coolant expan-
s
ion t
ank
cap.
The coolant tank is located in the engine
c
omp
ar
tment ›››
page 262.
When the engine is cold, replace the coolant
when the level is below .
Coolant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from
the factory with a specially treated mixture of
water and at least 40 % of the additive G13
(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the
necessary frost protection down to -25°C
(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of
the engine cooling system against corrosion.
It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-
ses the boiling point of the coolant.
To protect the cooling system, the percentage
of additive must always be at least 40 %,
»
51
The essentials
even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-
t
ection i
s
not required.
If for weather reasons further protection is
necessary, the proportion of additive may be
increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-
tifreeze protection will diminish and this will
worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
of distilled water and at least 40 % of the
G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive
(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-
corrosion protection ›››
in Topping up cool-
ant on p
ag
e 267
. The mixture of G13 with
G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11
(green-blue) engine coolants will significant-
ly reduce anti-corrosion protection and
should therefore be avoided ›››
in Topping
up c
oo
l
ant on page 267.
››› in Topping up coolant on page 267
››› page 266
Brake fluid
Fig. 62 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-
er
v
oir c
ap
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine c
omp
ar
tment ›››
page 262.
The level should be between the and
marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni-
cal Service.
››› in Topping up brake fluid on
page 268
››› page 267
Windscreen washer
Fig. 63 In the engine compartment: wind-
s
c
r
een washer reservoir top.
The windscreen washer reservoir is located in
the en
gine c
omp
artment ›››
page 262.
To top up, mix water with a product recom-
mended by SEAT.
In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.
››› in Checking and topping up the
windscreen washer reservoir on
page 268
››› page 268
Battery
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment
›
›
›
page 262. It does not require
52
The essentials
Emergencies
F
u
se
s
Fuse location
Fig. 64 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse
bo
x
c
over
Fig. 65 In the engine compartment: fuse box
c
o
v
er
Underneath the instrument panel
The f
u
se bo
x is located behind the storage
compartment ››› Fig. 64.
In the engine compartment
Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box
cover ››› Fig. 65.
Identifying fuses situated below the dash
panel by colours
Colour Amp rating
Black 1
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40
››› in Introduction on page 91
››› page 91
Replacing a blown fuse
Fig. 66 Image of a blown fuse
Preparation
●
Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-
tric
al
equipment
.
●
Open the corresponding fuse box
›››
page 92.
Identifying a blown fuse
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured
››› Fig. 66.
●
Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has
blown.
To replace a fuse
●
Remove the fuse.
●
Replace the blown fuse by one with an
identical amperage rating (same colour and
markings) and identical size.
54
The essentials
●
R
ep
l
ace the cover again or close the fuse
box lid.
Bulbs
Bulbs (12 V)
Light source used for each function
Halogen headlights Type
Daytime running light/side
light
P21W SLL
Dipped beam headlights H7 LL
Main beam headlights H7 LL
Turn signal PY21W LL
Full-LED main headlights Type
No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs
Front fog light Type
Fog/cornering lights* H8
Rear lights Type
Brake light/tail light P21W LL
Side lights 2x W5W LL
Turn signal PY21W LL
Rear lights Type
Retro fog light H21W
Reverse lights P21W LL
LED rear lights Type
Turn signal PY21W LL
Retro fog light H21W
Reverse lights P21W LL
The remaining functions work with LEDs
››› page 93
Action in the event of a punc-
t
ur
e
Wh
at to do first
●
Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface
and in a s
af
e p
lace as far away from traffic as
possible.
●
Apply the handbrake.
●
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
●
Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.
●
Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever
to position P.
●
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
your vehicle.
●
Have the vehicle tool kit ›››
page 85
and the spare wheel* ready
›››
page 278.
●
Observe the applicable legislation for each
country (reflective vest, warning triangles,
etc.).
●
All occupants should leave the vehicle and
wait in a safe place (for instance behind the
roadside crash barrier).
WARNING
●
Alwa
ys observe the above steps and pro-
tect yourself and other road users.
●
If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car with
a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
55
The essentials
Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-
t
ur
e k
it
Fig. 67 Standard representation: contents of
the anti-p
u
nct
ure kit.
The anti-puncture kit is located under the
floor p
anel
in the lug
gage compartment.
Sealing the tyre
●
Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
the ››› Fig. 67
1
tool to remove the insert.
Pl
ac
e it
on a clean surface.
●
Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
››› Fig. 67
10
.
●
Screw the inflator tube ›
›
›
Fig. 67
3
into
the se
al
ant
bottle. The bottle's seal will break
automatically.
●
Remove the lid from the filling tube
››› Fig. 67
3
and screw the open end of the
t
ube int
o the ty
re valve.
●
With the tyre sealant bottle upside down,
fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant
bottle.
●
Remove the bottle from the valve.
●
Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-
ing the tool ››› Fig. 67
1
.
Infl
atin
g the ty
re
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube
››› Fig. 67
5
into the tyre valve.
●
Check that the air bleed screw is closed
›
›
›
Fig. 67
7
.
●
Start the engine and leave it running.
●
Insert the connector ›
›
›
Fig. 67
9
into the
v
ehic
l
e's 12-volt socket ›››
page 150.
●
Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF
switch ››› Fig. 67
8
.
●
Keep the air compressor running until it
r
e
ac
hes 2.0 to 2.5 bar
(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8
minutes.
●
Disconnect the air compressor.
●
If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
●
Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distrib
uted throughout the tyre.
●
Screw the c
ompressor tyre inflator into the
valve.
●
Repeat the inflation process.
●
If the indicated pressure still cannot be
reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
and request assistance from an authorised
technician.
●
Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
●
When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
›››
page 87.
››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on
page 85
››› page 85
56
The essentials
Changing a wheel
V
ehic
l
e tool kit
Fig. 68 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-
g
ag
e c
ompartment: vehicle tool kit.
An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
T
o
wline anc
horage
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
Crank handle for jack
Jack*
Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov-
ers*/wheel bolt cap clip.
››› in What to do first on page 55
››› page 85
1
2
3
4
5
6
Wheel covers*
Fig. 69 Remove the wheel cover.
The wheel covers must be removed for access
t
o the wheel
bo
lts.
Removing
●
Remove the wheel cover using the wire
hook ››› Fig. 69.
●
Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the
wheel cover.
Fitting
●
Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by
pressing it firmly.
●
Put pressure on the point of the cut-out for
the valve.
●
Next fit the rest of the wheel cover.
Wheel bolt caps*
Fig. 70 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.
Removal
●
Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the
c
ap u
nti
l it clicks into place ››› Fig. 70.
●
Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
57
The essentials
Anti-theft wheel bolts
Fig. 71 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and
a
d
apt
er.
●
Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.
●
Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools)
ont
o the anti-thef
t
wheel bolt and push it on
as far as it will go.
●
Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto
the adapter as far as it will go.
●
Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 58.
Note
Make a note of the code number of the anti-
theft wheel
bolt and keep it in a safe place,
but not in your vehicle. If you need a new
adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Offi-
cial Service, indicating the code number.
Loosening the wheel bolts
Fig. 72 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts.
●
Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) onto
the wheel
bo
lt
as far as it will go. An adapter
is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-
theft wheel bolts ››› page 58.
●
Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn
to the left ››› Fig. 72 (arrow). To apply the re-
quired torque, hold the wheel brace at the
end. If it is not possible to loosen a wheel
bolt, carefully apply pressure with one foot
on the end of the box spanner. Hold on to the
vehicle for support and take care not to slip.
WARNING
Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn) be-
fore r
aising the vehicle with the jack*. If not,
an accident may occur.
Lifting the vehicle
Fig. 73 Crossbar: marks.
Fig. 74 Strut: mounting the jack on the vehi-
c
l
e.
●
Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm
gr
ou
nd. If
necessary use a large, strong
board or similar support. If the surface is slip-
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-
ping ›››
.
58
The essentials
●
Find the s
up
por
t point on the strut (sunken
area) closest to the wheel to be changed
››› Fig. 73.
●
Turn the jack*, located below the strut sup-
port point, to raise it until tab
1
›
›› Fig. 74
i
s
below the housing provided.
●
Align the jack* so that tab
1
“grips” onto
the hou
s
in
g provided on the strut and the
mobile base
2
is resting on the ground. The
b
a
se p
late
2
should fall vertically with re-
s
pect
t
o the support point
1
.
●
Continue turning the jack* until the wheel
i
s
s
lightly lifted off the ground.
WARNING
●
Make s
ure that the jack* remains stable. If
the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could
slip or sink, respectively, with the resultant
risk of injury.
●
Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-
plied by the manufacturer. Other vehicles
could slip, with the consequent risk of injury.
●
Only mount the jack* on the support points
designed for this purpose on the strut, and
always align the jack correctly. If you do not,
the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad-
equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury!
●
The height of the parked vehicle can
change as a result of variations in tempera-
ture and loading.
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be raised on the cross-
bar. On
ly place the jack* on the points de-
signed for this purpose on the strut. Other-
wise, the vehicle may be damaged.
Removing and fitting a wheel
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
bolts and r
aising the vehicle with the jack.
Taking off the wheel
●
Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box
spanner and p
lace them on a clean surface.
●
Take off the wheel.
Putting on the spare wheel
When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation
direction, observe the instructions in
›››
page 59.
●
Mount the wheel.
●
Screw on the wheel bolts in position and
tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
●
Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.
●
Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs
using the wheel brace.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-
ting the wheel.
Tyres with compulsory direction of ro-
tation
A directional tread pattern can be identified
by the arr
ows on the sidewall that point in
the direction of rotation. Always observe the
direction of rotation indicated when fitting
the wheel to guarantee optimum properties
of this type of tyres with regard to grip,
noises, wear and aquaplaning.
If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare
tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive
with care as this means the tyre does not of-
fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-
ticular importance when the road surface is
wet.
To return to directional tread tires, replace
the punctured tyre as soon as possible and
restore the obligatory direction of rotation of
all tyres.
Subsequent work
●
Alloy wheels: r
ep
l
ace the wheel bolt caps.
●
Plate wheels: repl
ace the wheel hubcap
›››
page 57.
»
59
The essentials
●
R
et
urn al
l tools to their proper storing loca-
tion.
●
If the replaced wheel does not fit in the
spare wheel housing, store it safely in the
luggage compartment ›››
page 151.
●
Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
ted tyre as soon as possible.
●
In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi-
cator, adjust the pressure and store the read-
ing in the radio/Easy Connect system*
›››
page 275.
●
Have the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-
que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean-
while, drive carefully.
●
Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
possible.
Snow chains
Use
Snow chains should only be used on the
fr
on
t
wheels.
Check that they are correctly seated after
driving for a few yards; correct the position if
necessary, in accordance with the manufac-
turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speed
below 50 km/h (30 mph).
If there is a danger of being trapped despite
having mounted the chains, it is best to disa-
ble the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC
›››
page 178, Switching on/off the ESC
and ASR.
Snow chains will improve braking ability as
well as traction in winter conditions.
For technical reasons snow chains may only
be used with the following wheel rim/tyre
combination.
195/65 R15 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
205/55 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
225/45 R17 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm
225/40 R18 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm
Remove wheel covers and any integral trim
rin
g bef
or
e fitting snow chains.
Remove the chains when roads are free of
snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the
wheels become damaged quickly and may
even be rendered unusable.
Emergency towing of the vehi-
cle
Towing
Fig. 75 Right side of the front bumper: tow-
line anc
hor
ag
e screwed in.
Fig. 76 Right side of the rear bumper: towline
anc
hor
ag
e screwed in.
60
The essentials
Towline anchorages
Att
ac
h the b
ar or rope to the towline ancho-
rages.
The towline anchorages are located under
the floor panel in the luggage compartment,
next to the vehicle tools ›››
page 85.
Screw the towline anchorage into the screw
connection ››› Fig. 75 o ››› Fig. 76 and tighten
it with the wheel brace.
Tow rope or tow bar
The tow bar offers increased safety and a
lower risk of damage.
The tow rope is recommended when there is
no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does
not damage the vehicle.
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
●
The tow rope must be taut before you drive
off.
●
Release the clutch very carefully when start-
ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler-
ate gently (automatic gearbox).
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially
when using a tow rope. Both drivers should
realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In-
experienced drivers should not attempt to
tow.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle
and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.
When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-
ways a risk of overloading and damaging the
anchorage points.
Switch on the ignition so that the turn sig-
nals, windscreen wipers and windscreen
washer can work. Ensure that the steering
wheel is unlocked and moves freely.
Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles
with a manual gearbox. With an automatic
gearbox, place the lever in N.
To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The
brake servo does not work when the engine
is switched off.
The power steering only works when the igni-
tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving,
provided that the battery is sufficiently charg-
ed. Otherwise, it will need more force.
Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all
times.
››› in General information on page 88
››› page 88
Tow-starting
If the engine will not start, first try starting it
usin
g the battery of another vehicle
››› page 61. You should only attempt to tow-
start a vehicle if charging the battery does
not work. This is done by leveraging wheel
movement.
When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-
gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-
tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the
catalytic converter.
●
Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off.
●
Press the clutch and hold the pedal down.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Once both vehicles are moving, release the
clutc
h.
●
As soon as the engine has started, press
the clutch and move the gear lever to neutral.
How to jump start
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
c
r
o
ss section.
If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
charged battery, the battery can be connec-
ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
the engine.
»
61
The essentials
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
72553 (see c
ab
l
e manufacturer's instruc-
tions). The wire cross section must be at least
25 mm
2
for petrol engines and at least
35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
●
The vehic
les must not touch each other,
otherwise electricity could flow as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
●
The discharged battery must be properly
connected to the on-board network.
How to jump start: description
Fig. 77 Diagram of connections for vehicles
w
ithout
Start Stop system
Fig. 78 Diagram of connections for vehicles
with St
art Stop system
Jump lead terminal connections
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles
›
›
›
.
2. Connect one end of the r
e
d
jump lead to
the positive
+
terminal of the vehicle
w
ith the fl
at
battery
A
›
›
› Fig. 77
.
3. Connect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal
+
in the ve-
hic
l
e pr
oviding assistance
B
.
4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:
c
onnect
one end of
the black jump lead to
the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle
pr
o
v
iding the current
B
›
›
› Fig. 77
.
–
For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-
nect one end of the black jump lead
X
to a
s
uit
ab
le ground terminal, to a solid piece of
metal in the engine block, or to the engine
block itself ››› Fig. 78.
5. Connect the other end of the black jump
lead
X
to a solid metal component bolted
t
o the en
gine b
lock or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery.
Do not connect it to a point near the bat-
tery
A
.
6. Position the leads in such a way that they
c
annot
c
ome into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
boosting battery and let it run at idling
speed.
8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat
battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until
the engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch
off the dipped beam headlights if they are
switched on.
10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear
window in the vehicle with the flat battery.
This helps minimise voltage peaks which
are generated when the leads are discon-
nected.
11.When the engine is running, disconnect
the leads in reverse order to the details
given above.
62
The essentials
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient
met
al-t
o-met
al contact with the battery termi-
nals.
If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-
onds, switch off the starter and try again after
about 1 minute.
WARNING
●
Plea
se note the safety warnings referring to
working in the engine compartment
›››
page 262.
●
The battery providing assistance must have
the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and
approximately the same capacity (see imprint
on battery). Failure to comply could result in
an explosion.
●
Never use jump leads when one of the bat-
teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af-
ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could
leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery
freezes, it should be replaced.
●
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes
away from batteries, danger of explosion.
Failure to comply could result in an explo-
sion.
●
Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
●
Do not connect the negative cable from the
other vehicle directly to the negative terminal
of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the
battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of
explosion.
●
Do not attac
h the negative cable from the
other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to
the brake line.
●
The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-
hicle, this can cause a short circuit.
●
Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
●
Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-
sult in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-
erwi
se electricity could flow as soon as the
positive terminals are connected.
Changing the wiper blades
W
ind
s
creen wipers service position
Fig. 79 Wipers in service position
The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-
er
s
ar
e in service position ››› Fig. 79.
●
Close the bonnet ›››
page 262.
●
Switch the ignition on and off.
●
Press the windscreen wiper lever down-
wards briefly
4
›
›
› p
age 26.
Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.
Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-
screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-
tion.
››› page 87
63
The essentials
Changing the windscreen and rear
w
indo
w w
iper blades
Fig. 80 Changing the windscreen wiper
b
l
a
des
Fig. 81 Changing the rear wiper blade
Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms
●
Place the windscreen wipers in the service
po
s
ition ›
›› page 63.
●
Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas-
tening point.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
●
Raise the wiper arms.
●
Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
from the windscreen wiper blades.
●
If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or
damp cloth may be used ›››
in Changing
the w
ind
s
creen and rear window wiper
blades on page 88.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
●
Lift and unfold the wiper arms.
●
Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 80
1
and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-
r
ection of
the arr
ow.
●
Fit a new wiper blade of the same length
and design on to the wiper arm and hook it
into place.
●
Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
Changing the rear wiper blade
●
Raising/lowering the wiper arm.
●
Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 81 (arrow
A
).
●
Hold down the release button
1
while
g
ently
p
ulling the blade in the direction of ar-
row
B
.
●
Insert a new blade of the s
ame l
en
gth and
type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-
rection to the arrow
B
and hook into place
b
utt
on
1
.
●
R
ep
l
ace the wiper arm on the rear window.
››› in Changing the windscreen and
rear window wiper blades on page 88
››› page 87
64
Safe driving
Safety
Saf
e driv
in
g
Safety first!
WARNING
●
This m
anual contains important informa-
tion about the operation of the vehicle, both
for the driver and the passengers. The other
sections of the on-board documentation also
contain further information that you should
be aware of for your own safety and for the
safety of your passengers.
●
Ensure that the on-board documentation is
kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-
cially important when lending or selling the
vehicle to another person.
Advice about driving
B
ef
or
e starting every trip
For your own safety and the safety of your
p
a
s
sengers, always note the following points
before every trip:
–
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
signals are working properly.
–
Check tyre pressure.
–
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and
good view of the surroundings.
–
Make sure all luggage is secured
››› page 151.
–
Make sure that no objects can interfere
with the pedals.
–
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir-
rors properly according to your size.
–
Ensure that the passengers in the rear
seats always have the head restraints in
the in-use position ››› page 69.
–
Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
straints according to their height.
–
Protect children with appropriate child
seats and properly applied seat belts
››› page 82.
–
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper
sitting position. ››› page 66.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts
properly. ››› page 71.
What affects driving safety?
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
and
y
our p
assengers. When your concentra-
tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-
cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as
others on the road ›››
, for this reason:
–
Always pay attention to traffic and do not
g
et
di
stracted by passengers or telephone
calls.
–
Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
–
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
–
Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for road, traffic and weather conditions.
–
When travelling long distances, take
breaks regularly - at least every two hours.
–
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip,
the risk of
injury and accidents increases.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your
p
a
s
sengers in danger. In the event of an acci-
dent, the safety equipment may reduce the
risk of injury. The following list includes most
of the safety equipment in your SEAT:
●
three-point seat belts,
●
belt tension limiters for the front and rear
side seats,
»
65
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
●
belt
t
en
sioners for the front seats,
●
front airbags,
●
knee airbags,
●
side airbags in the front seat backrests,
●
side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,
●
head-protection airbags,
●
“ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in
the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,
●
height-adjustable front head restraints,
●
rear head restraints with in-use position
and non-use position,
●
adjustable steering column.
The safety equipment mentioned above
works together to provide you and your pas-
sengers with the best possible protection in
the event of an accident. However, these
safety systems can only be effective if you
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
position and use this equipment properly.
Safety is everyone's business!
Correct position for passengers
Correct sitting position for driver
Fig. 82 The proper distance between driver
and s
t
eerin
g wheel
Fig. 83 Correct head restraint position for the
driv
er
.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injur
y
in the ev
ent of an accident, we recom-
mend the following adjustments for the driv-
er:
–
Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a
distance of at least 25 cm between the
steering wheel and the centre of your chest
››› Fig. 82.
–
Move the driver's seat forwards or back-
wards so that you are able to press the ac-
celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the
floor with your knees still slightly angled
›››
.
–
Ensure that you can reach the highest point
of
the s
t
eering wheel.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 83.
–
Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 71.
–
Keep both feet in the footwell so that you
have the vehicle under control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 143.
WARNING
●
An incorrect
sitting position of the driver
can lead to severe injuries.
66
Safe driving
●
Adjust
the driver's seat so that there is at
least 25 cm distance between the centre of
the chest and the centre of the steering
wheel ››› Fig. 82. If you are sitting closer than
25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you
properly.
●
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
workshop will help you decide if special spe-
cific modifications are necessary.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.
This reduces the risk of injury when the driver
airbag is triggered.
●
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.
in the centre of the steering wheel). In such
cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus-
tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver
during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac-
cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far
back! The airbag system and seat belts can
only provide optimal protection when the
backrest is in an upright position and the
driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct-
ly.
●
Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-
ieve optimal protection.
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 16.
WARNING
●
Never adju
st the position of the steering
wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this
could cause an accident.
●
Move the lever up firmly so the steering
wheel position does not accidentally change
during driving. risk of accident!
●
Make sure you are capable of reaching and
firmly holding the upper part of the steering
wheel: risk of accident!
●
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it
points towards your face, the driver airbag
will not protect you properly in the event of
an accident. Make sure that the steering
wheel points towards your chest.
Correct sitting position for front pas-
sen
g
er
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injur
y
in the ev
ent of an accident, we recom-
mend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
–
Move the front passenger seat back as far
as possible
›››
.
–
Mo
v
e the se
at backrest to an upright posi-
tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ››› page 69.
–
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the front passenger seat.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 71.
It is possible to deactivate the front passen-
ger airbag in exceptional circumstances
››› page 80.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
››› page 143.
WARNING
●
An incorrect
sitting position of the front
passenger can lead to severe injuries.
●
Adjust the front passenger seat so that
there is at least 25 cm between your chest
and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer
than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect
you properly.
●
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
workshop will help you decide if special spe-
cific modifications are necessary.
»
67
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
●
Alwa
ys keep your feet in the footwell when
the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the
dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An
incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in case of a sudden
braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-
gered, you could sustain severe injuries due
to an incorrect sitting position.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas-
senger in events such as sudden braking ma-
noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the
backrest tilted far back! The airbag system
and seat belts can only provide optimal pro-
tection when the backrest is in an upright po-
sition and the front passenger is wearing his
or her seat belt properly. The further the seat
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater
the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning
of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po-
sition!
●
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for rear seat
p
a
s
sengers
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
s
ud
den br
aking manoeuvre or an accident,
passengers on the rear seat bench must con-
sider the following:
–
Sit up straight.
–
Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-
sition ››› page 69.
–
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the rear seat.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 71.
–
Use an appropriate child restraint system
when you take children in the vehicle
››› page 82.
WARNING
●
If the pa
ssengers in the rear seats are not
sitting properly, they could sustain severe in-
juries.
●
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection.
●
Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
tion when seat backrests are in an upright
position and the vehicle occupants are wear-
ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In
the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-
sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi-
tioning of the seat belt increases.
Examples of incorrect sitting posi-
tion
s
Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
ly
when the belt
w
ebs are properly posi-
tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan-
tially reduce the protective function of seat
belts and increase the risk of injury due to in-
correct seat belt position. As the driver, you
are responsible for all passengers, especially
children.
–
Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect
sitting position in the vehicle while travel-
ling ›››
.
The f
o
l
lowing list contains examples of sit-
ting positions that could be dangerous for all
vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,
but we would like to make you aware of this
issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
●
Never stand in the vehicle.
●
Never stand on the seats.
●
Never kneel on the seats.
●
Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
●
Never lean against the dash panel.
●
Never lie on the rear bench.
●
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
●
Never sit sideways.
●
Never lean out of a window.
●
Never put your feet out of a window.
●
Never put your feet on the dash panel.
●
Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
●
Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-
well.
●
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
●
Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-
gage compartment.
68
Safe driving
WARNING
●
Any inc
orrect sitting position increases the
risk of severe injuries. Sitting in an incorrect
position exposes the vehicle occupants to se-
vere injuries if airbags are triggered, by strik-
ing a vehicle occupant who has assumed an
incorrect sitting position.
●
Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-
er sitting position and maintain it throughout
the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas-
sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po-
sition during the trip ››› page 66, Correct posi-
tion for passengers.
Correct adjustment of front head re-
s
tr
aint
s
Fig. 84 Correctly adjusted head restraint as
v
iew
ed fr
om the front and the side.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 14.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
portant part of passenger protection and can
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident
situations.
●
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is, as far as possible, at the same level
as the top of your head, or at the very least,
at eye level ››› Fig. 84.
WARNING
●
Trav
elling with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
severe injuries. An improper adjustment of
the head restraints may cause death in an ac-
cident and increase the risk of suffering inju-
ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-
pected manoeuvres.
●
The head restraints must always be adjus-
ted according to the height of the passenger.
Correct adjustment of rear head re-
s
tr
aint
s
Fig. 85 Head restraints in the correct posi-
tion.
Fig. 86 Head restraint position warning label.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
por
t
ant
part of the passenger protection and
can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci-
dent situations
»
69
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
Rear head restraints
–
The rear head restraints have 2 positions:
u
se
and
non-use.
–
One position for use (head restraint raised)
››› Fig. 85. In this position, the head re-
straints are used normally, protecting pas-
sengers along with the rear seat belts.
–
And one position for non-use (head re-
straint lowered).
–
To fit the head restraints in position for use,
pull on the edges with both hands in the
direction of the arrow.
WARNING
●
Under no circ
umstances should the rear
passengers travel while the head restraints
are in the non-use position. See the warning
label located on the rear side fixed window
››› Fig. 86.
●
Do not swap the centre rear head restraint
with either of the outer seat rear head re-
straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!
CAUTION
Note the instructions on the adjustment of
the head r
estraints ››› page 144.
Pedal area
P
ed
a
ls
–
Ensure that you can always press the accel-
erator
, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired
to the floor.
–
Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
paired to their initial positions.
–
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
the pedals
›››
.
On
ly
u
se floor mats which leave the pedals
clear and which are secured to prevent them
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-
ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must
be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop
the vehicle.
Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
WARNING
●
Res
tricting pedal operation can lead to crit-
ical situations while driving.
●
Never la
y or fit floor mats or other floor cov-
erings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
●
Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area and
impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-
den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will
not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-
celerator pedal. Risk of accident!
70
Seat belts
Seat belts
Wh
y
w
ear a seat belt?
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five se
ats, two in the front
and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped
with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved
only for four seats. Two front seats and two
rear seats.
WARNING
●
Never tran
sport more than the permitted
amount of people in your vehicle.
●
Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-
ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or
her seat. Children must be protected with an
appropriate child restraint system.
Seat belt lamp*
Fig. 87 Instrument panel: right rear seat oc-
c
upied and c
orr
esponding seat belt fastened
display.
The control lamp illuminates to remind the
driv
er t
o f
asten his seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
–
Fasten your seat belt securely.
–
Instruct your passengers to fasten their
seat belts properly before driving off.
–
Protect children by using a child seat ac-
cording to the child's height and weight.
When the ignition is switched on, the control
lamp in the instrument panel lights up (de-
pending on the model version) if the driver or
passenger have not fastened their seat belts.
An audible warning signal will sound for a
few seconds if the seat belts are not fastened
as the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed
of more than approximately 25 km/h
(15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened
while the vehicle is in motion. The warning
light will also flash .
The lamp goes out when the driver and
passenger seat belts are fastened with the ig-
nition switched on.
Rear seat belts fastened display*
Depending on the model version, when the
ignition is switched on, the seat belt status
display ››› Fig. 87 on the instrument panel in-
forms the driver whether the passengers in
the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.
The symbol indicates that the passenger in
this seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt.
When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened
or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis-
played for approximately 30 seconds. The in-
dication can be hidden by pressing the
0.0/SET
button on the dash panel.
The se
at
belt
status flashes for a maximum of
30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats
is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion.
An audible warning will also be heard if the
vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h
(15 mph).
71
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
The protective function of seat belts
Fig. 88 Drivers with properly worn seat belts
w
i
l
l not be thrown forward in the event of sud-
den braking
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
in the pr
oper po
s
ition. They also help prevent
uncontrolled movements that may result in
serious injury and reduce the risk of being
thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-
dent.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the
belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all
these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury.
This is why it is so important to fasten seat
belts before every trip, even when "just driv-
ing around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
of substantially reducing the risk of injury
and improving the chances of survival when
involved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air-
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and
worn. The front airbags, for example, are only
triggered in some cases of head-on collision.
The front airbags will not be triggered during
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-
sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-
bag trigger threshold value in the control unit
is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat
belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants
have fastened their seat belts properly before
you drive off!
Safety instructions on using seat
belts
–
Always wear the seat belt as described in
thi
s
section.
–
En
sure that the seat belts can be fastened
at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
●
If seat
belts are worn incorrectly or not at
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
optimal protection from seat belts can be
achieved only if you use them properly.
●
Fasten your seat belt before every trip -
even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-
cupants must also wear the seat belts at all
times, otherwise they run the risk of being in-
jured.
●
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection
if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
●
Never allow two passengers (even children)
to share the same seat belt.
●
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in
motion.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
●
The seat belt must never be twisted while it
is being worn.
●
The seat belt should never lie on hard or
fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)
because this can cause injuries.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or
jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
●
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
in any other incorrect position.
●
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat
over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func-
tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity
to protect.
72
Seat belts
●
The slot in the se
at belt buckle must not be
blocked with paper or other objects, as this
can prevent the latch plate from engaging se-
curely.
●
Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or
similar items to alter the position of the belt
webbing.
●
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the
connections, belt retractors or parts of the
buckle could cause severe injuries in the
event of an accident. Therefore, you must
check the condition of all seat belts at regular
intervals.
●
Seat belts which have been worn in an acci-
dent and stretched must be replaced by a
specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec-
essary even if there is no apparent damage.
The belt anchorage should also be checked.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
●
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the
retractors may not work properly.
Head-on collisions and the laws of
ph
y
s
ics
Fig. 89 A driver not wearing a seat belt is
thr
o
wn f
orward violently
Fig. 90 The unbelted passenger in the rear
se
at
i
s thrown forward violently, hitting the
driver who is wearing a seat belt.
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics
w
ork
in the c
ase of a head-on collision: when
a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy
called “kinetic energy” is created both in the
passengers and inside the vehicle.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of
the vehicle and its passengers. The higher
they are, the more energy there is to be “ab-
sorbed” in the event of an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h
(30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-
netic energy is multiplied by four.
Given that the passengers of the vehicle in
our example do not have their seat belts fas-
tened, in the event of a collision the entire
amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will
be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that it is not
»
73
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
possible to brace oneself with one's hands.
In a fr
ont
al
collision, unbelted passengers
are thrown forward and will make violent con-
tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,
windscreen or whatever else is in the way
››› Fig. 89.
It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ››› Fig. 90.
How to properly adjust your
seatbelt
Fastening and unfastening the seat
belt
Fig. 91 Positioning and removing the seat
belt
b
uc
kle.
Fig. 92 Position of seat belt during pregnan-
cy
.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 15.
Fasten your seat belt
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if
the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
●
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
●
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch
plate and pull it slowly across your chest and
lap.
●
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
appropriate seat and push it down until it is
securely locked with an audible click
›››
Fig. 91 A.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
74
Seat belts
The seat belts are equipped with an automat-
ic
r
etr
actor on the shoulder strap. Full free-
dom of movement is permitted when the
shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-
ing sudden braking, during travel in steep
areas or bends and during acceleration, the
automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front
seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners
››› page 75.
Releasing the seat belt
●
Press the red button on the belt buckle
››› Fig. 91 B. The latch plate is released and
springs out ›››
.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up e
a
s
ily and the trim is not damaged.
Positioning seat belts
Seat belts offer their maximum protection on-
ly when they are properly positioned.
WARNING
●
The seat belt
s offer best protection only
when the backrests are in an upright position
and the seat belts have been fastened prop-
erly.
●
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of
another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will
not protect you properly and the risk of injury
is increased.
●
Never unb
uckle a seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the
risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
●
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se-
vere injuries in the event of an accident.
●
For pregnant women, the lap part of the
seat belt must lie as low as possible over the
pelvis, never across the stomach, and always
lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the
abdomen ››› Fig. 92.
●
Always engage the retractor lock when you
are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1
››› page 82.
●
Read and observe the warnings ››› page 72.
Seat belt tensioners
Ho
w the se
at
belt tensioner works
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 15.
The seat belts for the occupants in the front
seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen-
sors will trigger the belt tensioners only dur-
ing severe head-on, lateral and rear-end colli-
sions and only if the seat belt is worn. This
retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing
the forward motion of the occupants.
The belt tensioners will not be triggered in
the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle
overturns, or in accidents where no major
forces act on the vehicle.
Note
●
If the seat
belt tensioners are triggered, a
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is
not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
●
The relevant safety requirements must be
observed when the vehicle or components of
the system are scrapped. Specialised work-
shops are familiar with these regulations,
which are also available to you.
Service and disposal of belt tension-
er
s
The belt tensioners are components of the
se
at
belts
that are installed in the seats of
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
ers or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, the seat
belt may be damaged. The consequence may
be that, in the event of an accident, the belt
tensioners function incorrectly or may not
function at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
do not cause any injuries or environmental
pollution, regulations, which are known to
the specialised workshops, must be ob-
served.
»
75
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
WARNING
●
Improper use or r
epairs not carried out by
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may
fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir-
cumstances.
●
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or
install parts of the belt tensioners or seat
belts.
●
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto-
matic retractor cannot be repaired.
●
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other repair
work, must be performed by a specialised
workshop only.
●
The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
tection for one accident and must be changed
if they have been activated.
Airbag system
Brief
intr
oduction
Wh
y is it so important to wear a seat
belt and to sit correctly?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
protection, the se
at belt must always be worn
properly and the correct sitting position must
be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work ef-
fectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have
adjusted the head restraints properly. There-
fore, it is most important to properly wear the
seat belts at all times, not only because this
is required by law in most countries, but also
for your safety
›››
page 71, Why wear a seat
belt?.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
if you are not properly seated when the air-
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-
ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
occupants assume a correct sitting position
while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may
inflict critic
al or fatal injuries on the occu-
pant. This also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
tance between yourself and the front airbag.
This way, the front airbags can completely
deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
mum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger
an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle
of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
rate resulting from the collision and detected
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
occurring during the collision and measured
by the control unit remains below the speci-
fied reference values, the front, side and/or
curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-
to account that the visible damage in a vehi-
cle involved in an accident, no matter how
serious, is not a determining factor for the
airbags to have been triggered.
WARNING
●
Wearin
g the seat belt incorrectly or assum-
ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to
critical or fatal injuries.
●
All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain criti-
cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.
Children up to 12 years old should always
76
Airbag system
travel on the rear seat. Never transport
chil
dren in the vehicle if they are not restrain-
ed or the restraint system is not appropriate
for their age, size or weight.
●
If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you
lean forward or to the side while travelling or
assume an incorrect sitting position, there is
a substantially increased risk of injury. This
increased risk of injury will be further in-
creased if you are struck by an inflating air-
bag.
●
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating
airbag, always wear the seat belt properly
››› page 71.
●
Always adjust the front seats properly.
Description of the airbag system
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 16.
The airbag system is not a substitute for the
seat belts. The airbag system offers addition-
al protection for the driver and passenger in
combination with the seat belts.
The airbag system comprises the following
modules (as per vehicle equipment):
●
Electronic control unit
●
Front airbags for driver and passenger
●
Knee airbag for the driver
●
Side airbags
●
Head airbag
●
Airbag control lamp on the instrument
panel
●
Key-operated switch for front passenger air-
bag
●
Control lamp to disconnect/connect the
front airbag.
The airbag system operation is monitored
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-
luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control
lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition
is switched on
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
●
the ignition is switched off
●
there is a minor frontal collision
●
there is a minor side collision
●
there is a rear-end collision
●
the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
●
The seat belt
s and airbags can only provide
maximum protection if the occupants are
seated correctly ››› page 66, Correct position
for passengers.
●
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,
have the system checked immediately by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a
danger that during a collision, the system
may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thou
s
andths
of a second, to provide addi-
tional protection in the event of an accident.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag de-
ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
tion of fire in the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function
when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several air-
bags may activate at the same time.
In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-
over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
activating in each situation cannot be gener-
alised. Some factors play an important role,
»
77
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
such as the properties of the object the vehi-
c
l
e hits
(hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
vation.
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
tory and activates the respective restraint
system.
If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
fined reference value in the control unit the
airbags will not be triggered, even though
the accident may cause extensive damage to
the car.
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous head-on collisions
●
Driver airbag.
●
Front passenger front airbag
●
Knee airbag for the driver.
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous side-on collisions
●
Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
cident.
In an accident with airbag activation:
●
the interior lights switch on (if the interior
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
●
the hazard warning lights switch on;
●
all doors are unlocked;
●
the fuel supply to the engine is cut.
Airbag safety instructions
Front airbags
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 16.
WARNING
●
The deployment
space between the front
passengers and the airbags must not in any
case be occupied by other passenger, pets
and objects.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
It is also important not to attach any ob-
jects such as cup holders or telephone
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
Knee airbag*
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 17.
WARNING
●
The knee airbag is
deployed in front of the
driver's knees. Always keep the deployment
areas of the knee airbags free.
●
Never not fix objects to the cover or in the
deployment area of the knee airbag.
●
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a
distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) between
your knees and the location of the this air-
bag. If your physical constitution prevents
you from meeting these requirements, make
sure you contact a specialised workshop.
Side airbags*
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 18.
WARNING
●
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
forw
ard, or are not seated correctly while the
vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk
of injury if the side airbag system is triggered
in an accident.
●
In order for the side airbags to provide their
maximum protection, the prescribed sitting
78
Airbag system
position must always be maintained with
seat belt
s fastened while travelling.
●
In a side-on collision the side airbags will
not work if the sensors do not correctly meas-
ure the pressure increase on the interior of
the doors, due to air escaping through the
areas with holes or openings in the door pan-
el.
●
Never drive if the interior door panels have
been removed or if the panels have not been
correctly fitted.
●
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers
in the door panels have been removed, un-
less the holes left by the loudspeakers have
been closed properly.
●
Always check that the openings are closed
or covered if loudspeakers or other equip-
ment are fitted inside the door panels.
●
Occupants of the outer seats must never
carry any objects or pets in the deployment
space between them and the airbags, or al-
low children or other passengers to travel in
this position. It is also important not to at-
tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to
the doors. This would impair the protection
offered by the side airbags.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used only
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
●
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
ster because the system may be damaged. In
this case, the side airbags would not be trig-
gered.
●
Under no circ
umstances should protective
covers be fitted over seats with side airbags
unless the covers have been approved for use
in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys
from the side of the backrest, the use of con-
ventional seat covers would obstruct the side
airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec-
tiveness.
●
Any damage to the original seat upholstery
or around the seams of the side airbag units
must be repaired immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
Any work on the side airbag system or re-
moval and installation of the airbag compo-
nents for other repairs (such as removal of
the front seat) should only be performed by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may
occur during the airbag system operation.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
Curtain airbags*
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 18.
WARNING
●
In order for the head-protection airbags to
prov
ide their maximum protection, the pre-
scribed sitting position must always be main-
tained with se
at belts fastened while travel-
ling.
●
For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must
be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a
screen dividing the interior of the vehicle.
See your technical service to make this ad-
justment.
●
There must be no other persons, animals or
objects between the occupants of the outer
seats and the deployment space of the head-
protection airbags so that the head-protec-
tion airbag can deploy completely without re-
striction and provide the greatest possible
protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have
not been expressly approved for use in your
vehicle may not be attached to the side win-
dows
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used only
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang-
ers.
●
The airbags provide protection for just one
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.
●
Any work on the head-protection airbag
system or removal and installation of the air-
bag components for other repairs (such as re-
moval of the roof lining) should only be per-
formed by a specialised workshop. Other-
wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys-
tem operation.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
»
79
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
●
The side and hea
d airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of the
front doors. To ensure the correct operation of
the side and curtain airbags neither the
doors nor the door panels should be modified
in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the
front door is damaged, the airbag system
may not work correctly. All work carried out
on the front door must be done in a special-
ised workshop.
Deactivating airbags
D
e
activ
ation of front airbag
Fig. 93 Control lamp for disabling the front
p
a
s
senger front airbag on the dash panel
It lights up on the combi-in-
strument
Fault in airbag
system and seat
belt tensioners.
Have the system checked immedi-
ately by a specialised workshop.
It lights up on the dash panel
Fault in the air-
bag system.
Have the system checked immedi-
ately by a specialised workshop.
Front passenger
front airbag dis-
abled.
Check whether the airbag should re-
main disabled.
It lights up on the dash panel
Front passenger
front airbag ena-
bled.
The control lamp switches off about
60 seconds after the ignition is
turned on or after enabling of the
front passenger front airbag with the
key lock switch.
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a f
ew sec
onds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,
the lamp does not re-
main lit, or if it is lit together with the control
lamp on the dash panel, there may be a
fault in the airbag system ›››
.
The disabling of airbags is only carried out in
c
er
t
ain cases, i.e. if:
●
a child seat is required in the front passen-
ger seat with the child facing in the opposite
direction to the direction of travel (in some
countries, due to divergent legal require-
ments, facing in the direction of travel)
››› page 84;
●
despite the driver's seat being in the cor-
rect position, a minimum distance of 25 cm
cannot be maintained between the centre of
the steering wheel and the driver's torso,
●
installation of special devices is required in
the steering wheel area due to a physical dis-
ability,
●
if you have special seats installed (e.g. an
orthopaedic seat without side airbags).
The front passenger front airbag can be disa-
bled using the switch ››› page 81.
We recommend that you contact an author-
ised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other air-
bags.
Airbag system control
The airbag system availability is controlled
electronically, regardless of whether an air-
bag is disabled.
80
Airbag system
If an airbag was disabled using a diagnostics
sy
s
t
em:
●
the airbag system warning lamp illumi-
nates after switching on the ignition for
about 4 seconds, and then flashes for about
12 seconds.
If the airbag has been disabled with the air-
bag switch on the side of the dash panel:
●
the airbag control lamp will illuminate
for about 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
●
The airbag is disabled, signalled with the
warning lamp which lights up with the
word placed in the cen-
tre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 94.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
the airbag ma
y not trigger correctly, may fail
to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly,
leading to severe or fatal injuries.
●
Have the airbag system checked immedi-
ately by a specialised workshop.
●
Never mount a child seat in the front pas-
senger seat or remove the mounted child
seat! The front passenger front airbag may
deploy during an accident in spite of the
fault.
CAUTION
Always pay attention to any lit control lamps
and to the corr
esponding descriptions and in-
structions to avoid damage to the vehicle.
Note
●
Fol
low the current legislation in your coun-
try regarding the disabling of airbags.
●
At your authorised SEAT dealer you can find
information on which vehicle airbags can be
disabled.
Front passenger front airbag switch
Fig. 94 Front passenger front airbag switch.
Fig. 95 Warning lamp for disabling the front
pas
senger airbag.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 17.
The switch disables only the front passenger
front airbag.
Switching on the airbag
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the glove compartment on the front
passenger side.
–
Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
››› Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should en-
ter, as far as it will go.
–
Then turn the key gently to the ON position.
Do not force it if you feel resistance, and
make sure you have inserted the key fully.
–
Close the passenger side storage compart-
ment.
»
81
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
–
Chec
k, w
ith the ignition sw
itched on, that
the control lamp ››› Fig. 95 does not
light up, with the word
in the centre part of the dash panel.
–
The warning lamp is illuminated for
60 seconds in the centre part of the dash
panel.
Control lamp with the word
(front passenger airbag disabled)
If the front passenger front airbag is disa-
bled, after switching on the ignition, the con-
trol lamp will light up for several seconds,
then it will switch off for about 1 s and then
switch on again.
If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault
in the disabling of the airbag system ›››
.
Pl
e
a
se go immediately to an Official Service.
WARNING
●
The driver of the
vehicle is responsible for
disabling or switching on the airbag.
●
Always switch off the ignition before disa-
bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do
so could result in a fault in the airbag deacti-
vation system.
●
Never leave the key in the airbag disabling
switch as it could get damaged or enable or
disable the airbag during driving.
●
If the (airbag disabled) control lamp
flashes, the front passenger front airbag will
not trigger in the event of an accident! Have
the system immediately checked by an Offi-
cia
l Service.
Transporting children safely
Saf
ety
f
or children
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
accident
statistics, we recommend that chil-
dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
in the centre back seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
›››
page 73. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to
a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must
always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety prod-
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages
made by “Peke” (not for all countries).
These systems have been especially de-
signed and approved, complying with the
ECE-R44. regulation.
82
Transporting children safely
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
o
b
ser
ve any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats. Always read
and note ››› page 83.
We recommend you always carry the manu-
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
gether with the on-board documentation.
Important information regarding the
front passenger's airbag
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 19.
Read and always observe the safety informa-
tion included in the following chapters:
●
Safety distance with respect to the passen-
ger airbag ››› page 76.
●
Objects between the passenger and the
passenger side airbag ›››
in Front airbags
on p
ag
e 78
.
The passenger side front airbag, when ena-
bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
backward since the airbag can strike the seat
with such force that it can cause serious or
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to
transport children on the rear seats. This is
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-
bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 81.
When transporting children, use a child seat
suitable for the age and size of each child
››› page 84.
WARNING
●
If a chi
ld seat is secured to the front pas-
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident increases.
●
An inflating front passenger airbag can
strike the rear-facing child seat and project it
with great force against the door, the roof or
the backrest.
●
Never install a child seat facing backwards
on the front passenger seat unless the front
passenger front airbag has been disabled.
Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!
However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-
ses, to transport a child in the front passen-
ger seat, the front passenger front airbag
must always be disabled ››› page 80. If the
passenger seat has a height adjustment op-
tion, move it to the highest, most upright po-
sition. If you have a fixed seat, do not install
any child restraint system in this location.
●
For those vehicles that do not include a key
lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-
cle must be taken to a technical service.
●
All vehicle occupants, especially children,
must assume the proper sitting position and
be properly belted in while travelling.
●
Never hol
d children or babies on your lap,
this can result in potentially fatal injuries to
the child!
●
Never allow a child to be transported in a
vehicle without being properly secured, or to
stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling.
In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in-
juries to themselves and to the other vehicle
occupants.
●
If children assume an improper sitting posi-
tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose
themselves to greater risk of injury in the
event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
accident. This is particularly important if the
child is travelling on the front passenger seat
and the airbag system is triggered in an acci-
dent; as this could cause serious injury or
even death.
●
A suitable child seat can protect your child!
●
Never leave a child alone in the child seat
or inside the vehicle because depending on
the season, very high temperatures may be
reached inside a parked vehicle, which could
be fatal.
●
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
child seat, as this could cause injuries to the
abdominal and neck areas during a sudden
braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to become twis-
ted and the seat belt should be properly in
place ››› page 71.
●
Only one child may occupy a child seat
››› page 84, Child seats.
»
83
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Safety
●
When a chil
d seat is mounted in the rear
seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac-
tivated ››› page 123.
Child seats
Safety in
structions
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 19.
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured in
the vehic
le with a restraint system suitable
for age, weight and size.
●
Read and always observe information and
warnings concerning the use of child seats
››› page 83.
WARNING
The retaining rings are designed only for use
with “ISOFIX” and Top
Tether* system child
seats.
●
Never secure other child seats that do not
have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or
retaining belts or objects to the fastening
rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju-
ries to the child.
●
Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-
rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se-
curing rings.
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will
incre
ase the risk of injury in the event of a
crash.
●
Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the
luggage compartment.
●
Never secure or tie luggage or other items
to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper
ones (Top Tether).
Categorisation of child seats into
gr
oup
s
Use only child seats that are officially ap-
pr
o
v
ed and suitable for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-
R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commis-
sion for Europe Regulation.
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
ries:
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9
months)
Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18
months)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4
years old)
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7
years old)
Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7
years old)
Child seats that have been tested and ap-
proved under the ECE R44 standard bear the
test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle
with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
together with the on-board documentation.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
child seats have been designed and tested
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the
right child seat for your model and age group
at SEAT dealers.
84
Self-help
Emergencies
Self
-help
V
ehic
le tool kit anti-puncture kit*
The tools and anti-puncture kit* are stored
under the floor panel
in the luggage compart-
ment.
To access the vehicle tools:
–
Lift up the floor surface by the plastic han-
dle unti
l it is fastened to the tabs on both
sides.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the an-
ti-puncture kit* is located under the floor
panel in the luggage compartment.
The tool kit includes:
●
Jack*
●
Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov-
er*/wheel bolt cap clip.
●
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
●
Towline anchorage
●
Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
●
Towing bracket device
Some of the items listed are only provided in
certain model versions, or are optional ex-
tras.
Note
The jack does not generally require any main-
tenanc
e. If required, it should be greased us-
ing universal type grease.
Tyre repair
TMS (T
yre Mobility System)*
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 56
The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)
will reliably seal punctures caused by the
penetration of a foreign body of up to about
4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob-
jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,
you must again check the tyre pressure about
10 minutes after starting the engine.
You should only use the tyre mobility set if
the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are
familiar with the procedure and you have the
necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you
should seek professional assistance.
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following
cases:
●
If the wheel rim has been damaged.
●
In outside temperatures below -20°C (-4°F).
●
In the ev
ent of
cuts or perforations in the
tyre greater than 4 mm.
●
If you have been driving with very low pres-
sure or a completely flat tyre.
●
If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
date.
WARNING
Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
gerou
s, especially when filling the tyre at the
roadside. Please observe the following rules
to minimise the risk of injury:
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Park it at a safe distance from surrounding
traffic to fill the tyre.
●
Ensure the ground on which you park is flat
and solid.
●
All passengers and particularly children
must keep a safe distance from the work area.
●
Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users.
●
Use the tyre mobility system only if you are
familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth-
erwise, you should seek professional assis-
tance.
●
The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-
rary emergency use only until you can reach
the nearest specialised workshop.
●
Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo-
bility set as soon as possible.
»
85
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
●
The seal
ant is a health hazard and must be
cleaned immediately if it comes into contact
with the skin.
●
Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the
reach of small children.
●
Never use an equivalent jack, even if it has
been approved for your vehicle.
●
Always stop the engine, apply the hand-
brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a
manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of
vehicle involuntary movement.
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
same perf
ormance properties as a conven-
tional tyre.
●
Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and
fast cornering.
●
Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
the tyre.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observing
any l
egal requirements.
Note
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at
SEAT de
alerships.
Note
Take into account the separate instruction
manual
of the tyre mobility set* manufactur-
er.
Contents of the tyre mobility system*
Fig. 96 Standard representation: contents of
the anti-p
u
nct
ure kit.
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
the floor c
o
v
ering in the luggage compart-
ment. It includes the following components
››› Fig. 96:
Tyre valve remover
Sticker indicating maximum speed “max.
80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Filler tube with cap
1
2
3
Air compressor
T
ube f
or infl
ating tyres
Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-
toring system (it can also be integrated in
the compressor).
Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres-
sor may have a button).
ON/OFF switch
12 volt connector
Bottle of sealant
Spare tyre valve
The valve insert remover
1
has a gap at the
lo
w
er end f
or a valve insert. The valve insert
can only be screwed or unscrewed in this
way. This also applies to its replacement part
11
.
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compressor
and the inflator t
ube may become hot.
●
Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
●
Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or
hot air compressor on flammable material.
●
Allow them to cool before storing the de-
vice.
●
If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
86
Self-help
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
mum of 8 operation
al minutes to avoid over-
heating! Before switching on the air compres-
sor again, let it cool for several minutes.
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw the inflator tube ›››
Fig. 96
5
again
and check
the pressure on the gauge
6
.
1.3 bar (19 ps
i / 130 kPa) and lower:
●
Stop the vehicle! The tyre c
annot be sealed
sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
●
You should obtain professional assistance
›››
.
1.4 b
ar (20 p
s
i / 140 kPa) and higher:
●
Set the tyre pressure to the correct value
again.
●
Carefully resume your journey until you
reach the nearest specialised workshop with-
out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Have the damaged tyre replaced.
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cau
se accidents and serious injury.
●
Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure
is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.
●
Seek spec
ialist assistance.
Manual unlocking/locking
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 11, ›››
page 12.
The doors, rear lid and panoramic tilting sun-
roof can be locked manually and partially
opened, for example if the key or the central
locking is damaged.
WARNING
Opening and closing doors carelessly can
cause seriou
s injury.
●
If the vehicle is locked from outside, the
doors and windows cannot be opened from
the inside.
●
Never leave children or disabled people
alone in the car. They could be trapped in the
car in an emergency and will not be able to
get themselves to safety.
●
Depending on the time of the year, temper-
atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can
be extremely high or extremely low resulting
in serious injuries and illness or even death,
particularly for young children.
WARNING
Getting in the way of the doors and the rear
lid is d
angerous and can lead to serious in-
jury.
●
Open and close the doors and the rear lid
only when there is nobody in the way.
CAUTION
When opening and closing in an emergency,
caref
ully disassemble components and then
reassemble them carefully to avoid damage
to the vehicle.
Changing the windscreen wiper
b
l
a
des
Changing the windscreen and rear
window wiper blades
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 64.
The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as
standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is
responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si-
lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the
noise of the water as it is wiped across the
windscreen will be louder.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-
larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass,
»
87
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
they should be changed if they are damaged,
or c
l
e
aned if they are dirty ›››
.
Dam
ag
ed w
iper blades should be replaced
immediately. These are available from quali-
fied workshops.
WARNING
Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility
and incre
ase the risk of accident and serious
injury.
●
Always replace damaged or worn blades or
blades which do not clean the windscreen
correctly.
CAUTION
●
Damaged or dir
ty windscreen wipers could
scratch the glass.
●
If products containing solvents, rough
sponges or sharp objects are used to clean
the blades, the graphite layer will be dam-
aged.
●
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint
thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dows.
●
In icy conditions, always check that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may
help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip-
ers in service position ›››
page 63.
CAUTION
●
To prev
ent damage to the bonnet and the
wiper arms, only leave them in the service
position.
●
Before driving, always lower the wiper
arms.
Towing and tow-starting the ve-
hicle
Gener
al information
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 60.
Tow-starting means starting the engine of
the vehicle while another pulls it.
Towing means one vehicle pulling another
that is not roadworthy.
If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access
system, towing is only allowed with the igni-
tion on!
The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is
towed with the engine switched off and the
ignition connected. Depending on the battery
charge status, the drop in voltage may be so
large, even after just a few minutes, that no
electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.
the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with
the Keyless Access system, the steering
wheel could lock up.
WARNING
If the vehicle has no electrical power, the
brake light
s, turn signals and all other lights
will no longer function. Do not have the vehi-
cle towed away. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion could result in an accident.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-start-
ing, for e
xample, the towed vehicle can easily
be driven into the towing vehicle.
CAUTION
If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubricant
in the automatic
transmission the car may
only be towed with the driven wheels lifted
clear of the road, or transported on a special
car transporter or trailer.
CAUTION
Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in at-
tempt t
o start it. There is risk of damage to
the catalytic converter.
Note
●
Plea
se observe related legal requirements.
88
Self-help
●
Switc
h on the hazard warning lights of both
vehicles. However, observe any regulations
to the contrary.
●
The tow rope must not be twisted. Other-
wise the front tow line anchorage could be
pulled off the vehicle.
Indications for tow-starting
Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star-
ted. The jump s
tart should be used instead
›››
page 61.
For technical reasons, towing the following
vehicles is not allowed:
●
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
●
If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-
cause in
vehicles with the Keyless Access
locking and ignition system the steering re-
mains locked and the electronic parking
brake cannot be deactivated nor can the elec-
tronic lock of the steering column be re-
leased if they are activated.
●
If the battery is flat, it is possible that the
engine control units may not operate correct-
ly.
However, if the vehicle must absolutely be
tow-started (in the case of manual gearbox-
es):
●
Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.
●
Keep the clutch pressed down.
●
Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-
ing lights.
●
Once both vehicles are moving, release the
clutch.
●
Once the engine starts, press the clutch
and disengage the gear to avoid colliding
with the towing vehicle.
Note
The vehicle can only be tow-started if the
electronic
parking brake and, if appropriate,
the electronic lock of the steering column are
deactivated. If the vehicle has no power sup-
ply or there is an electric system fault, the
engine must be tow-started to deactivate the
electronic parking brake and the electronic
lock of the steering column.
Anchoring the front tow line
Fig. 97 Right side of the front bumper: tow-
line anc
hor
ag
e screwed in.
The front towline anchorage is only mounted
if
the
v
ehicle has to be towed.
There is a cover with an opening into which
the towline anchorage is screwed on the right
part of the front bumper.
–
To open the cover press it on its left-hand
side.
–
Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi-
cle tool kit ››› page 85.
–
Screw the towline anchorage into the screw
connection as far as it will go
›››
Fig. 97 and
tighten with the wheel brace.
After use, unscrew the towline anchorage
and fit the cover back on the bumper. Put the
towline anchorage back in the vehicle tool
»
89
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
kit. The towline anchorage should always be
k
ept
in the
vehicle.
Rear towline anchorage
Fig. 98 Right side of the rear bumper: cover-
c
ap
.
Fig. 99 Right side of the rear bumper: towline
anc
hor
ag
e screwed in.
The rear towline anchorage should only be
mou
nt
ed if
you wish to tow another vehicle.
Vehicles with towline anchorage
On the right of the rear bumper there is a cov-
er which covers a threaded hole.
–
Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi-
cle tool set ››› page 85.
–
To open the cover press it on the top right
area ››› Fig. 98
–
Screw the towline anchorage into the screw
connection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 99 and
tighten with the wheel brace.
After use, unscrew the towline anchorage
and put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace
the cover on the bumper. The towline anchor-
age should always be kept in the vehicle.
WARNING
●
If the to
wline anchorage is not screwed in
as far as the stop, there is a risk of the screw
connection shearing off during towing (acci-
dent risk).
●
If your car has a towing bracket, only use
special towing ropes. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, only
use spec
ial tow bars to prevent damage to
the ball joint. These tow bars have been spe-
cially approved for use with towing brackets.
Towing vehicles with a manual gear-
bo
x
Towing is relatively straightforward.
Plea
se observe the relevant instructions
››› page 88.
The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or
tow rope in the normal way, with all four
wheels on the road; it can also be towed with
either the front or rear wheels lifted off the
road. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h
(30 mph).
Towing a vehicle equipped with auto-
matic g
earbox
Certain restrictions must be observed when
t
o
w
ing your vehicle.
Please observe the relevant instructions
›››
page 88.
The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or
tow rope in the normal way, with all four
wheels on the ground. When doing so,
please note the following points:
●
Make sure the selector lever is in the N po-
sition.
●
The vehicle must not be towed faster than
50 km/h (30 mph).
●
The vehicle must not be towed further than
50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engine
90
Fuses and bulbs
is not running, the gearbox oil pump does
not
w
ork
and the gearbox is not adequately
lubricated for higher speeds or longer distan-
ces.
If the vehicle has to be towed with a break-
down truck, it must only be suspended at the
front wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo-
cated on the front wheels. If the car is towed
with the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e.
travelling backwards), the drive shafts also
turn backwards. The planetary gears in the
automatic gearbox then turn at such high
speeds that the gearbox will be severely
damaged in a short time.
Note
●
If it i
s not possible to tow the vehicle in the
normal way, or if it has to be towed further
than 50 km (30 miles), it must be transported
on a special car transporter or trailer.
●
Should the power supply to the selector
lever be interrupted in position P, the selector
lever will be locked. Before the vehicle can be
recovered/manoeuvred you must manually
release the selector lever ›››
page 43.
Fuses and bulbs
F
u
se
s
Introduction
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
electrical
components. Likewise, an electrical
component can be protected by several
fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
the electrical system checked by a special-
ised workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system can
give serious
electrical shocks, causing burns
and even death!
●
Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-
tion system.
●
Take care not to cause short circuits in the
electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a curr
ent circuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury.
●
Never use a f
use with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-
age (same colour and markings) and size.
●
Never repair a fuse.
●
Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple
or similar.
CAUTION
●
T
o prev
ent damage to the vehicle's electric
system, before replacing a fuse always turn
off the ignition, the lights and all electrical
elements and remove the key from the igni-
tion.
●
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating
fuse, you could cause damage to another part
of the electrical system.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can
damage the electrical system.
Note
●
One component m
ay have more than one
fuse.
●
Several components may run on a single
fuse.
91
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
Vehicle fuses
Fig. 100 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse
bo
x
c
over
Fig. 101 In the engine compartment: fuse box
c
o
v
er
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 54
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
amperage (same colour and markings) and
size.
Opening and closing the fuse box situated
below the dash panel
●
Opening: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 100.
●
Closing: push back the cover it in until it
clicks into place.
To open the engine compartment fuse box
●
Open the bonnet ››› page 262.
●
Press the locking tabs to release the fuse
box cover ››› Fig. 101.
●
Then lift the cover out.
●
To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.
Push the locking tabs down until they click
audibly into place.
Fuses in the vehicle interior
No. Consumers/Amps
4 Taxis 3
5 Gateway 5
6 Automatic gearbox lever 5
7
Air conditioning and heating control
panel, heating the back window.
10
8
Diagnosis, handbrake switch, light
switch, reverse light, interior lighting
10
9 Steering column 5
10 Radio display 5
12 Radio 20
No. Consumers/Amps
13 Driving mode. 15
14 Air conditioner fan 40
15 KESSY 10
16 Connectivity Box 7.5
17 Instrument panel 5
18 Rear camera 7.5
19 KESSY 7.5
21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15
22 Trailer 15
23 Right lights 40
24 Electric sunroof 30
25 Left door 30
26 Heated seats 20
28 Trailer 25
31 Left lights 40
32
Control unit for parking aid, front cam-
era and radar
7.5
33 Airbag 5
34
Reverse switch, clima sensor, electro-
chromic mirror
7.5
35
Diagnosis, headlight control unit,
headlight adjuster
10
92
Fuses and bulbs
No. Consumers/Amps
36 Right LED headlight 10
37 Left LED headlight 10
38 Trailer 25
39 Right door 30
40 12V socket 20
42 Central locking 40
43 Interior light 30
44 Trailer 15
45 Electric driver's seat 15
47 Rear window wiper 15
49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 5
53 Heated rear window 30
Fuse arrangement in engine compartment
No. Consumers/Amps
1 ESP control unit 40/20
2 ESP control unit 40/60
3
Engine control unit (diesel/pet-
rol)
30/15
4 Engine sensors 5/10
5 Engine sensors 7.5/10
6 Brake light sensor 5
No. Consumers/Amps
7 Engine power supply 5/10
8 Lambda probe 10/15
9 Engine 5/10/20
10 Fuel pump control unit 10/15/20
11 PTC 40
12 PTC 40
13 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30
15 Horn 15
16 Fuel pump control unit 5/15/20
17 Engine control unit 7.5
18 Terminal 30 (positive reference) 5
19 Front windscreen washer 30
20 Alarm horn 10
22 Engine control unit 5
23 Starter motor 30
24 PTC 40
31 Electronic differential CUPRA 15
33 Automatic gearbox pump 30
CAUTION
●
Alwa
ys carefully remove the fuse box cov-
ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems
with your vehicle.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid
the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid-
ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to
the electrical system.
Note
●
In the vehic
le, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter. These should
only be changed by a specialised workshop.
●
Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-
pear in the following tables.
●
Some of the equipment listed in the tables
below pertain only to certain versions of the
model or are optional extras.
●
Please note that the above lists, while cor-
rect at the time of printing, are subject to
change.
Changing bulbs
T
opic
intr
oduction
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 55.
Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of
practical skill.
»
93
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
If you choose to change the engine compart-
ment
l
amp
s yourself, remember that it is a
dangerous area ›››
in Work in the engine
c
omp
ar
tment on page 262.
Always use identical bulbs with the same
designation. The name can be found on the
base of the bulb holder.
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
there are different sets of headlights and tail
lights:
●
Halogen headlights
●
Full-LED main headlights*
●
Halogen headlights with LED daytime run-
ning lights*
●
Rear bulb light
●
LED rear light*
Full-LED headlight system*
Full-LED headlights handle all light functions
(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped
beam and route light) with light emitting di-
odes (LEDs) as a light source.
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be
replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to
an authorised workshop to have it replaced.
WARNING
●
Take p
articular care when working on com-
ponents in the engine compartment if the en-
gine is warm. Risk of burns.
●
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The
glass can break when you touch the bulb,
causing injury.
●
When changing bulbs, please take care not
to injure yourself on sharp edges, in particu-
lar on the headlight housing.
CAUTION
●
Remov
e the ignition key before working on
the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit
could occur.
●
Switch off the lights and the parking light
before changing a bulb.
●
Take good care to avoid damaging any com-
ponents.
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-
pose of u
sed bulbs in the proper manner.
Note
●
Plea
se check at regular intervals that all
lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
not only in the interest of your own safety,
but also that of all other road users.
●
Befor
e changing a bulb, make sure you
have the correct new bulb.
●
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel
instead, since the fingerprints left on the
glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen-
erated by the bulb, they will be deposited on
the reflector and will impair its surface.
94
Fuses and bulbs
Change the front bulbs
Dip
ped he
a
dlight bulb
Fig. 102 Dipped beam headlights.
Fig. 103 Dipped beam headlights.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Move the loops ›
›
›
Fig. 102
1
in the direc-
tion of
the arr
o
w and remove the cover.
–
Remove connector ››› Fig. 103
2
from the
b
u
l
b.
–
Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 103
3
pressing inwards to the right.
–
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
th
at
the lug on the b
ase fits into the recess
on the reflector.
Day light bulb
Fig. 104 Day light bulb.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Turn the bulb holder ›
›
›
Fig. 104
1
to the
l
ef
t
and pull.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
Turn signal bulb
Fig. 105 Turn signal bulb.
Fig. 106 Turn signal bulb.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Move the loop ›
›
›
Fig. 105
1
in the direc-
tion of
the arr
o
w and remove the cover.
–
Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 106
2
anti-
c
loc
k
wise and pull.
»
95
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
–
R
emo
v
e the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
Main beam headlight bulb
Fig. 107 Main beam headlight bulb.
Fig. 108 Main beam headlight bulb.
–
R
ai
se the bonnet
.
–
Move the loop ››› Fig. 107
1
in the direc-
tion of
the arr
o
w and remove the cover.
–
Slide connector ››› Fig. 108
2
to the left or
right
and p
u
ll.
–
Remove the bulb by disconnecting the con-
nector.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps
in reverse sequence.
Fog light bulb*
3 Valid only for versions with incandescent bulbs
Fig. 109 Fog light: extracting the grille.
96
Fuses and bulbs
Fig. 110 Fog light: remove the bulb holder
Follow the steps indicated:
R
emo
v
e the screw ››› Fig. 109
1
fr
om
the f
og light
grille using a screwdriver
and extract the grille.
Remove the 3 screws ››› Fig. 109
2
.
R
emo
v
e the metal clip situated on the
upper part of the fog light by pulling
away from the vehicle
3
and t
ake
the f
og light
out.
Remove the connector ››› Fig. 110
1
from the bulb.
T
urn the b
u
lb holder
2
anti-clockwise
and p
u
l
l.
Remove the bulb by pressing on the
bulb holder and turning it anticlockwise
at the same time.
Installation involves all of the above
steps in reverse sequence.
Check that the bulb works properly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Note
●
Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light
bul
bs, have them replaced at a Technical
Service or specialised workshop.
●
LED fog light bulbs should be replaced by
specialised personnel.
Changing incandescent rear
light bu
lbs
Rear lights summary
Tail lights on side panel
Turn signal PY21W NA LL
Side light and brake light P21W LL
Tail lights on the rear lid
Left side
Side lights 2x W5W LL
Fog lights H21 W
Right side
Side lights 2x W5W LL
Reverse light P21W LL
The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic
v
ehic
l
e. The position of lights may vary ac-
cording to the country.
97
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
Rear bulbs (in the side panel)
Fig. 111 Luggage compartment: location of
the bo
lt
sec
uring the tail light unit. Remove
the rear light unit from side panel.
Fig. 112 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail
light.
–
Check which of the bulbs is defective.
–
Open the rear lid.
–
Remove the cover by prying the flat side of
a s
c
r
ewdriver into the recess and remove
the cover from the opening ››› Fig. 111
1
.
–
Carefully loosen the screw located behind
the c
o
v
er with a screwdriver, turning it anti-
clockwise ››› Fig. 111
2
.
–
Tilt the light in the direction of the arrows
u
nti
l
it comes out of its housing (positions
3
and
4
) ›
›
› Fig. 111
.
–
Remove the bulb holder ››› Fig. 112 unlock-
ing the retaining tabs
1
.
–
Change the damaged bulb.
–
To refit follow the steps in reverse order,
t
ak
in
g special care when fitting the bulb
holder. The securing tabs must click into
place.
CAUTION
Take care when removing the rear light unit to
make s
ure there is no damage to the paint-
work or any of its components.
Note
Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to
plac
e under the glass on the rear light unit, to
avoid any scratches.
98
Fuses and bulbs
Rear lights bulbs (in the rear lid)
Fig. 113 Remove the cover from the rear lid
and det
ac
h the b
ulb holder.
Fig. 114 Position of the bulbs in the bulb
holder
The rear lid must be open to change the
b
u
l
bs.
–
Remove the rear lid cover in the direction
indicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 113 .
–
Unlock the retaining tabs
A
of the bulb
ho
l
der
, following the direction of arrows
1
and
2
›
›
› Fig. 113
.
–
Remove the bulb holder by turning it in the
direction of arrow
3
›
›
› Fig. 113
.
–
Lightly press the defective bulb into the
bulb holder
1
, then turn it to the left
2
and remove it ›
›
›
Fig. 114.
–
Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb
holder and turn it to the right as far as it
will go.
–
Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from
the glass part of the bulb.
–
Check that the new bulb works properly.
–
Reinstall the bulb holder making sure that
locking clips
A
›
›› Fig. 113
are properly
clipped.
–
Replace the cover of the rear lid lining.
Rear LED light bulb (in the rear lid)
Fig. 115 Remove the cover from the rear lid
Fig. 116 Remove the bulb holder.
»
99
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Emergencies
The rear lid must be open to change the
b
u
l
bs.
–
Remove the rear lid cover in the direction
indicated ››› Fig. 115.
–
Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise in the
direction of the arrow
1
›
›› Fig. 116
.
–
R
emove the bulb holder from its housing
2
.
–
Replace the defective bulb and return the
b
u
l
b holder to its housing, following the
same steps in reverse order.
–
Check that the new bulb works properly.
Changing number plate light bulbs
Fig. 117 In the rear bumper: number plate
light
.
Fig. 118 Number plate light: Remove the bulb
holder
.
Follow the steps indicated:
1. Press the number plate light in the direc-
tion of
the arr
o
w ››› Fig. 117.
2. Remove the number plate bulb slightly.
3. In the connector lock, turn ››› Fig. 118 to-
wards the arrow
1
and pull the connec-
t
or
.
4.
Rotate the bulb holder in the direction of
arrow
2
and extract it with the bulb.
5. Replace the defective bulb with a new
b
u
l
b with the same features.
6. Insert the bulb holder in the number plate
light and turn in the opposite direction of
arrow
2
until it stops.
7. Plug the connector into the bulb holder.
Note
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
the number plat
e lights may be LEDs. LEDs
have an estimated life that exceeds than that
of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to an
authorised workshop for replacement.
100
Operation
Fig. 119 Instruments and controls.
102
Controls and displays
Operation
C
ontr
o
ls and displays
General instrument panel
Door release lever
Central
locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Electric control to adjust exterior
mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Control lever for:
–
Turn sign
als and main beam
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
–
Lane Assi
st . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
–
Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
–
Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 195
Depending on equipment fitted:
–
Lever f
or cruise control . . . . . . . . . . 195
Steering wheel with horn and
–
Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
–
On-board c
omputer controls . . . . 30
–
Controls for radio, telephone,
navigation and speech dialogue
system
›››
Booklet Radio
–
Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-
shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 182
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Control lever for:
–
W
ind
s
creen wipers and washer . . 139
–
Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . 139
–
On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Depending on equipment fitted: ra-
dio or display for Easy Connect
(navigation, radio, TV/video) . . . . . . 110
Depending on the equipment, but-
tons for:
–
SEAT driving modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
–
Start
-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
–
Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
–
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . 135
–
Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
–
Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Depending on the equipment,
glove c
ompartment with: . . . . . . . . . 149
–
CD pla
yer* and/or SD card*
››› Booklet Radio
Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Front passenger airbag switch . . . . 81
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Passenger seat heating control . . . . 145
Depending on the equipment, con-
trol
s for:
–
Heating and ventilation system or
manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .48, 47
–
Automatic
air conditioner . . . . . . . 45
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Depending on the equipment:
–
USB/A
UX
-IN inp
ut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
–
Connectivity Box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
–
Storage compartment
Depending on equipment fitted,
gear lever or selector lever for:
–
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
–
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Electronic parking brake switch . . . 172
Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Starter button (Keyless Access lock-
ing and ignition system) . . . . . . . . . . 169
Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . 145
Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-
less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Adjustable steering column . . . . . . . 16
Storage compartment
Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Note
●
Some of the equipment li
sted in this sec-
tion is only fitted on certain models or are op-
tional extras.
»
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
103
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
A separat
e Instructions Manual is enclosed
if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted
radio, CD player, AUX IN connection or navi-
gation system.
●
The arrang
ement of switches and controls
on right-hand drive models* may be slightly
different from the layout shown in
››› page 102. However, the symbols used to
identify
the controls are the same.
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Instrument
s
View of instrument panel
Fig. 120 Instrument panel, on dash panel
Details of the instruments ›
›
›
Fig. 120: Rev counter (with the engine running, in
hundreds of revolutions per minute).
1
The beginning of the red zone of the rev
c
ou
nt
er indicates the maximum speed in
any gear after running-in and with the
104
Instruments and warning/control lamps
engine hot. However, it is advisable to
c
h
an
ge up a gear or move the selector
lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler-
ator) before the needle reaches the red
zone ›››
.
En
gine c
oo
lant temperature display
››› page 107 or the natural gas level indi-
cator in vehicles with natural gas engine
(CNG) ››› page 108.
Displays on the screen ››› page 105.
Adjuster button and display
››› page 107.
Speedometer.
Fuel gauge ››› page 108.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of
injury.
●
Do not operate the instrument panel con-
trols when driving.
CAUTION
●
To prev
ent damage to the engine, the rev
counter needle should only remain in the red
zone for a short period of time.
●
When the engine is cold, avoid high revs
and heavy acceleration and do not make the
engine work hard.
2
3
4
5
6
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con-
sumption and noise.
Rev counter
The rev counter indicates the number of en-
gine revo
lutions per minute ››› Fig. 120
1
.
Together w
ith the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable
speed.
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates
the maximum engine speed which may be
used briefly when the engine is warm and af-
ter it has been run in properly. Before reach-
ing this range, you should change to a higher
gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for
automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in
“D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped-
al.
We recommend that you avoid high revs and
that you follow the recommendations on the
gear-change indicator. Consult the additional
information in
›››
page 32, Gear-change
indicator.
CAUTION
Never allow the rev counter needle
1
››› Fig. 120 to go int
o the red zone on the
scale for more than a very brief period, other-
wise ther
e is a risk of engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to save
f
uel and minimi
se emissions and engine
noise.
Indications on the display
A variety of information can be viewed on the
in
s
trument
panel display ››› Fig. 120
3
, de-
pendin
g on the
v
ehicle equipment:
●
Bonnet, rear lid and doors open
›››
page 33.
●
Warning and information messages
›››
page 33.
●
Distance travelled ››› page 107.
●
Time ››› page 106.
●
Navigation instructions.
●
Outside temperature ›››
page 32.
●
Compass ››› page 106.
●
Shift lever position ››› page 180.
●
Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
›››
page 32.
●
Multifunction display (MFD) and menus
with different setting options ›››
page 30.
●
Service interval display ›››
page 37.
»
105
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
Sec
ond s
peed di
splay ›››
page 30.
●
Speed warning function ›››
page 37.
●
Start-Stop system status display
››› page 191.
●
Active cylinder management display
(ACT
®
)* ››› page 188
●
Signs recognised by the traffic signal de-
tection system ››› page 222
●
Low consumption driving status (ECO)
››› page 106
●
Identifying letters on engine (MKB).
Distance travelled
The odometer registers the total distance
travelled by the car.
The odometer (trip) shows the distance
travelled since the last odometer reset. The
last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-
ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.
●
Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 120
4
to re-
set
the trip r
ec
order to 0.
●
Keep the button
4
pressed for about 3
sec
ond
s
and the previous value will be dis-
played.
Time
●
To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 120
4
pressed for more than 3 seconds to select
the hour or minut
e di
s
play.
●
To continue setting the time, press the up-
per or lower part of the button
4
. Hold but-
t
on do
wn t
o scroll through the numbers
quickly.
●
Press the button
4
again in order to finish
settin
g the time.
The time c
an al
so be set via the
button
and
S
ETUP
function button in the Easy Con-
nect
sy
s
tem ››› page 110.
Compass
With the ignition on and the navigation sys-
tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to
the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis-
played on the instrument panel.
Selector lever position
The selected gear is displayed on the side of
the selector lever and on the instrument pan-
el display. In positions D and S, and with the
Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis-
played.
Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
The recommended gear in order to save fuel
is displayed on the instrument panel while
you are driving ›››
page 32.
Second speed display (mph or km/h)
In addition to the speedometer, the speed
can also be displayed in a different unit of
measurement (in miles or in km per hour).
This option cannot be deactivated in models
destined for countries in which the second
speed must always be visible.
The second speed display can be adjusted in
the Easy Connect system via the
button
and the
S
ETUP
function button ›
›
›
page 110.
Speed warning
When the speed setting is exceeded, this will
be indicated on the instrument panel display.
This is very useful, for example when using
winter tyres that are not designed for driving
at the maximum speed of the vehicle
›››
page 37.
The speed warning settings can be adjusted
in the Easy Connect system via the
button
and the
S
ETUP
function button ›
›
›
page 110.
Start-Stop operating display
Updated information relating to the status is
displayed on the instrument panel
››› page 191.
Low consumption driving status (ECO)*
Depending on the equipment, when driving,
the “ECO” display appears on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is in low consump-
tion status due to active cylinder manage-
ment (ACT
®
)*
›››
page 188.
106
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Identifying letters on engine (MKB)
Ho
l
d the b
utton ››› Fig. 120
4
down for more
th
an 15 sec
ond
s to display the identifying
letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do
this, the ignition must be switched on and
the engine switched off.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Warning
and contro
l lamps on page 109.
WARNING
Even though outside temperatures are above
freezin
g, some roads and bridges may be icy.
●
At outside temperatures above +4°C
(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol”
is not visible, there may still be patches of ice
on the road.
●
Do not rely on the outside temperature in-
dicator!
Note
●
Different
versions of the instrument panel
are available and therefore the versions and
instructions on the display may vary. In the
case of displays without warning or informa-
tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by
the warning lamps.
●
Depending on the equipment, some set-
tings and instructions can also be carried out
in the Easy Connect system.
●
When severa
l warnings are active at the
same time, the symbols are shown succes-
sively for a few seconds and will stay on until
the fault is rectified.
Odometer
Fig. 121 Instrument panel: odometer and re-
set
b
utt
on.
The distance covered is displayed in “kilome-
tr
e
s” or mi
les “m”. It is possible to change
the measurement units (kilometres
“km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*.
Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions
Manual for more details.
Odometer/trip recorder
The odometer shows the total distance cov-
ered by the vehicle.
The trip recorder shows the distance that has
been travelled since it was last reset. It is
used to measure short trips. The last digit of
the trip recorder indicates distances of 100
metres or tenths of a mile.
The trip recorder can be set to zero by press-
ing
0.0/SET
›
›› Fig. 121
.
F
ault display
If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the
letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder
display. Have the fault repaired immediately,
as far as is possible.
Coolant temperature gauge
For vehicles with no coolant temperature
g
aug
e, a c
ontrol lamp appears for high
coolant temperatures ››› page 266. Please
note
›››
.
The c
oo
l
ant temperature gauge
2
›››
Fig. 120 only w
orks when the ignition is
switched on. In order to avoid engine dam-
age, please read the following notes for the
different temperature ranges.
Engine cold
If only the diodes in the lower part of the
scale light up, this indicates that the engine
has not yet reached operating temperature.
Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and
do not make the engine work hard.
»
107
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Normal temperature
If
in norm
al
operations, the diodes light up
until the central zone, it means that the en-
gine has reached operating temperature. At
high outside temperatures and when making
the engine work hard, the diodes may contin-
ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This
is no cause for concern, provided the control
lamp does not light up on the instrument
panel digital display.
Heat range
When the diodes light up in the upper area of
the display and the control lamp appears
on the instrument panel display, the coolant
temperature is excessive ››› page 266.
CAUTION
●
To ens
ure a long useful life for the engine,
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
making the engine work hard for approxi-
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm al-
so depends on the outside temperature. If
necessary, use the engine oil temperature*
›››
page 35 as a guide.
●
Additional lights and other accessories in
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect
of the coolant. At high outside temperatures
and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
●
The front spoiler also ensures proper distri-
bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is
moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re-
duce the coo
ling effect, which could cause
the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis-
tance.
Fuel - Gas level
Fig. 122 Fuel gauge.
Displays
2
and
6
›
›
› Fig. 120
only work
when the ignition is switched on. When the
display reaches the reserve mark, the lower
diode lights up in red and the control lamp
appears ››› page 104. When the fuel level is
very low, the lower diode flashes in red.
The yellow control lamp lights up when the
reserve level has been reached.
The green warning lamp lights up when the
vehicle is running in natural gas operating
mode.
The green warning lamp switches off when
the natural gas is exhausted. The engine
changes to operate with petrol.
Problem: If the vehicle is left parked for a
long time immediately after refuelling, the
natural gas level indicator may not accurately
indicate the same level shown after refuelling
when the vehicle is started up again. This is
not due to a leak in the system, but to a drop
in pressure in the gas tank for technical rea-
sons after a cooling phase just after refuel-
ling.
Fuel level - Petrol/Diesel
Fig. 123 Fuel gauge.
The display
6
›
›
› Fig. 120
only works when
the ignition is switched on. When the display
reaches the reserve mark, the lower diode
108
Instruments and warning/control lamps
lights up in red and the control lamp ap-
pe
ar
s
››› page 104. When the fuel level is very
low, the lower diode flashes in red.
The distance to empty fuel level is displayed
on the instrument panel
3
›
›› Fig. 120
.
The c
apacity of the fuel tank of your vehicle is
given in the Technical data section
›››
page 50.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir-
regu
lar fuel supply could cause misfiring. In
this way the unburned fuel can reach the ex-
haust system, which could cause the catalytic
converter to overheat resulting in damage.
Control lamps
W
arnin
g and c
ontrol lamps
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 40.
The control and warning lamps are indicators
of warnings,
›››
, faults
›
›
›
or certain func-
tion
s.
Some c
ontrol and warning lamps come
on when the ignition is switched on, and
switch off when the engine starts running, or
while driving.
Depending on the model, additional text
messages may be viewed on the instrument
panel display. These may be purely informa-
tive or they may be advising of the need for
action ››› page 104, Instruments.
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-
times a symbol may be displayed on the in-
strument panel.
When certain control and warning lamps are
lit, an audible warning is also heard.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ignor-
ed, the vehic
le may stall in traffic, or may
cause accidents and severe injuries.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
●
Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-
sure that there are no highly flammable ma-
terials under the vehicle that could come into
contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry
grass, fuel).
●
A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
dent for the driver and for other road users. If
necessary, switch on the hazard warning
lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad-
vise other drivers.
●
Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool.
●
In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a
hazardous area and could cause severe inju-
ries ››› page 262.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and text
mess
ages when they appear may result in
faults in the vehicle.
109
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Introduction to the Easy
C
onnect
sy
stem*
System settings (CAR)*
CAR menu
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 27
To select the settings menus, press the Easy
Connect
button and the
S
ETUP
function
b
utt
on.
The act
ual number of menus available and
the name of the various options in these me-
nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics
and equipment.
Pressing the menu button will always take
you to the last menu used.
When the function button check box is activa-
ted , the function is active.
Pressing the menu button
will always take
y
ou t
o the l
ast menu used.
Any changes made using the settings menus
are automatically saved on closing those me-
nus.
Function buttons in the
vehicle settings
menu
Page
ESC system ››› page 176
Tyres ››› page 275
Driver assistance ››› table on page 27
Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 225
Vehicle lights ››› table on page 27
Mirrors and windscreen wipers ››› table on page 27
Opening and closing ››› table on page 27
Multifunction display ››› table on page 27
Date and time ››› table on page 27
Units ››› table on page 27
Service ››› page 105
Factory settings ››› table on page 27
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of
injury. Operating the Easy Connect
system while driving could distract you from
traffic.
110
Communications and multimedia
Communications and multi-
medi
a
St
eerin
g wheel controls*
General information
The steering wheel includes a multifunction
module fr
om where it is possible to control
the audio, telephone and radio/navigation
functions without needing to distract the
driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction
module:
●
Audio system + telephone without voice
contro
l version (MID): for controlling the au-
dio functions available (radio, audio CD,
MP3, iPod
®1)
, USB
1)
, SD
1)
) and Bluetooth sys-
tem from the steering wheel.
●
Audio system + telephone with voice con-
trol version (HIGH): for controlling the audio
functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,
iPod
®1)
, USB
1)
, SD
1)
) and Bluetooth system
from the steering wheel.
1)
Depending on the vehicle equipment.
111
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Operating the telephone and audio system without voice control (MID)
Fig. 124 Controls on the steering wheel.
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation
A
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
B
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu in the instrument
panel
a)
.
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu in the instrument
panel
a)
.
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu in the instrument
panel
a)
.
Short press: answer/hang up
calls, enable/open the tele-
phone menu.
Hold down: reject an incoming
call/switch to private mode/re-
dial
a)
.
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu in the instrument
panel
a)
.
C
Search for last station
Short press: switch to the previ-
ous song
Hold down: quick rewind
No function No function No function
D
Search for the next station
Short press: switch to the next
song
Hold down: fast forward
No function No function No function
E
,
F
Change menu on instrument
panel
a)
Change menu on instrument
panel
a)
Change menu on instrument
panel
a)
Change menu on instrument
panel
a)
Change menu on instrument
panel
a)
G
MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source
112
Communications and multimedia
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation
H
Turn: Next/previous preset
b)
Press: Acts on the MFD
Turn: Next/previous song
b)
Press: Acts on the MFD
Turn: No function
Press: Acts on the MFD
Turn: Acts on the MFD
Press: Confirm
Turn: Changes menu or memory
on instrument panel
Press: Operates on instrument
panel
a)
According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b)
Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.
Operating the telephone and audio system with voice control (HIGH)
Fig. 125 Controls on the steering wheel.
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone
a)
Navigation
a)
A
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
Turn: Turn volume up/down
Press: Mute
B
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
Short press: answer/hang up
calls, enable/open the tele-
phone menu.
Hold down: reject an incoming
call/switch to private/redial
mode
Short press: access to the tele-
phone menu on the dash pan-
el
a)
.
Hold down: redial
a)
»
113
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone
a)
Navigation
a)
C
Search for last station
Short press: switch to the previ-
ous song
Hold down: quick rewind
No function No function
b)
Radio/media functionality (ex-
cept AUX )
D
Search for the next station
Short press: switch to the next
song
Hold down: fast forward
No function No function
b)
Radio/media functionality (ex-
cept AUX )
E
,
F
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
G
Enable/disable voice control
a)
Enable/disable voice control
a)
Enable/disable voice control
a)
No function
b)
Enable/disable voice control
H
Turn: Next/previous preset
c)
Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
firms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Next/previous song
c)
Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
firms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it is
located
Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
firms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it is
located
Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
firms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
Turn: Acts upon the dash panel
menu depending on where it is
located
Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
firms the menu option of the
dash panel depending on the
menu option
a)
According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b)
When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX).
c)
Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.
114
Communications and multimedia
Multimedia
USB/A
UX
-INP
ort
Fig. 126 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.
Depending on the special characteristics and
the c
ou
ntr
y, the vehicle may have a
USB/AUX-IN port.
The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the
storage compartment area of the centre con-
sole ››› Fig. 126.
The operating description is located in the re-
spective Instruction Manuals of the audio
system or the navigation system.
Connectivity Box*
Fig. 127 Centre console: Connectivity Box
Depending on the special features and the
c
ou
ntr
y, the vehicle may have a Connectivity
Box.
With the Connectivity Box you can charge
your mobile device wirelessly with Qi
1)
tech-
nology as well as reduce the radiation in the
vehicle and have better reception.
The Connectivity Box can be found in the
storage compartment area of the centre con-
sole ››› Fig. 127.
The operating description is located in the re-
spective Instruction Manuals of the audio
system or the navigation system.
Note
Your mobile device must support the Qi wire-
les
s inductive charging interface standard for
proper operation.
1)
Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile
phone wirel
essly.
115
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Opening and closing
C
entr
a
l locking system
Description
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 10
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked via
the central locking system. There are several
methods, depending on the vehicle equip-
ment:
●
key with remote control
›››
page 118,
●
lock on driver door (emergency opening
›››
page 10) or
●
interior central locking switch
›››
page 119.
Unlocking one side of the vehicle only
When you lock the vehicle with the key, the
doors and the rear lid are locked. When you
open the door, you can either unlock only the
driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select
the required option, use Easy Connect*
›››
page 119.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)*
The Auto Lock function locks the doors and
the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed
of about 15 km/h (9 mph).
The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-
tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle
can also be unlocked via the central locking
switch or by pulling one of the inside door
handles. The Auto Lock function can be
switched on and off on the sound system or
on the Easy Connect* system ››› page 119.
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags inflate, the doors will be automatically
unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
Anti-theft alarm system*
If the anti-theft alarm system senses interfer-
ence with the vehicle it triggers an audible
and visible alarm.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically
switched on when locking the vehicle. It
switches off when the vehicle is unlocked
from a distance.
When the driver door is unlocked with the
key, you should switch on the ignition within
15 seconds. Otherwise the alarm will be trig-
gered. On some export versions, the alarm is
triggered immediately when you open a door.
To deactivate the alarm, press the button
on the remote control key, or switch on the
ignition. Af
t
er a c
ertain time, the alarm will
automatically switch off.
Switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and
tow-away protection if you wish to prevent
the alarm from being triggered accidentally
››› page 126.
Turn signals
The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-
hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle
is locked.
If it does not flash, this indicates that one of
the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not
closed correctly.
Accidental lock-out
The central locking system prevents you from
being locked out of the vehicle in the follow-
ing situations:
●
If the driver door is open, the vehicle can-
not be locked with the central locking switch
››› page 119.
Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,
when all the doors and the rear lid have been
closed. This prevents the accidental locking
of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in
the vehic
le if it is locked from the outside and
the anti-theft security system* is enabled, as
the doors and windows cannot then be
opened from the inside. Locked doors could
delay assistance in an emergency, potentially
putting lives at risk.
116
Opening and closing
Note
●
Never le
ave any valuable items in the vehi-
cle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a
safe.
●
If the diode on the driver door sill lights up
for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is
locked, the central locking system or anti-
theft alarm* is not working properly. You
should have the fault repaired at a SEAT Offi-
cial Service or specialised workshop.
●
The vehicle interior monitoring of the anti-
theft alarm* system will only function as in-
tended if the windows and the sunroof* are
closed.
Car key
Fig. 128 Vehicle key
Fig. 129 Vehicle key with alarm button
Vehicle key
W
ith the
v
ehicle key the vehicle may be
locked or unlocked remotely ››› page 116.
The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-
tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-
cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote
control and new battery is several metres
around the vehicle.
If it is not possible to open or close the vehi-
cle using the remote control key, this should
be re-synchronised ››› page 123 or the bat-
tery changed ››› page 122.
Different keys belonging to the vehicle may
be used.
Control lamp on the vehicle key
When a button on the vehicle key is pressed,
the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 128 (arrow)
once briefly, but if the button is held down for
a longer period the control lamp flashes sev-
eral times, such as in convenience opening.
If the vehicle key control lamp does not light
up when the button is pressed, replace the
key's battery ››› page 122.
Unfolding and folding the key shaft
Press button
1
›
›› Fig. 128
or ›
›› Fig. 129 to
unlock and unfold the key shaft.
To fold the shaft away, press button
1
and
f
o
l
d the key shaft in until it locks in place.
Alarm button*
Only press alarm button
2
in the event of an
emer
g
ency!
When the alarm button is press-
ed, the vehicle horn is heard and the turn sig-
nals are switched on for a short time. When
the alarm button is pressed again, the alarm
is switched off.
Spare key
To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,
the vehicle chassis number is required.
Each new key contains a microchip which
must be coded with the data from the vehicle
electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not
work if it does not contain a microchip or the
microchip has not been encoded. This is also
true for keys which are specially cut for the
vehicle.
»
117
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be
o
bt
ained fr
om a SEAT Official Service, a spe-
cialised workshop or an approved key service
qualified to create this kind of key.
New keys or spare keys must be synchron-
ised before use ››› page 123.
CAUTION
All of the vehicle keys contain electronic com-
ponents. Prot
ect them from damage, impacts
and humidity.
Note
●
Only u
se the key button when you require
the corresponding function. Pushing the but-
ton unnecessarily could accidentally unlock
the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also pos-
sible even when you are outside the radius of
action.
●
Key operation can be greatly influenced by
overlapping radio signals close to the vehicle
working in the same range of frequencies, for
example, radio transmitters or mobile tele-
phones.
●
Obstacles between the remote control and
the vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis-
charged batteries can considerably reduce
the range of the remote control.
●
If the buttons of the vehicle key are press-
ed ››› Fig. 128 or ››› Fig. 129 or one of the cen-
tral locking buttons ››› page 119 is pressed
repeatedly in short succession, the central
locking briefly disconnects as protection
against overloading. The vehicle is then un-
locked. L
ock it if necessary.
Unlocking/Locking by remote control
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 10
The vehicle will be locked again automatical-
ly if you do not open one of the doors or the
rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the
car. This function prevents the vehicle from
remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is
pressed by mistake. This does not apply if
you press the button
for at least one sec-
ond.
In
v
ehic
les with a security central locking
feature (selective unlocking of side doors)
››› page 118, when the button
is pressed
onc
e, on
ly
the driver door and the fuel tank
flap are unlocked. When the button is press-
ed a second time, all the vehicle doors are
unlocked.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Descrip-
tion on page 116
.
Note
●
Do not use the r
emote control key until the
vehicle is visible.
●
Other function
s of the remote control key
››› page 128, Convenience opening/closing.
Selective unlocking system
The selective unlocking system allows you to
only u
nlock the driver door and the fuel tank
flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain
locked.
Unlocking the driver door and tank flap
–
Press button
on the remote control key
onc
e
, or t
urn the key once to open.
Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the
tank flap simultaneously.
–
Within 5 seconds, press button
on the
r
emot
e c
ontrol key twice, or turn the key to
open twice within 5 seconds.
The anti-theft security system* and the anti-
theft alarm* are immediately disabled if you
unlock only the driver door, without unlock-
ing the other doors.
In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro-
gramme the security central locking system
directly ››› page 119.
118
Opening and closing
Programming the central locking sys-
t
em
You can use Easy Connect* to select which
doors ar
e unlocked with the central locking
system. Using the radio or the Easy Connect*
system, you can select whether the vehicle
automatically closes with the “Auto Lock”
programme at speeds of more than 15 km/h
(9 mph).
Programming the unlocking of the doors (ve-
hicles with Easy Connect)
–
Select: control button Systems or Vehi-
cle systems > Vehicle settings >
Central locking > Unlocking doors.
Programmin
g the Auto Lock (vehicles with
radio)
–
Select:
SETUP
button > control button
Central locking > Locking while
driving.
Pr
ogr
ammin
g the Auto Lock (vehicles with
Easy Connect)
–
Select: control button Systems or Vehi-
cle systems > Vehicle settings >
Locking while driving.
Unlocking doors You can choose to un-
lock all the doors or only the driver door
when you unlock the vehicle. In all the op-
tions, the fuel tank flap is also unlocked.
With the Driver setting, when you press the
button on the remote control key only the
door on the driv
er's
s
ide is unlocked. If that
button is pressed twice, the rest of the doors
and the rear lid will be unlocked.
In vehicles with a conventional key, turn the
key in the door lock, in the direction of open-
ing, twice within 2 seconds.
If the button
is pressed, all the vehicle
door
s
ar
e locked. At the same time, a confir-
mation signal* is heard.
Auto Lock/Locking while driving. If
you select on, all the vehicle doors are
locked at speeds above 15 km/h (9 mph).
Central locking switch
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 10
Please note the following when using the
central locking switch to lock your vehicle:
●
It is not possible to open the doors or the
rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,
e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).
●
The LED in the central locking switch lights
up when all the doors are closed and locked.
●
You can open the doors individually from
the inside by pulling the inside door handle.
●
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will
be automatically unlocked to facilitate access
and assistance.
WARNING
●
The centra
l locking switch also operates
when the ignition is switched off and auto-
matically locks all the vehicle doors when the
button
is pressed.
●
The central locking switch does not operate
if the v
ehicle is locked from the outside and
the anti-theft security system is switched on.
●
Locked doors could delay assistance in an
emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Do not leave anyone, especially children, in
the vehicle.
Note
Your vehicle will lock automatically when it
reac
hes a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)
(Auto Lock) ››› page 116. You can unlock the
vehicle again using button
on the central
lockin
g switch.
119
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
w
ith K
eyl
ess Access*
Fig. 130 Keyless Access locking and ignition
sy
s
t
em: In the proximity of the car.
Fig. 131 Keyless Access locking and ignition
sy
s
t
em: sensor surface
A
for unlocking in-
s
ide the door h
andl
e and sensor surface
B
for locking on the exterior of the handle.
›››
table on page 2
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
may
have the Keyless Access system.
Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-
tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle
without actively using its key. For this, all that
is required is for a valid vehicle key to be in
an area near the vehicle ››› Fig. 130 and one
of the sensor surfaces on the door handles to
be touched ››› Fig. 131 ›››
.
The
v
ehic
le can be unlocked and locked via
the front doors only. When doing so, the re-
mote control key must be no further than ap-
prox. 1.5 m from the door handle.
It does not matter where you carry the key, for
instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or
in a briefcase.
Once the doors have been locked, they can-
not be opened again immediately. This will
enable you to check that the doors are prop-
erly closed.
If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock
only the corresponding door or the entire ve-
hicle. The necessary adjustments can be per-
formed in vehicles with a driver information
system ›››
page 27.
General information
If a valid key is located in the proximity of the
car ››› Fig. 130, the Keyless Access lock and
ignition system gives the key entry as soon
as one of the sensor surfaces on the door
handles is touched. The following features
are then available without having to use the
vehicle key actively:
●
Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using
the handles of the front doors or the soft-
touch/handle on the rear lid.
●
Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the
sensor of the driver or passenger door han-
dle.
●
Press & Drive: keyless starting of the en-
gine with the starter button ››› page 167.
The central locking and locking systems oper-
ate in the same way as a normal locking and
unlocking system. Only the controls change.
Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a
double flash of the indicator lights; locking
by a single flash.
If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and
the rear lid are closed leaving the last key
used inside the vehicle and none outside,
the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the
vehicle's indicator lights will flash four times.
The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-
onds if you fail to open any door or the rear
lid.
If you unlock the vehicle but fail to open any
door or the rear lid, the vehicle will lock again
after a few seconds.
120
Opening and closing
Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless-
Entr
y)
●
Ho
l
d one of the front door handles. In do-
ing this, the sensor surface ››› Fig. 131
A
(ar-
r
o
w) i
s touched on the handle and the vehi-
cle unlocks.
●
Open the door.
On vehicles with selective opening or info-
tainment system configuration, pulling the
door handle twice will unlock all doors.
On vehicles without a “Safe” security sys-
tem: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Ex-
it)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch the locking sensor surface
B
(arrow)
of
the h
andl
e of one of the front doors once.
The door being operated must be closed.
On vehicles with a “Safe” security system:
shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Exit)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch the sensor surface
B
(arrow) of the
h
andl
e of
one of the front doors once. The ve-
hicle locks with the “Safe” security system
›››
page 122. The door being operated must
be closed.
●
Touch the sensor surface
B
(arrow) of the
h
andl
e of
one of the front doors twice to lock
the vehicle without activating the “Safe” se-
curity system ››› page 122.
Unlocking and locking the rear lid
When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-
matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-
id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 130.
Open or close the rear lid normally.
After closing, the rear lid locks automatically.
If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear
lid will not lock automatically after closing it.
What happens when locking the vehicle with
a second key
If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and
it is locked from the outside with a second
vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is
blocked for engine ignition ››› page 167. In
order to enable engine ignition, the button
on the key
inside the vehicle needs to be
pr
e
s
sed.
Automatically disabling sensors
If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a
long period of time, the proximity sensors on
the passenger doors are automatically disa-
bled.
If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dles is often activated in a unusual manner
with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches
of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity
sensors are disabled for a certain period of
time.
Sensors will again be enabled:
●
After a time.
●
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-
ton
on the key.
●
OR: if
the rear lid is open.
●
OR:
if
the vehicle is unlocked manually with
the key.
Convenience functions
To close all the electric windows and the
glass roof using the convenience function,
keep a finger for a few seconds on the lock-
ing sensor surface ››› Fig. 131
B
(arrow) of
the door h
andl
e u
ntil the windows and roof
have closed.
The doors may be opened by touching the
sensor surface of the door handle depending
on the settings that have been activated in
the infotainment system with the
button
and the
S
ETUP
and
Openin
g and c
lo
sing
func-
tion b
utt
on
s.
CAUTION
The sensor surfaces on the door handles
coul
d engage if hit with a water jet or high
pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key
in the proximity. If at least one of the win-
dows is open and the sensor surface
B
on
»
121
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
one of the handles permanently activates, all
window
s will close.
Note
●
If
the v
ehicle battery has little or no charge,
or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire-
ly out of charge, you will probably not be able
to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless
Access system. The vehicle can be unlocked
or locked manually ››› page 87.
●
To control the proper locking of the vehicle,
the release function is disabled for approx. 2
seconds.
●
If the message Keyless access system
faulty is displayed on the screen of the
dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the
operation of the Keyless Access system. Con-
tact a specialised workshop. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
●
Depending on the function set on the info-
tainment system for the mirrors, the exterior
mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting
will come on when unlocking the vehicle us-
ing the sensor surface on the driver and pas-
senger door handles ››› page 141.
●
If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or
the system fails to detect one, a warning will
display on the dash panel screen. This could
happen if any other radio frequency signal in-
terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo-
bile device accessory) or if the key is covered
by another object (e.g. an aluminium case).
●
If the sensor
s are very dirty, e.g. have a lay-
er of salt, how the sensors on the door han-
dles operate may be affected. In this case,
clean the vehicle.
●
If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic
gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear
stick is in position P.
Anti-theft security system (Safelock)*
The following message is displayed on the in-
strument p
anel to remind the driver that
when the vehicle is closed from the outside,
the anti-theft security system is switched on.
Do not forget the Safelock.
Please see Instruction Manual. The
vehicle cannot be opened from inside. This
makes it more difficult for unauthorised per-
sons to break into the vehicle ›››
in De-
s
c
ription on p
age 116.
The anti-theft security system can be switch-
ed off each time the vehicle is locked:
●
Turn the key a second time to the lock posi-
tion, in the door lock, within two seconds. If
necessary, remove the protective cover on
the driver door handle ›››
page 10 or else
●
Press
on the remote control key for a
sec
ond time
w
ithin 2 seconds.
The flashing frequency of the diode in the
door sill immediately confirms the process.
Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence
for a brief period, then it stops for approxi-
mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues
flashing slowly.
Replacing the battery
Fig. 132 Vehicle key: opening the battery
c
omp
ar
tment
Fig. 133 Vehicle key: removing the battery
SEAT recommends you ask a specialised
w
ork
shop t
o replace the battery.
122
Opening and closing
The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-
c
l
e k
ey, under a cover.
Changing the battery
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 117.
●
Remove the cover from the back of the ve-
hicle key ››› Fig. 132 in the direction of the ar-
row ›››
.
●
Extract the battery from the compartment
u
s
in
g a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 133.
●
Place the new battery in the compartment
as shown ››› Fig. 133, pressing in the oppo-
site direction to that shown by the arrow
›››
.
●
Fit the cover as shown ›
›
›
Fig. 132, pressing
it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite
direction to that shown by the arrow until it
clicks into place.
CAUTION
●
If the batt
ery is not changed correctly, the
vehicle key may be damaged.
●
Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-
place the dead battery with another of the
same voltage, size and specifications.
●
When fitting the battery, check that the po-
larity is correct.
For the sake of the environment
Please dispose of your used batteries correct-
ly and with r
espect for the environment.
Synchronising the vehicle key
If the button
is pressed frequently outside
of the v
ehicle range, it is possible that the ve-
hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-
ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-
synchronised as described below:
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 117.
●
If necessary, remove the cover from the
driver door lever
›››
page 10.
●
Press the
button on the vehicle key. For
thi
s, it
mu
st remain with the vehicle.
●
Open the vehicle within one minute using
the key blade. The key has been synchron-
ised.
●
If necessary, fit the cap.
Childproof lock
3 Applies to vehicles with 5 doors:
Fig. 134 Childproof lock on the left hand side
door
.
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors
fr
om bein
g opened fr
om the inside. This sys-
tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-
cidentally while the vehicle is running.
This function is independent of the vehicle
electronic opening and locking systems. It
only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-
ted and deactivated manually, as described
below:
Activating the childproof lock
–
Unlock the vehicle and open the door in
which you wish to activate the childproof
lock.
–
With the door open, rotate the groove in
the door using the ignition key, clockwise
for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 134 and
»
123
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
anti-clockwise for the right hand side
door
s.
D
e
activating the childproof lock
–
Unlock the vehicle and open the door
whose childproof lock you want to deacti-
vate.
–
With the door open, rotate the groove in
the door using the ignition key, anti-clock-
wise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 134
and clockwise for the right hand side
doors.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the
door can only be opened from the outside.
The childproof lock can be activated or deac-
tivated by inserting the key in the groove
when the door is open, as described above.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to
br
e
ak
into the vehicle or steal it.
The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned
on when the vehicle is locked with the key.
●
The turn signal light will flash twice on
opening and deactivating the alarm.
●
The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
ing and activating the alarm.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for
about 30 seconds accompanied by sound
and optical (flashing) warning signals and
will be repeated about ten times when the
vehicle is locked and the following unauthor-
ised actions are attempted:
●
Opening a door that is mechanically un-
locked using the vehicle key without switch-
ing on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in
certain markets, such as the Netherlands,
there is no 15 second waiting time and the
alarm is activated immediately on opening
the door).
●
A door is opened.
●
The bonnet is opened.
●
The rear lid is opened.
●
When the ignition is switched on with a
non-authorised key.
●
When the vehicle battery is disconnected.
●
Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles
with interior monitoring ››› page 126).
●
When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with
anti-tow system ››› page 126).
●
When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with
anti-tow sy
stem ››› page 126).
●
When the vehic
le is transported on a ferry
or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or
vehicle interior monitoring ››› page 126).
●
When a trailer connected to the anti-theft
alarm system is disconnected.
How to turn OFF the alarm
Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking button
on the key or turn on the ignition with a valid
key.
Note
●
After 28 d
ays, the indicator light will be
switched off to prevent the battery from ex-
hausting if the vehicle has been left parked
for a long period of time. The alarm system
remains activated.
●
If, after the audible warning goes off, an-
other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the
rear lid is opened after a door has been
opened), the alarm is triggered again.
●
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
the vehicle is locked from within using the
central locking button
.
●
If the driver door is unlocked mechanically
with the key
, only the driver door is unlocked,
the rest of the doors remain locked. Only
when the ignition has been turned on will the
other doors be available - but not unlocked -
and the central locking button will be activa-
ted.
124
Opening and closing
●
If the v
ehicle battery is run down or flat
then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor-
rectly.
●
Vehicle monitoring remains active even if
the battery is disconnected or not working for
any reason.
●
The alarm is triggered immediately if one of
the battery cables is disconnected while the
alarm system is active.
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-
tow sy
stem*
It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-
r
at
ed in the anti-thef
t alarm* which detects
unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-
sound.
Activation
–
It is automatically switched on when the
anti-theft alarm is activated.
Deactivation
–
Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
chanically or by pressing the
button on
the r
emot
e c
ontrol. The time period from
when the door is opened until the key is in-
serted in the contact should not exceed 15
seconds, otherwise the alarm will be trig-
gered.
–
Press the button
on the remote control
tw
ic
e.
The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-
sors will be deactivated. The alarm system
remains activated.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system are automatically switched on
again next time the vehicle is locked.
The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-
ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched
on. In order to activate it, all the doors and
the rear lid must be closed.
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior
monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must
be done each time that the vehicle is locked;
if not, they will be automatically switched on.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system should be switched off if animals
are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,
their movements will trigger the alarm) or
when, for example, the vehicle is transported
or has to be towed with only one axle on the
ground.
False alarms
Interior monitoring will only operate correctly
if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-
serve related legal requirements.
The following cases may cause a false alarm:
●
Open windows (partially or fully).
●
Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or
completely).
●
Movement of objects inside the vehicle,
such as loose papers, items hanging from
the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
Note
●
If the v
ehicle is relocked and the alarm is
activated without the volumetric sensor func-
tion, relocking will activate the alarm with all
its functions, except the volumetric sensor.
This function is reactivated when the alarm is
switched on again, unless it is deliberately
switched off.
●
If the alarm has been triggered by the volu-
metric sensor, this will be indicated by a
flashing of the warning lamp on the driver
door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is
different to the flash indicating the alarm is
activated.
●
The vibration of a mobile phone left inside
the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior
monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors
react to movements and shakes inside the ve-
hicle.
●
If on activating the alarm, any door or the
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa-
ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the
anti-tow system will only be activated once
all the doors are closed (including the rear
lid).
125
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Deactivating the vehicle interior moni-
t
orin
g and anti-t
ow systems*
Fig. 135 Vehicle interior monitoring/tow-
a
w
a
y protection button.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be
trig
g
er
ed if movements are detected in the
interior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in-
clination is changed (e.g. during transport).
You can prevent the alarm from being trig-
gered accidentally by switching off the vehi-
cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro-
tection.
–
To switch off the vehicle interior monitoring
and tow-away protection, switch off the ig-
nition and press button ››› Fig. 135. The in-
dicator on the button will light up.
–
When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle
interior monitoring and the tow-away pro-
tection are switched off until the next time
the door is opened.
If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*
››› page 122 is switched off, the vehicle interi-
or monitoring and the tow-away protection
are automatically switched off.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Descrip-
tion on page 116
.
Rear lid (luggage compart-
ment)
Tail
gate automatic lock
Where the vehicle has been locked by press-
in
g the
button on the remote control with
the r
e
ar lid open, the r
ear lid will lock auto-
matically when closed.
The automatic tailgate locking time extension
function can be activated. Where this func-
tion is activated and once the rear lid has
been unlocked by pressing the
button on
the r
emot
e c
ontrol key
›››
page 118, the rear
lid can be re-opened for a certain length of
time.
Where required, the automatic tailgate lock-
ing time extension function can be activated
or deactivated at an Authorised SEAT Service,
which will provide all the necessary informa-
tion.
Before the vehicle locks automatically, there
is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle.
Therefore, we recommend you always lock
the vehicle by pressing the
button on the
r
emot
e c
ontrol or by using the central locking
button.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Intro-
duction on page 87
.
●
Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of
accident or injury.
●
The rear lid must not be opened when the
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may
damage the tail lights.
●
Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down
with your hand on the rear window. The glass
could smash. Risk of injury!
●
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.
If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-
ing.
●
Closing the rear lid without observing and
ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury
to you and to third parties. Make sure that no
one is in the path of the rear lid.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the
interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
●
If you only open the rear lid, do not leave
the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened
if the key is left inside.
126
Opening and closing
Electric windows
Openin
g and c
lo
sing of the electric
windows*
Fig. 136 Detail of the driver door: controls for
the w
indo
w
s (5-door vehicle with front and
rear electric windows).
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 13
The front and rear electric windows can be
operated by using the controls on the driver
door. The other doors each have a switch for
their own window.
Always close the windows fully if you park
the vehicle or leave it unattended ›››
.
Y
ou c
an u
se the electric windows for approx.
10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
neither the driver door nor the front passen-
ger door has been opened and the key has
not been removed from the ignition.
Safety switch * (only in 5-door vehicles)
Safety switch
5
on the driver door can be
u
sed t
o di
sable the electric window buttons
in the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear
doors are activated.
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors
are deactivated.
The safety control symbol lights up in yel-
low if the buttons on the rear doors are
switched off.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Intro-
duction on page 87
.
●
Incorrect use of the electric windows can
result in injury.
●
Never close the rear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could
cause serious injury to you and third parties.
Make sure that no one is in the path of a win-
dow.
●
The engine may accidentally be started and
be out of control.
●
If the ignition is switched on, the electric
equipment could be activated with risk of in-
jury, for example, in the electric windows.
●
The doors can be locked using the remote
control key. This could become an obstacle
for assistance in an emergency situation.
●
Therefor
e always take the key with you
when you leave the vehicle.
●
The electric windows will work until the ig-
nition has been switched off and one of the
front doors has been opened.
●
If necessary, use the safety switch to disa-
ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that
they have been disabled.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it
i
s s
tiff or because of an obstruction, the win-
dow will automatically open again
››› page 127. If this happens, check why the
window could not be closed before attempt-
ing to close it again.
Roll-back function
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-
jur
y
when the el
ectric windows close.
●
If a window is obstructed when closing au-
tomatically, the window stops at this point
and lowers immediately ›››
.
●
Next, check why the window does not close
bef
or
e att
empting it again.
●
If you try within the following 10 seconds
and the window closes again with difficulty
or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos-
ing will stop working for 10 seconds.
»
127
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
If
the w
indo
w is still obstructed, the win-
dow will stop at this point.
●
If there is no obvious reason why the win-
dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by
pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-
dow closes with maximum force. The roll-
back function is now deactivated.
●
If more than 10 seconds pass, the window
will open fully when you operate one of the
buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Opening
and clos
ing of the electric windows* on
page 127.
●
The roll-back function does not prevent fin-
gers or other parts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame. Risk of
accident.
Convenience opening/closing
Use the convenience opening/closing func-
tion t
o e
a
sily open/close all the windows and
the sliding/tilting sunroof* from the outside.
Convenience open function
–
Press and hold button
on the remote
c
ontr
o
l key until all the windows and the
sliding/tilting sunroof* have reached the
desired position, or
–
First unlock the vehicle using button
on
the r
emot
e c
ontrol key and then keep the
key in the driver door lock until all the win-
dows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* have
reached the required position.
Convenience close function
–
Press and hold button
on the remote
c
ontr
o
l key until all the windows and the
sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed ›››
, or
–
Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock"
po
s
ition u
ntil all the windows and the slid-
ing/tilting sunroof* are closed.
Programming convenience opening in the
Easy Connect*
–
Select: function button
CAR
> control but-
t
on Vehicle systems* > Vehicle set-
tings > Central locking > Open the
window by holding button down or
el
se >
Front window on/off or else
Roof on/off*.
WARNING
●
Take c
are when closing the sliding/tilting
sunroof* and windows. There is a risk of suf-
fering injury.
●
For safety reasons, you should only use the
remote control open and close functions with-
in about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid in-
juries, always keep an eye on the windows
and the sliding/tilting sunroof* when press-
ing the button to close them. The windows
stop mo
ving as soon as the button is re-
leased.
One-touch opening and closing*
One-touch opening and closing means you
do not hav
e to hold down the button.
Buttons ››› Fig. 136
1
,
2
,
3
and
4
have
two pos
itions for opening windows and two
for closing them. This makes it easier to open
and close windows to the desired position.
One-touch closing
–
Pull up the window button briefly up to the
second pos
ition. The window closes fully.
One-touch opening
–
Push down the window button briefly up to
the second position. The window opens
fully.
Resetting one-touch opening and closing
The automatic open and close function will
not work if the battery has been temporarily
disconnected. The function can be restored
as follows:
–
Close the window as far as it will go by lift-
ing and holding the electric window switch.
128
Opening and closing
–
R
el
e
ase the switch and then lift it again for
1 second. This will re-enable the automatic
function.
If you push (or pull) a button to the first
stage, the window will open (or close) until
you release the button. If you push or lift the
button briefly to the second stage, the win-
dow will open (one-touch opening) or close
(one-touch closing) automatically. If you op-
erate the button while the window is opening
or closing, it stops at this position.
Panoramic sliding sunroof*
Opening or closing the panoramic
sliding sunroof
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 13
The panoramic sliding sunroof will only work
with the ignition on. It can be opened or
closed for a few minutes after the ignition
has been switched off, provided the driver
door and the front passenger door are not
opened.
WARNING
Careless or uncontrolled use of the panoram-
ic slidin
g sunroof can cause serious injuries.
●
Only open or c
lose the panoramic sliding
sunroof and the sun blind* when nobody is in
the way.
●
The panoramic sliding sunroof can be oper-
ated for up to about ten minutes after the ig-
nition has been switched off, provided the
driver door and the front passenger door are
not opened.
CAUTION
Check that when the rear lid is open, it does
not
touc
h loads carried on the roof. When a
roof carrier is fitted, DO NOT open the panor-
amic roof*.
Note
●
Leav
es and other loose objects that accu-
mulate on the sun roof rails should be regu-
larly cleaned away either by hand or with a
vacuum.
●
In case of a fault in the operation of the
panoramic sliding sunroof, the anti-trap func-
tion will not operate correctly. Contact a spe-
cialised workshop.
Opening and closing the sun blind*
3 Valid for vehicles: with sun blinds
Fig. 137 On the interior roof lining: switches
f
or the s
u
n blind.
Function Action
Opening com-
pletely (automatic
function)
Press button ››› Fig. 137
1
briefly.
Stop automatic
operation
Press button
1
or button
2
briefly.
To set the inter-
mediate position
Press button
1
or button
2
until
the correct position is set.
Closing complete-
ly (automatic
function)
Press the button
2
briefly.
Once the ignition has been switched off, you
c
an s
ti
ll open or close the sun blind for a few
minutes provided the driver door and the
front passenger door are not opened.
129
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Convenience closing of the panoramic
s
lidin
g s
unroof
The panoramic sliding sunroof can be
opened or closed fr
om outside the vehicle
using the vehicle key:
●
Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking but-
ton pressed. The panoramic sliding sunroof
is adjusted or closes.
●
Release the unlock or lock button to stop
the function.
During convenience closing, the windows
and the panoramic sliding sunroof close at
the same time.
Note
The rotary button of the panoramic sliding
sunr
oof remains in the last position selected
if the roof is closed using convenience clos-
ing from outside the vehicle, and will have to
be re-positioned the next time you drive.
Roll-back function of the panoramic
s
lidin
g s
unroof and the sun blind*
The anti-trap function reduces the risk of in-
jur
y
when openin
g and closing the panoram-
ic sliding sunroof and sun blind
›››
. When
it
enc
ou
nters an obstacle while closing, it
rolls back and opens again.
●
Check why the panoramic sliding sunroof
or the sun blind does not close.
●
Try and close them again.
●
If the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun
blind is still obstructed, it will stop at the cor-
responding position. Close it without the an-
ti-trap function.
Closing without the roll-back function
●
The switch should be in the “closed posi-
tion” ›››
page 13
1
.
●
Panoramic sliding sunroof: W
ithin fiv
e sec
-
onds of triggering the anti-trap function, pull
the control all the way back ›››
page 13
(arrow
5
) until the panoramic sliding sun-
r
oof
c
loses fully.
●
Sun blind: Within five seconds of triggering
the anti-trap function, press button
››› Fig. 137
2
until the sun blind closes fully.
●
The panoramic sliding sunroof and sun
b
lind c
lo
se without the anti-trap function.
●
If the panoramic sliding sunroof still cannot
be closed, visit a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Closing the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun
blind without
the anti-trap function can cause
serious injuries.
●
Always close the panoramic sliding sunroof
carefully.
●
Nobody shou
ld be in the way of the panor-
amic sliding sunroof or sun blind, especially
when they are closed without the anti-trap
function.
●
The anti-trap function does not prevent fin-
gers or other parts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame and caus-
ing injury.
Note
The anti-trap function is activated if the win-
do
ws
and the panoramic sliding sunroof are
closed from the outside of the vehicle using
the ignition key for convenience closing
››› page 128.
130
Lights and visibility
Lights and visibility
Light
s
Side light
and dip
ped beam headlight
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 24
The legal requirements regarding the use of
vehicle lights in each country must be ob-
served.
The driver is personally responsible for the
correct use and adjustment of the lights in all
situations.
Audible warnings to advise the driver that
the lights have not been switched off
If the key is not in the ignition and the driver
door is open, an audible warning signal is
heard in the following cases: this is a remind-
er to turn off the lights.
●
When the parking light is on
›››
page 131.
●
When the light switch is in position or
.
WARNING
The side lights or daytime running lights are
not bright enough t
o illuminate the road
ahead and to ensure that other road users are
able to see you.
●
Alwa
ys use your dipped beam head lights if
it is raining or if visibility is poor.
WARNING
If the headlights are set too high and not
u
sed corr
ectly, there is a risk of dazzling or
distracting other road users. This could result
in a serious accident.
●
Always make sure that the headlights are
correctly adjusted.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights consist of individ-
ual
lights, int
e
grated in the front headlights.
With the daylight driving lights on, only these
lights switch on ›››
.
The d
a
ytime ru
nning lights switch on every
time the ignition is switched on, if the switch
is in positions or , according to the level
of exterior lighting.
When the light switch is in position , a
light sensor automatically switches dipped
beam on and off (including the control and
instrument lighting) or the daytime running
lights depending on the level of exterior
lighting.
WARNING
●
Never drive w
ith daytime lights if the road
is not well lit due to weather or lighting con-
ditions. Daytime lights do not provide
enough light to illuminate the road properly
or be seen by other road users.
●
The rear lights do not come on with the
daytime driving light. A vehicle which does
not have the rear lights on may not be visible
to other drivers in the darkness, in the case
of heavy rain or in conditions of poor visibili-
ty.
Turn signal and main beam lever
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 25
Push the lever all the way down to turn off
the corresponding function.
Convenience turn signals
For the convenience turn signals, move the
lever as far as possible upwards or down-
wards and release the lever. The turn signal
will flash three times.
The convenience turn signals are activated
and deactivated in the Easy Connect system
via the
button and the
S
ETUP
function
b
utt
on
›
››
page 110.
»
131
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
In vehicles that do not have the correspond-
in
g menu, thi
s
function can be deactivated in
a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, or
forg
etting to deactivate them can confuse
other road users. This could result in a seri-
ous accident.
●
Always give warning when you are going to
change lane, overtake or when turning, acti-
vating the turn signal in good time.
●
As soon as you have finished changing
lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn
signal off.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the headlights may cause ac-
cidents
and serious injury, as the main beam
may distract or dazzle other drivers.
Note
●
If the con
venience turn signals are operat-
ing (three flashes) and the other convenience
turn signals are switched on, the active part
stops flashing and only flashes once in the
new part selected.
●
The turn signal only works when the igni-
tion is switched on. The hazard warning
lights also work when the ignition is switch-
ed off.
●
If a trai
ler turn signal malfunctions, the
control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn
signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash
at double speed.
●
The main beam headlights can only be
switched on if the dipped beam headlights
are already on.
●
In cold or damp weather conditions, the
headlights, tail lights and turn signals may
mist up inside temporarily. This is normal and
in no way effects the useful life of the vehicle
lighting system.
Automatic dipped beam control
*
The automatic dipped beam control is merely
int
ended a
s
an aid and is not able to recog-
nise all driving situations.
When the light switch is in position , the
vehicle lights and the instrument panel and
switch lighting switch on and off automatical-
ly in the following situations ›››
in Daytime
ru
nnin
g light
s on page 131:
Automatic switching
on
Automatic switching
off
The photo sensor detects
darkness, for example,
when driving through a
tunnel.
When adequate lighting is
detected.
Automatic switching
on
Automatic switching
off
The rain sensor detects
rain and activates the
windscreen wipers.
When the windscreen wip-
ers have been inactive for
a few minutes.
WARNING
If the road is not well lit and other road users
cannot see the
vehicle well enough or at all,
accidents may occur.
●
The automatic dipped beam control ()
only switches on the dipped beam when
there are no changes in brightness, and not,
for example when it is foggy.
Main beam assist*
›››
table on page 2
Main beam assist (Light Assist)
The main beam assist acts within the limits
of the system and depending on environmen-
tal and traffic conditions. Once switched on,
the system is activated as of a speed of
about 60 km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated
below about 30 km/h (18 mph)
›››
.
When the sy
s
t
em is activated and the camera
detects other vehicles that may be dazzled,
the main beam is automatically switched off.
Otherwise, the main beam is automatically
switched on.
132
Lights and visibility
The main beam assist generally detects illu-
min
at
ed ar
eas and deactivates the main
beam when passing through a town, for ex-
ample.
Switching the main beam assist on and off
Func-
tion
Use
Activate:
– Switch the ignition on and turn the light
switch to position
.
– From the base position, move the main
beam and turn signal lever forwards
››› page 131. When the warning lamp
is
displayed on the instrument panel display,
the main beam assist is switched on.
To switch
system
off:
– Switch off the ignition.
– OR: turn the light switch to a different po-
sition to
››› page 131.
– OR: with main beam on, move the main
beam and turn signal lever backwards.
– OR: move the main beam and turn the
signal lever forwards to manually switch
the main beam on. The main beam assist
will then be deactivated.
Malfunctions
The f
o
l
lowing conditions may prevent the
main beam headlight control from turning off
the headlights in time or from turning off al-
together:
●
In poorly lit towns with highly reflective
signs.
●
Other insufficiently lit road users (such as
pedestrians or cyclists).
●
On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps)
and when oncoming vehicles are partially ob-
scured.
●
When the drivers of other oncoming vehi-
cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard
rail in the centre of the road.
●
If the camera is damaged or the power sup-
ply is cut off.
●
In fog, snow and heavy rain.
●
With dust and sand turbulence.
●
With loose gravel in the field of vision of
the camera.
●
When the field of vision of the camera is
misted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow,
ice, etc.
WARNING
The convenience features of the main beam
ass
ist should not encourage the taking of
risks. The system is not a replacement for
driver concentration.
●
You are always in control of the main beam
and adapting it to the light, visibility and traf-
fic conditions.
●
It is possible that the main beam headlight
control does not recognise all driving situa-
tions and is limited under certain circumstan-
ces.
●
When the field of
vision of the camera is
dirty, covered or damaged, operation of the
main beam control may be affected. This also
applies when changes are made to the vehi-
cle lighting system, for example, if additional
headlights are installed.
CAUTION
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-
t
em, tak
e the following points into considera-
tion:
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera regu-
larly and make sure it is free of snow and ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-
era.
●
Check that the windscreen is not damaged
in the area of the field of vision of the camera.
Note
Main beam and headlight flasher can be
turned on and off m
anually at any time with
the turn signal and main beam lever
››› page 131.
133
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Fog lights
Fig. 138 Dash panel: light control.
The warning lamps or al
so sho
w
, on the
light switch or instrument panel, when the
fog lights are on.
●
Switching on front fog lights* : pull the
light switch to the first point ››› Fig. 138
1
,
fr
om po
s
itions , or .
●
Switching on the rear fog light : com-
pletely pull the light switch
2
from position
, or
.
●
T
o sw
itch off the fog lights, press the light
switch or turn it to position .
Note
The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind
you. Y
ou should use the rear fog light only
when visibility is very poor. For this reason,
when you exceed approximately 60 km/h (38
mph), a warning will appear on the instru-
ment panel: Turn off the fog light!.
Cornering lights*
1)
When turning slowly or on very tight bends,
the c
ornerin
g lights
are activated automati-
cally. The cornering lights may be integrated
in the fog lights and are switched on only at
speeds of less than 40 km/h (25 mph).
When reverse gear is engaged, the cornering
lights on both sides of the vehicle switch on,
in order to better illuminate the area for park-
ing.
Function “Coming home”
This function may be connected/disconnec-
t
ed thr
ough the r
adio menu. The “Coming
Home” and/or “Leaving Home” delay time
may also be set (default: 30 sec).
Vehicle with
halogen
headlights
In the “Coming Home” function, the day-
time running lights (DRL), the rear side
lights and the licence plate lights are
turned on.
Vehicle with
full-LED
headlights
In the “Coming Home” function, the dip-
ped beams and the daytime running
lights (DRL), the rear side lights and the
licence plate lights are switched on.
Automatic* activation of “Coming Home”
For v
ehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-
ry light switch in position ).
●
Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition with the r
otary light switch
in position
›››
page 24.
●
The automatic “Coming Home” function is
only active when the light sensor detects
darkness.
●
When the car door is opened, the “Coming
Home” lighting comes on.
Manual “Coming Home” activation
For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-
ry light switch without position ).
●
Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition.
●
Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-
mately 1 second.
1)
This function is not available on vehicles equipped
with fu
ll-LED headlights.
134
Lights and visibility
●
A
ctiv
at
ed for any position of the rotary light
switch.
●
When the car door is opened, the “Coming
Home” lighting comes on. The headlights are
turned off 60 seconds after the vehicle door
is opened.
Deactivation
●
If no door has been closed, they go out au-
tomatically after 60 seconds.
●
After the last door has been closed, the
headlights will be switched off after the
“Coming Home” delay (as established in the
radio menu) has elapsed.
●
On turning the light switch to position
›››
page 24.
●
When the ignition is switched on (when
starting the engine).
Function “Leaving Home”
The “Leaving Home” function is only availa-
b
l
e f
or vehicles with a light and rain sensor
(rotary light switch in position ).
This function may be connected/disconnec-
ted through the radio menu. The “Leaving
Home” function switch-off delay may also be
set (default: 30 sec).
Vehicle with
halogen
headlights
In the “Leaving Home” function, the day-
time running lights (DRL), the rear side
lights and the licence plate lights are
switched on.
Vehicle with
full-LED
headlights
In the “Leaving Home” function, the dip-
ped beams, the daytime running lights
(DRL), the rear side lights and the li-
cence plate lights are switched on.
Activation
●
When the vehicle is unlocked using the re-
mote contr
ol.
●
The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-
ted when the rot
ary light switch is in position
and the light sensor detects darkness.
Deactivation
●
When the “Leaving Home” delay period
ends (default: 30 sec).
●
When the vehicle is locked using the re-
mote control.
●
When the light control is switched into a
position other than .
●
With the ignition is switched on.
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 139 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-
in
g lights.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 25
The hazard warning lights are used to draw
the attention of other road users to your vehi-
cle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from
moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard
warning lights ›››
.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;
f
or an aut
om
atic gearbox, move the gear
lever to P.
»
135
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten-
tion of
other r
o
ad users to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when
you leave the vehicle.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when
the hazard warning lights are switched on.
The two turn signal turn signal lamps
and the turn signal lamp in the switch will
flash at the same time. The simultaneous
hazard warning lights also work when the ig-
nition is switched off.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-
ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50
mph), the brake light flashes several times
per second to warn the vehicles driving be-
hind. If you continue braking, the hazard
warning lights will come on automatically
when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They
switch off automatically when the vehicle
starts to move again.
WARNING
●
The risk of
an accident increases if your ve-
hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard
warning lights and a warning triangle to draw
the attention of other road users to your sta-
tionary vehicle.
●
Due to the high temperatures that the cata-
lytic converter can reach, never park in an
area where the catalytic converter could come
into contact with highly inflammable materi-
als, f
or example dry grass or spilt petrol. This
could start a fire.
Note
●
The b
atter
y will run down if the hazard
warning lights are left on for a long time,
even if the ignition is switched off.
●
The use of the hazard warning lights de-
scribed here is subject to the relevant statu-
tory requirements.
Parking lights
When the parking light is switched on, (right
or l
ef
t
turn signal), the front side light and
the rear light on the corresponding side of
the vehicle stay lit. The parking lights can on-
ly be activated with the ignition switched off
and the turn signal and main beam lever in
the central position, before being triggered.
Parking light on both sides
With the ignition switched off and the light
sw
it
c
h in position , when locking the vehi-
cle from the outside, the parking lights on
both sides of the vehicle light up. In doing
so, only the side lights of both headlights
light up, and additionally the tail lights will
do so partially.
Motorway light*
The motorway light is available on vehicles
equipped with f
ull-LED lights.
The function is connected/disconnected via
the corresponding Easy Connect system
menu.
●
Activation: when going above 110 km/h
(68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip-
ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-
er's visibility distance.
●
Deactivation: when reducin
g the speed of
the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dip-
ped beam returns to its normal position.
Driving abroad
The light beam of the dipped beam lights is
a
symmetric: the s
ide of
the road on which
you are driving is lit more intensely.
When a car that is manufactured in a country
that drives on the right travels to a country
that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-
mally necessary to cover part of the headlight
bulbs with stickers or to change the adjust-
ment of the headlights to avoid dazzling oth-
er drivers.
In such cases, the regulations specify certain
light values that must be complied with for
designated points of the light distribution.
This is known as “Tourist light”.
136
Lights and visibility
The light distribution that the halogen and
f
u
l
l-LED headlights of the SEAT Leon range
have allows the specific “tourist light” values
to be met without the need for stickers or
changes in the settings.
Note
“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If
you are p
lanning a long stay in a country that
drives on the other side, you should take the
vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to
change the headlights.
Headlight range control, lighting of
the in
s
trument
and control panel
Fig. 140 Next to the steering wheel: Head-
light
r
an
ge control
Lighting of the instrument panel, screens
and c
ontr
o
ls*
Depending on the model, lighting of the in-
strument panel and controls can be adjusted
in the Easy Connect system, using the button
and the function button
S
ETUP
›››
p
age 27.
He
a
dlight range control
The headlight range control is modified ac-
cording to the value of the headlight beam
and the vehicle load status. This offers the
driver optimum visibility and the headlights
do not dazzle oncoming drivers ›››
.
The he
a
dlights
can only be adjusted when
the dipped beam is switched on.
To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 140:
Value Vehicle load status
a)
–
Two front occupants, luggage compart-
ment empty
1
All seats occupied, luggage compartment
empty
2
All seats occupied, luggage compartment
full With trailer and minimum drawbar load
3
Driver only, luggage compartment full With
trailer and maximum drawbar load
a)
If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the
table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.
OR:
Using the radio menu (see Easy Connect
> Adjusting Lights > Headlamp
height adjustment ›››
page 27).
Setting 0
Two front occupants, luggage compart-
ment empty
Setting 1
All seats occupied, luggage compart-
ment empty
Setting 2
All seats occupied, luggage compart-
ment full. With trailer and minimum
drawbar load
Setting 3
Driver only, luggage compartment full.
With trailer and maximum drawbar load
Dynamic headlight range control
The c
ontr
o
l is not mounted in vehicles with
dynamic headlight range control. The head-
light range is automatically adjusted accord-
ing to the vehicle load status when they are
switched on.
Instrument panel lighting
With the ignition on and without light activa-
tion, the instrument panel lighting remains
activated in daytime light conditions. The
lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-
minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving
through a tunnel without the function
active, the instrument panel lighting may
even switch off. The objective of this function
»
137
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
is to provide the driver with a visual indica-
tion th
at
he or she shou
ld activate the
dipped beam.
WARNING
Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that
the headlight
s dazzle and distract other driv-
ers. This could result in a serious accident.
●
Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load
status so that it does not blind other drivers.
Interior and reading lights
1)
›››
table on page 2
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 26
Glove compartment and luggage compart-
ment lighting*
When opening and closing the glove com-
partment on the front passenger side and the
rear lid, the respective light will automatically
switch on and off.
Footwell lighting*
The lights in the footw
ell area below the dash
(driver and front passenger sides) will switch
on when the doors are opened and will de-
crease in intensity while driving. The intensity
of these lights can be adjusted using the ra-
dio menu (see Easy Connect > Light
Settings > Interior lighting
›››
page 27).
Note
The reading lights switch off when the vehi-
cle i
s locked using a key or after several mi-
nutes if the key is removed from the ignition.
This prevents the battery from discharging.
Visibility
S
u
n
visors
Fig. 141 Sun visor
Options for adjusting driver and front pas-
sen
g
er s
un visors:
●
Lower the sun visor towards the wind-
screen.
●
The sun visor can be pulled out of its
mounting and turned towards the door
››› Fig. 141
1
.
●
Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon-
git
udin
al
ly backwards.
1)
Depending on the level of equipment fitted in the
vehicl
e, LEDs can be used for the following interior
lights: front courtesy light, rear courtesy light, foot-
well light and sun visor light.
138
Lights and visibility
Vanity mirror light
Ther
e m
a
y be a vanity mirror, with a cover, on
the rear of the sun visor. When the cover is
opened
2
a light comes on.
The l
amp g
oe
s out when the vanity mirror
cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed
back up.
WARNING
Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.
●
Always store sun blinds and visors in their
housin
g when not in use.
Note
The light above the sun visor automatically
switc
hes off after a few minutes in certain
conditions. This prevents the battery from
discharging.
Sun blind*
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
Fig. 142 Rear window: sun blind.
Rear window sun blind*
–
Pull out the visor and hook it into the hooks
in the c
entr
e of
the top of the door frame
››› Fig. 142.
Windscreen wiper and window
wiper systems
Window wiper lever
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 26
CAUTION
If the ignition is switched off with the wind-
scr
een wipers active, they complete their
wipe before returning to the rest position.
Ice, sno
w and other obstacles on the wind-
screen may damage the wiper and the wind-
screen wiper motor.
●
If necessary, remove snow and ice from the
windscreen wipers before starting your jour-
ney.
●
Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wipers
from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icer
spray for this operation.
●
Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if
the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the
windscreen wipers while dry can cause dam-
age.
●
In icy conditions, always check that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may
help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip-
ers in service position ›››
page 63.
Note
●
The winds
creen and window wipers only
function when the ignition is switched on and
the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are
closed.
●
The interval wipe speed varies according to
the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle is
moving, the more often the windscreen is
cleaned.
●
The rear wiper is automatically switched on
when the windscreen wiper is on and the car
is in reverse gear.
139
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Windscreen wiper functions
Windscreen wiper performance in different sit-
uations
If the vehicle is at a
standstill
The activated position provision-
ally changes to the previous posi-
tion.
During automatic
wipe
The air conditioner comes on for
approximately 30 seconds in air
recirculation mode to prevent the
smell of the windscreen washer
fluid entering the inside the vehi-
cle.
For the interval wipe
Intervals between wipes depend
on the vehicle's speed. The high-
er the vehicle speed the shorter
the intervals.
Heated windscreen washer jets
The he
atin
g on
ly thaws the frozen jets, it
does not thaw the water in the washer hoses.
When the ignition is switched on the heated
windscreen washer jets automatically adjust
the heat depending on the ambient tempera-
ture.
Headlight wash/wipe system
The headlight washers/wipers clean the
headlight lenses.
After the ignition is switched on, the first and
every fifth time the windscreen washer is
switched on, the headlights are also washed.
Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever should
be pulled towards the steering wheel when
the dipped beam or main beam are on. Any
incrusted dirt (such as insects) should be
cleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling).
To ensure the headlight washers work cor-
rectly in winter, any snow which has got into
the bumper jet supports should be cleaned
away. If necessary, remove snow with an anti-
icing spray.
Note
The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles
that ar
e on the windscreen. The wiper will
stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path.
Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper
back on again.
Rain sensor*
Fig. 143 Windscreen wiper lever: adjusting
the r
ain sen
sor
A
Fig. 144 Rain sensor sensitive surface
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the
w
ind
s
creen wiper intervals, depending on
the amount of rain ›››
. The sensitivity of the
r
ain sen
sor c
an be adjusted manually. Man-
ual wipe ››› page 139.
Move the lever to the required position
››› Fig. 143:
Rain sensor off.
Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-
sary.
Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor
–
Set control to the right: highly sensi-
tive.
–
Set control to the left: less sensitive.
When the ignition is switched off and then
back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts
operating again when the windscreen wipers
are in position
1
and the vehicle is travel-
lin
g at
mor
e than 16 km/h (10 mph).
0
1
A
140
Lights and visibility
Rain sensor modified behaviour
P
o
s
sible causes of faults and mistaken read-
ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 144 of
the rain sensor include:
●
Damaged blades: a film of water on the
damaged blades may lengthen the activation
time, reduce the washing intervals or result
in a fast and continuous wipe.
●
Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger
the windscreen wiper.
●
Salt on roads: in winter, salt spread in the
roads may cause an extra long wipe when the
windscreen is almost dry.
●
Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus
effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may
reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or
make it react more slowly, later or not at all.
●
Cracked windscreen: the impact of a stone
will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain
sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the
reduction in the sensitive surface area and
adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sen-
sor will vary with the size of the damage
caused by the stone.
WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain
to swit
ch on the wipers.
●
If necessary, switch on the wipers manually
when water on the windscreen obstructs visi-
bility.
Note
●
Cle
an the sensitive surface of the rain sen-
sor regularly and check the blades for dam-
age ››› Fig. 144 (arrow).
●
To remove wax and coatings, we recom-
mend a window cleaner containing alcohol.
Mirror
Anti-dazzl
e rear vision mirrors
Your vehicle is fitted with an interior rear vi-
s
ion mirr
or w
ith a manual or automatic* con-
trol for anti-dazzle position.
Interior rear vision mirror with manual set-
ting for anti-dazzle position
–
Position the small lever of the lower edge
of the mirror to face towards the rear.
WARNING
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
rear
vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid
may leak. This could cause irritation to the
skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you
come into contact with this liquid, it must be
rinsed with large quantities of water. If neces-
sary, get medial help.
CAUTION
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
rear
vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid
may leak. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces.
Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possi-
ble.
Note
●
If the light inc
ident in the interior rear vi-
sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun
blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror with
automatic setting will not operate perfectly.
●
When the interior lights are on or reverse
gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken with
automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle posi-
tion.
141
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Adjusting the exterior rear view mir-
r
or
s
Fig. 145 Driver door: control for the exterior
mirr
or
.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 15
Synchronized regulation of the exterior mir-
rors
●
In the Settings - Convenience menu,
select whether or not the exterior mirrors
should move in synchronisation.
●
Turn the knob to position L
1)
.
●
Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The
right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the
same time (synchronised).
●
If necessary the right exterior mirror adjust-
ment may need correcting. turn the control to
position R
1)
.
●
In the Easy Connect system the exterior mir-
rors can be adjusted using the
button
and the f
u
nction b
utton
SETUP
.
Ti
lt
f
unction for front passenger exterior mir-
ror*
When parking backwards, and in order to be
able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir-
ror can be automatically tilted towards the
passenger to provide a better view of the
kerb. The control must be in the position R
1)
for this feature to be operational.
The mirror returns to its original position as
soon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h
(9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re-
turns to its original position if the position of
the control is adjusted.
Storing the rear view mirror settings for the
tilt function
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Access the Easy Connect system, Menu
CAR
, function “Rear view mirrors and wind-
s
c
r
een wipers” and select “lower while re-
versing”
›››
page 110.
●
Select the R
1)
position on the control.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror
so that you can see, for example, the kerb
area well.
●
Release the reverse gear.
●
The adjusted position for the rear view mir-
ror is stored.
Fold in the exterior mirrors after parking
(convenience function)*
The Easy Connect system, Menu
CAR
, func-
tion “R
e
ar
view mirrors and windscreen wip-
ers” can be used to have the exterior mirrors
fold in when the vehicle is parked
››› page 110.
When the vehicle is locked with the remote
control, by pressing for more than approxi-
mately 1 second the exterior mirrors are fol-
ded in automatically. When the vehicle is
opened with the remote control, the exterior
mirrors are deployed automatically.
WARNING
Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors give a
larg
er field of vision. However, they make ob-
jects look smaller and further away than they
really are. If you use these mirrors to esti-
mate the distance to vehicles behind you
1)
Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is symmet-
rical.
142
Seats and head restraints
when changing lane, you could misjudge the
dist
ance. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
●
If
one of the mirr
or housings is knocked out
of position (e.g. when parking), the mirrors
must first be fully retracted with the electric
control. Do not readjust the mirror housing by
hand, as this will interfere with the mirror ad-
juster function.
●
Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash, please make sure to retract the ex-
terior mirrors to prevent them from being
damaged. Electrically retractable exterior
mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand.
Always use the electrical power control.
Note
If the electrical adjustment should fail to op-
erate, both of
the mirrors can be adjusted by
hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mir-
ror glass.
Seats and head restraints
Adju
s
tin
g the seats and headr-
ests
Manual adjustment of seats
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 14
WARNING
The safe driving chapter contains important
information, tip
s, suggestions and warnings
that you should read and observe for your
own safety and the safety of your passengers
››› page 65.
WARNING
●
Adjust
the front seats only when the vehi-
cle is stationary. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion could result in an accident.
●
Be careful when adjusting the seat height.
Careless or uncontrolled adjustment can
cause injuries.
●
The front seat backrests must not be re-
clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and
the airbag system might not protect as they
should, with the subsequent danger of injury.
Electric driver's seat adjustment*
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 14
WARNING
●
If the electric
front seats are used negli-
gently or without paying due attention, it can
cause serious injury.
●
The front seats can also be electrically ad-
justed when the ignition is switched off. Nev-
er leave a child or any other person who may
need help in the vehicle.
●
In the event of an emergency, electrical ad-
justment can be stopped by pressing any
control.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the electrical components
of the front
seats, please refrain from kneel-
ing on the seat or applying sharp pressure at
a single point to the seat cushion and back-
rest.
Note
●
It ma
y not be possible to electrically adjust
the seat if the vehicle battery is very low.
●
If the engine is started while the seats are
being electrically adjusted, the adjustment
will stop.
143
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Adjusting the front head restraints
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 14
Adjust the head restraint ›››
page 14 so
that as far as possible the top of the head re-
straint is level with the top of your head.
When this is not possible, try to get as close
as possible to this position.
Adjusting the rear head restraints
Fig. 146 Rear centre head restraint: release
point
.
When transporting people in the back seat,
p
l
ac
e the head restraints of the occupied
seats at a minimum of the next socket up
›››
.
Adjusting the head restraints
–
To set the head restraint higher, grasp the
s
ide
s
with both hands and move it up-
wards, until you see it engage.
–
To set the head restraint lower down, press
the
1
›
›› Fig. 146
b
utton and move it
downwards.
Removing the head restraint
To remove the head restraint, the correspond-
ing backrest must be partially folded forward.
–
Unlock the backrest ››› page 147.
–
Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-
rives to the top.
–
Press button
1
›
›
› Fig. 146
, while simulta-
neously pressing on the security hole
2
››› Fig. 146 with a flat
screwdriver a maxi-
mum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head
restraint.
–
Move the backrest until it engages properly
›››
.
Fittin
g the he
a
d restraint
To mount the external head restraints, the
corresponding backrest must be partially fol-
ded forward.
–
Unlock the backrest ››› page 147.
–
Insert the head restraint bars into the
guides until they perceptibly engage. It
should not be possible to remove the head
restraint from the backrest.
–
Move the backrest until it engages properly
›››
.
WARNING
●
Plea
se observe the general notes
››› page 69.
●
Remove the rear head restraints only when
it is necessary for the placement of a child
seat ››› page 82. After removing a child seat,
remount the head restraint immediately.
Travelling with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
severe injuries.
Seat functions
Intr
oduction
WARNING
Inappropriate use of the seat functions can
cause sev
ere injuries.
●
Assume the proper sitting position before
your trip and remain in it throughout. This al-
so applies to the other occupants.
●
Always keep hands, fingers, feet and other
parts of the body away from the operating ra-
dius and the adjustment of seats.
144
Seats and head restraints
Seat heating
Fig. 147 In the centre console: front seats
he
atin
g sw
itch
The seat cushions can be heated electrically
when the ignition i
s
sw
itched on. The back-
rest is also heated in some versions.
The seat heating should not be engaged in
any of the following conditions:
●
The seat is unoccupied.
●
The seat has a covering.
●
There is a child seat installed in the seat.
●
The seat cushion is wet or damp.
●
The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-
er than 25°C (77°F).
Activate
Press the button or . Seat heating is
switched on fully.
Adjusting the heating output
Press the button or repeatedly until the
desired intensity level is reached.
Deactivating
Press the button or until all warning
lamps switch off.
WARNING
People who, because of medications, paraly-
sis
or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) cannot
perceive pain or temperature, or have a limi-
ted perception thereof, may suffer burns to
the back, buttocks or legs when using seat
heating, an occurrence that may entail a very
lengthy recovery period or from which it may
not be possible to recover fully. Seek medical
advice if you have doubts regarding your
health.
●
People with limited pain and temperature
thresholds must never use seat heating.
WARNING
If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can ad-
versely
affect the operation of the seat heat-
ing, increasing the risk of burns.
●
Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to
using the seat heater.
●
Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is
wet or damp.
●
Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp
on the seat.
●
Do not spi
ll liquid on the seat.
CAUTION
●
T
o avoid d
amaging the heating elements of
the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the
seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point
on the seat cushion or backrest.
●
Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma-
terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage
the seat heating.
●
In the event of smells, switch off the seat
heating immediately and have it inspected by
a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The seat heating should remain on only when
needed. Otherwi
se, it is an unnecessary fuel
waste.
Front centre armrest
The centre armrest can be adjusted to various
l
ev
el
s.
Adjusting the centre armrest
–
To adjust the tilt, lift the armrest from the
starting position so that it is engaged.
–
To return the armrest to the starting posi-
tion, remove the armrest from the upper
fixed position and lower it.
»
145
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
The armrest can be moved backwards and
f
or
w
ards.
Folding down the passenger seat
backrest*
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
Fig. 148 Front passenger seat: lever for fold-
in
g do
wn the b
ackrest.
The front passenger seat can be folded down
t
o inc
r
ease the storage space.
●
Pull lever
1
›
›
› Fig. 148
and push the seat
backrest
2
until the backrest is horizontal.
WARNING
When the front passenger seat is folded
down it c
annot be occupied.
folding down and raising the rear seat
b
ac
k
rest
3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC
Fig. 149 Clip to support the seat belt.
Fig. 150 Backrest release lever.
The backrests can be folded forward individu-
al
ly
or t
ogether.
Folding the backrest forwards
–
Place the side seat belts in the trim clip
››› Fig. 149.
–
Slide the head restraint(s) downwards
››› page 144.
–
Press the release lever ››› Fig. 150
1
in the
dir
ection of
the arr
ow.
–
Fold the backrest forwards.
Converting the table to a seat
–
Raise the backrest until it engages in its
upright position ›››
. The red marking on
the t
ab ›
›
› Fig. 150
2
should no longer be
v
i
s
ible when the backrest is properly se-
cured.
WARNING
The safe driving chapter contains important
information, tip
s, suggestions and warnings
that you should read and observe for your
own safety and the safety of your passengers
››› page 65.
WARNING
●
Make s
ure that the rear backrest is securely
locked in position so that the seat belt can
provide proper protection on the centre rear
seat.
●
The rear backrest must always be securely
latched so that objects stored in the luggage
146
Seats and head restraints
compartment will not fly forward through the
interior during s
udden braking.
CAUTION
●
W
ith the bac
krest inclined there is a danger
of damaging the rear head restraints when
adjusting the front seats backwards.
●
When folding the backrest forwards, make
sure to place the side seat belts in the trim
clip to prevent them from being damaged by
becoming trapped in the backrest lock.
Folding down and lifting the rear seat
b
ac
k
rest
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
Fig. 151 On the rear seat backrest: release
c
at
c
h
1
; red mark
2
.
Fig. 152 In the luggage compartment: levers
for remot
e release of the left part
1
and right
part
2
of the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is split and each part
be lo
w
er
ed separately to extend the luggage
compartment.
When the rear seat backrest is lowered no-
body else can travel in the corresponding
seats (not even a child).
Lowering the rear seat backrest with the un-
lock button
●
Lower the head restraint properly.
●
Push the unlock button ››› Fig. 151
1
for-
w
ar
d
s and at the same time lift the backrest.
●
The rear seat backrest is not engaged when
the red marking of the button
2
is visible.
L
o
w
ering the rear seat backrest with the re-
mote release lever
●
Lower the head restraint properly.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull the remote release lever of the left part
››› Fig. 152
1
or right part
2
of the backrest
in the dir
ection of
the arr
ow. The released
part of the rear seat backrest is folded auto-
matically down and forwards.
●
If this occurs, close the rear lid.
The rear seat backrest is not engaged when
the red marking of the button ››› Fig. 151
2
is visible.
F
o
l
ding up the rear seat backrest
●
Lift the backrest and press it firmly into the
lock until it engages ›››
.
●
It should not be possible to see the red
m
ark
of
the unlock button
2
.
●
The backrest must be properly engaged.
WARNING
Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seat
back
rest is lowered or lifted without due care
and attention.
●
Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest
while driving.
●
Do no trap or damage the seat belt when
raising the rear seat backrest.
●
When lowering or lifting the rear seat back-
rest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and other
body parts out of its path.
»
147
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
For the re
ar seat belts to offer the necessa-
ry protection all the parts of the rear backrest
must be properly engaged. This is particular-
ly important in the case of the centre rear
seat. If someone is seated in a seat whose
backrest is not properly engaged they will fly
forward, along with the backrest, during an
accident or a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvre.
●
A red signal on the button
2
warns that
the back
rest is not engaged. Always check
that the red marking is not visible when the
backrest is in the upright position.
●
When the rear seat backrest is lowered or is
not properly engaged nobody else can travel
in the corresponding seats (not even a child).
CAUTION
Serious damage can be caused to the vehicle
and other obj
ects if the rear seat backrest is
lowered or lifted without due care and atten-
tion.
●
Before lowering the rear seat backrest, al-
ways adjust the front seats so that neither
the head restraints nor the cushions of the
rear backrest can hit them.
Transport and practical
equipment
St
or
ag
e compartments
Storage areas under the front seats*
Fig. 153 Storage compartment under the
fr
ont
se
ats.
There is a storage compartment with a cover
u
nder e
ac
h front seat.
The drawer* is opened by pulling on the han-
dle of the cover ››› Fig. 153.
To close the drawer, press the cover until it
locks into position.
WARNING
●
The draw
ers will hold a maximum weight of
1.5 kg.
●
Do not drive w
ith the drawer cover open.
There is an injury risk for passengers if the
cargo is released in case of sudden braking or
an accident.
Folding table*
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
Fig. 154 Left-hand front seat: folding table.
–
To open the tray, open it up in the direction
of
the arr
o
w ››› Fig. 154.
WARNING
●
The fol
ding trays may not be folded down
whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is
seated on the second row of seats. There is a
risk of injury during a sudden braking ma-
noeuvre! The tray must therefore be closed
and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in
motion.
148
Transport and practical equipment
●
Do not put
hot drinks in the drink holders.
During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres,
sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink
could be spilled. Danger of scalding.
CAUTION
When driving, do not leave open cans in the
c
up hol
ders. The drink might be spilt on brak-
ing, for example, and could damage the vehi-
cle.
Drink holders
Fig. 155 Centre console: front drink holders.
Front drink holders
–
Place drinks in the holder ›
›
›
Fig. 155.
Placement of two drinks is possible. There
is also the possibility of placing larger plas-
tic bottles in the trims of the doors.
WARNING
●
Do not pl
ace any hot drinks in the drink
holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot drinks
could spill and cause burns, which may cause
an accident.
●
Do not use hard china cups or glasses.
These could cause injury in the event of an
accident.
CAUTION
You should avoid putting open drinks con-
tainers
in the drink holders. The drinks could
otherwise spill over and cause damage to e.g.
the electrical equipment or the seat covers.
Glove compartment
Fig. 156 Glove compartment
Opening/closing
–
To open the glove compartment, pull the
h
andl
e in the dir
ection of the arrow.
–
To close the glove compartment, move the
cover upwards until it engages.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD
player is located in the glove compartment.
Separate operating instructions are enclosed
for this equipment in the corresponding In-
struction Manual.
WARNING
The cover of the glove compartment should
alwa
ys be closed while driving. Failure to fol-
low this instruction could result in an acci-
dent.
Other storage compartments
You will find more object holders, compart-
ments
and s
up
ports in other parts of the ve-
hicle:
●
In the top of the glove compartment in ve-
hicles that do not have a CD reader. The load
of the compartment should not exceed
1.2 kg.
●
In the centre console under the centre arm-
rest*.
●
In the driver side panel there is a remova-
ble box for access to fuses and relays. The
»
149
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
load of the compartment should not exceed
0.2 k
g.
●
C
o
at hooks in the door frames ›››
.
●
Other storage compartments are found in
the r
e
ar se
at, to the left and the right of the
seats.
WARNING
●
Plea
se make sure that any items of clothing
hanging from the coat hooks do not obstruct
your view to the rear.
●
The coat hooks should only be used for
lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy
or sharp objects in the pockets.
●
Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the
clothing, as this could interfere with the func-
tion of the head-protection airbags.
Power sockets
Fig. 157 Centre console: front/rear 12-volt
po
w
er soc
ket.
Fig. 158 Detailed view of the side trim in the
lug
g
ag
e compartment: 12-volt power socket
(applies only to the LEON ST model).
In the centre console
–
Remove the connector located in the centre
c
on
so
le of the power socket ››› Fig. 157.
–
Insert the plug of the electrical appliance
into the power socket.
In the luggage compartment (applies only to
the LEON ST model)
–
Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 158.
–
Insert the plug of the electrical appliance
into the power socket.
Electrical equipment can be connected to the
12 volt power socket. The appliances connec-
ted to each power socket must not exceed a
power rating of 120 Watt.
WARNING
The power socket works only when the igni-
tion is on. Impr
oper use may cause serious
injury or even fire. Children should therefore
not be left in the vehicle unattended if the
button is also left behind. Otherwise there is
a possibility that they may be injured.
CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid
damagin
g the sockets.
Note
The use of electrical appliances with the en-
gine switc
hed off will cause a battery dis-
charge.
150
Transport and practical equipment
Storing objects
L
o
a
ding the luggage compartment
›››
table on page 2
All luggage and other loose objects must be
safely secured in the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth
could impair the driving safety or driving
characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
–
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage
compar
tment.
–
Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-
ble in the luggage compartment.
–
Place the heavy objects first.
–
Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening
rings
›››
page 157.
WARNING
●
Loose lug
gage and other objects in the lug-
gage compartment could cause serious inju-
ries.
●
Always stow objects in the luggage com-
partment and secure them on the fastening
rings.
●
Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob-
jects.
●
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,
loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring
vehicle occupants or passers-by. This in-
cre
ased risk of injury will be further increased
if a loose object is struck by an inflating air-
bag. If this happens, objects may shoot out-
ward like a missile. Risk of fatal injury.
●
Please note that the centre of gravity may
shift when transporting heavy objects; this
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust
your speed and driving style accordingly, to
avoid accidents.
●
Never exceed the allowed axle weights or
allowed maximum weight. If said weights are
exceeded, the driving characteristics of the
vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in-
juries and damage to the vehicle.
●
Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-
cially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment,
closing the door behind them; they will be
trapped and run the risk of death.
●
Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and
rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before
you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
no adults or children in the vehicle.
Note
●
Air circ
ulation in the vehicle helps reduce
fogging of the windows. Used air escapes
through ventilation slits in the side trim of
the luggage compartment. Ensure that the
ventilation slots are never covered.
●
Straps
for securing the load to the fasten-
ing rings are commercially available.
Luggage compartment cover
3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC
Fig. 159 In the luggage compartment: remov-
in
g and in
s
talling the rear shelf.
Fig. 160 In the luggage compartment: remov-
in
g and in
s
talling the rear shelf.
»
151
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
The luggage compartment cover blocks the
v
iew int
o the lug
gage compartment.
Removing
●
Unhook the loops ››› Fig. 159
B
from their
hook
s
A
.
●
Remove the shelf from the side supports
›
›
›
Fig. 160 pulling it up and out.
●
If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored
under the luggage compartment variable
floor ››› page 153
Fitting
●
Insert the rear shelf horizontally so that it
coincides with the “plate” on the axis of the
supports ››› Fig. 160 and press down until it
clicks into place.
●
Hook the loops ››› Fig. 159
B
onto the rear
lid ›
›
›
.
WARNING
●
The luggag
e compartment cover must al-
ways be fixed properly (risk of accident).
●
The luggage compartment cover should not
be used as a storage shelf. Articles placed on
this cover could cause injury to vehicle occu-
pants in an accident or if the brakes are ap-
plied suddenly.
Retractable rear shelf
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
Fig. 161 In the luggage compartment: retract-
in
g or p
u
lling out the rear shelf.
Fig. 162 In the luggage compartment: remov-
ing the re
ar shelf.
Opening the rear shelf
●
Pull evenly on the rear shelf using its han-
dl
e ›
›
› Fig. 161
1
in a b
ackwards direction
u
nti
l it audibly clicks into place.
Retracting the rear shelf
●
Press the handle of the rear shelf in the di-
rection of the arrow to release it ››› Fig. 161
.
The shelf will automatically move towards the
end and will retract completely.
Removing the rear shelf
●
Press the support of the rear shelf
››› Fig. 162
1
in the direction of the arrow.
●
Remove the rear shelf through the support
and up
w
ar
ds.
152
Transport and practical equipment
●
The r
e
ar shelf
can be stored under the lug-
gage compartment variable floor when the
latter is in the top position (except for vehi-
cles equipped with natural gas engine CNG)
››› page 154.
Fitting the rear shelf
●
Place the rear shelf in the housing provided
in the left side cover.
●
Engage the support of the rear shelf
››› Fig. 162
1
in the right housing.
●
Check that the support ›
›
›
Fig. 162
1
is
pr
operly
en
gaged.
WARNING
Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car-
ried on the rear shelf
can cause serious injury
in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or
in case of an accident.
●
Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy objects
or in bags on the rear shelf.
●
Never carry animals on the rear shelf.
CAUTION
To retract the rear shelf, press on its handle
in a downw
ards only direction; if you press it
upwards it may lead to its axles breaking.
Storing the rear shelf
3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC
Fig. 163 In the luggage compartment: covers
f
or s
t
oring the rear shelf.
Fig. 164 In the luggage compartment: fitting
the s
t
or
age compartment shelf.
The rear shelf can be stored under the lug-
g
ag
e c
ompartment variable floor.
●
Remove the left and right covers
››› Fig. 163.
●
Press the rear shelf until it engages in its
housing ››› Fig. 164.
●
Put the left and right covers in their original
position.
153
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Storing the rear shelf
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
Fig. 165 In the luggage compartment: hous-
in
g f
or s
toring the rear shelf.
Fig. 166 In the luggage compartment: hous-
in
g f
or s
toring the rear shelf.
The rear shelf can be stored under the lug-
g
ag
e c
ompartment variable floor.
●
Remove covers ››› Fig. 165
A
left and right.
●
Pr
e
s
s the head of the rear shelf in the direc-
tion of the arrow until it engages in its hous-
ing ››› Fig. 166.
●
Put the left and right covers in their original
position.
Use of the net partition behind the
front seat*
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
Fig. 167 In the luggage compartment: pulling
out
and sec
urin
g the net partition.
Fig. 168 In the luggage compartment: remov-
ing the net p
artition.
Pulling out and securing the net partition
●
Pull up handle ›
›
›
Fig. 167
2
to remove the
net
fr
om the c
asing
4
.
●
Hook in the net partition on the right side
3
(magnified image).
●
Hook in the net partition in the left side
hou
s
in
g
1
pulling the rod.
The net
p
ar
tition is properly assembled when
the T-shaped ends are firmly secured in the
corresponding housings
3
and
1
.
R
etr
actin
g the net partition
●
Unhook the rod from the housings
3
and
1
.
●
Roll up the net into the casing
4
lowering
it
w
ith
your hand.
154
Transport and practical equipment
Removing the net partition
●
Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
●
Press the left or right release catch
›
›
›
Fig. 168 in the direction of the arrow
1
.
●
Remove the casing from the support in the
dir
ection of
the arr
ow ››› Fig. 168
2
.
Fittin
g the net
p
artition
●
Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
●
Fit the casing in the right and left supports.
●
Press the casing into the left and right sup-
ports in the opposite direction to the arrow
››› Fig. 168
2
until it engages.
The r
ed m
ark
ings on the release buttons
should no longer be visible.
WARNING
●
Alwa
ys secure objects, even when the net
partition is properly assembled.
●
There should be nobody behind the assem-
bled partition when the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION
Incorrect handling of the net partition could
cause d
amage.
●
Do not “release” the net partition when
lowering it, as the net and other vehicle parts
could be damaged. Roll down the net parti-
tion by hand.
Use of the net partition with the rear
se
at
b
ackrests lowered
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
Fig. 169 Assembling the net partition in the
r
e
ar se
at backrests.
Fig. 170 In the luggage compartment: net
p
ar
tition hook
ed into the rear seat backrests.
Fitting the net partition
●
Fold the rear seat backrests forward.
●
R
emo
v
e the net partition from the side sup-
ports.
●
Place the net casing in the rail slots in the
direction of the arrows ››› Fig. 169
1
.
●
Push the casing towards the left side of the
v
ehic
l
e in the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 169
2
and as far as it will go.
●
Check that the net is secure.
P
u
l
ling out and securing the net partition
●
Pull up handle ››› Fig. 170
2
to remove the
net
fr
om the c
asing ››› Fig. 170
4
.
●
Hook in the net partition on the right side
›
›
›
Fig. 170
3
(magnified image).
●
Hook in the net partition in the left side
hou
s
in
g ››› Fig. 170
1
pulling the rod.
The net
p
ar
tition is properly assembled when
the T-shaped ends are firmly secured in the
corresponding housings ››› Fig. 170
3
and
1
.
R
etr
actin
g the net partition
●
Remove the rod from the housings in the
trims of the roof side members.
●
Roll up the net into the casing ››› Fig. 170
4
lowering it with your hand.
»
155
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Removing the net partition
●
Pull the net casing out approximately 5 cm
in the op
po
s
ite direction to the arrow
››› Fig. 169
2
.
●
Remove the casing from the rails by pulling
in the op
po
s
ite direction to the arrows
››› Fig. 169
1
.
●
Lift the rear seat backrests.
WARNING
During a sudden driving or braking manoeu-
vre, or in the event
of an accident, objects
could be flung though the interior and cause
serious or fatal injuries.
●
Always secure objects, even when the net
partition is properly assembled.
●
There should be nobody behind the assem-
bled partition when the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
The rear seat backrests should only be lifted
again once the net
partition has been disas-
sembled.
CAUTION
Incorrect handling of the net partition could
cause d
amage.
●
Do not “release” the net partition when
lowering it, as the net and other vehicle parts
could be damaged. Roll down the net parti-
tion by hand.
Tailboard for transporting long items*
Fig. 171 On the rear seat backrest: opening
the t
ai
l
board.
Fig. 172 In the luggage compartment: open-
in
g the t
ai
lboard.
On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,
ther
e i
s
a tailboard for transporting long
items in the interior, such as skis.
To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects
should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before
they are inserted through the tailboard.
When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-
el in the centre rear seat.
Opening the tailboard
●
Lower the centre armrest.
●
Pull the release lever in the direction of the
arrow and push the tailboard cover
››› Fig. 171
1
down and forwards.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Insert the long objects through the gap
fr
om the lug
g
age compartment.
●
Secure the objects with the seatbelt.
●
Close the rear lid.
Closing the tailboard
●
Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The
red mark on the luggage compartment side
should never be visible.
●
Close the rear lid.
●
Lift the centre armrest if necessary.
Note
The tailboard can also be opened from the
luggag
e compartment. To do so, press the re-
lease lever down, in the direction of the ar-
row, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 172.
156
Transport and practical equipment
Fastening rings*
Fig. 173 In the luggage compartment: fasten-
in
g rin
g
s (LEON/LEON SC model except ver-
sions with spare wheel and CNG).
Fig. 174 In the luggage compartment: fasten-
in
g rin
g
s (LEON ST model).
In the front and rear part of the luggage com-
p
ar
tment
there are fastening rings to secure
the luggage ››› Fig. 174.
In order to use the fastening rings, they must
be lifted beforehand
1)
.
WARNING
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining
strap
s are used, they could break in the event
of braking or an accident. Objects could then
be launched across the passenger compart-
ment and cause serious or fatal injuries.
●
Always use belts or retaining straps that
are suitable and in a good condition.
●
Belts and retaining straps should be se-
curely fastened to the fastening rings.
●
Objects in the luggage compartment that
are unsecured could move suddenly and mod-
ify the handling of the vehicle.
●
Secure all objects, little and large.
●
Never exceed the maximum tensile load of
the fastening ring when securing objects.
●
Never secure a child seat to the fastening
rings.
Note
●
The maximum t
ensile load that the fasten-
ing rings can support is 3.5 kN.
●
Belts
and securing systems for the appro-
priate load can be obtained from specialised
dealerships. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership for this.
●
The fastening rings are rendered unusable
for versions with spare wheel and CNG.
1)
Valid only for the LEON ST model.
157
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Retaining hooks
Fig. 175 In the luggage compartment: retain-
in
g hook
s
(LEON/LEON SC model).
Fig. 176 In the luggage compartment: retain-
in
g hook
s
(LEON ST model).
At the rear of the luggage compartment, on
the l
ef
t
and right, there are fixed retaining
hooks ››› Fig. 176.
The retaining hooks have been designed to
secure light shopping bags.
In the front and rear part of the luggage com-
partment there are fastening rings to secure
the luggage ››› Fig. 173 and ››› Fig. 174.
WARNING
Never use the retaining hooks as fastening
rings. In c
ase of sudden braking or an acci-
dent, the hooks could break.
CAUTION
Each hook is designed for a maximum load of
2.5 kg.
Net bag*
Fig. 177 In the luggage compartment: net
b
ag hook
ed up at
floor level (LEON ST model).
Fig. 178 In the luggage compartment: rings
1
and hooks
2
for securing the net bag
(LEON S
T model).
The luggage compartment prevents light lug-
g
ag
e fr
om moving. The net bag has a zip and
can be used to store small objects.
The net bag can be hooked up to the luggage
compartment in different ways.
Hooking the net bag into the luggage com-
partment floor
●
As applicable, lift the front fastening rings
››› Fig. 177
2
.
●
Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings
2
›
›
› . The bag zip should be facing up-
w
ar
d
s.
●
Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings
1
.
158
Transport and practical equipment
Hook the net bag next to the load threshold
●
Secure the short net hooks to the fastening
rin
g
s
››› Fig. 178
1
›
››
. The bag zip should
be f
ac
in
g upwards.
●
Secure the straps in the bag hooks
2
.
R
emo
v
ing the net bag
The hooked up net bag is taut ›››
.
●
Remove the hooks and the net bag straps
fr
om the f
a
stening rings and from the bag
hooks.
●
Store the net bag in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
To secure the elastic net bag on the fastening
rings
it must be stretched out. Once hooked
up it is taut. If the net bag is hooked up or un-
hooked incorrectly the hooks could cause in-
juries.
●
Always secure the net hooks properly so
that they do not suddenly release from the
fastening rings when hooking or unhooking
them.
●
On hooking or unhooking them, protect
your eyes and face in case the hooks are re-
leased suddenly.
●
Always hook up the net bag hooks in the
described order. If a hook is unexpectedly re-
leased the risk of injury is increased.
Luggage compartment variable floor
3 Applies to the model: LEON/LEON SC
Fig. 179 Luggage compartment: variable
floor
Fig. 180 Luggage compartment: variable
floor
Variable floor in the tilted position
When the
v
ari
able floor is tilted you can ac-
cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.
●
Lift the variable floor using handle
››› Fig. 179
1
, pull it back and push the
b
ac
k
rest of the rear seat until the movable
part of the floor is resting on it.
●
Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 180
(arrows).
159
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Luggage compartment variable floor
3 Applies to the model: LEON ST
Fig. 181 Luggage compartment variable
floor: po
s
ition
s.
Fig. 182 Luggage compartment variable
floor: gr
oo
v
es tilted.
Variable floor in the high position
●
Lift the floor using handle ›
›
›
Fig. 181
1
and pull it back until the front of the floor has
f
u
l
ly passed the supports
2
.
●
Mo
v
e the floor f
orward over the supports as
far as the rear seat backrest and then lower
the floor with the handle
1
.
V
ari
ab
le floor in the low position
●
Lift the floor using handle ››› Fig. 181
1
and pull it back until the front of the floor has
f
u
l
ly passed the supports
2
.
●
Now match the front part with the lower
gr
oo
v
es of the supports and slide the floor
forwards as far as the rear seat backrest and
lower the floor at the same time with the han-
dle
1
.
V
ari
ab
le floor in the tilted position
When the variable floor is tilted you can ac-
cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.
●
Lift the variable floor using handle
››› Fig. 181
1
and pull it back until the front
of
the floor h
a
s fully passed the tilted
grooves ››› Fig. 182
3
.
●
Run the floor through these grooves with
the help of
h
andl
e
1
as the rear seat back-
r
e
s
t and until the floor is resting in the
grooves.
WARNING
During a sudden driving or braking manoeu-
vre, or in the event
of an accident, objects
could be flung though the interior and cause
serious or fatal injuries.
●
Alwa
ys secure objects, even when the lug-
gage compartment floor is properly lifted.
●
Only objects that do not protrude more
than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-
ried between the rear seat and the raised lug-
gage compartment floor.
●
Only objects that do not weigh than ap-
proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between
the rear seat and the raised luggage compart-
ment floor.
CAUTION
●
The m
aximum w
eight that can be loaded on
the luggage compartment variable floor in
the top position is 150 kg.
●
Do not let the luggage compartment floor
fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it
downwards in a controlled manner. Other-
wise, the lining and the floor of the luggage
compartment could be damaged.
Note
SEAT recommends the use of straps to secure
obj
ects to retaining rings.
Roof carrier
Intr
oduction
The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-
mi
se aer
ody
namics. For this reason, cross
160
Transport and practical equipment
bars or conventional roof carrier systems can-
not
be sec
ur
ed to the roof water drains.
As the roof water drains are integrated in the
roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-
proved cross bars and roof carrier systems
can be used.
Cases in which cross bars and the roof carri-
er system should be disassembled.
●
When they are not used.
●
When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.
●
When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-
mum height, for example, in some garages.
WARNING
When heavy or bulky loads are transported
on the roof c
arrier system, car driving per-
formance is affected, as the centre of gravity
shifts and there is greater wind resistance.
●
Always secure the load properly using belts
or retaining straps that are suitable and in a
good condition.
●
Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg-
ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of
gravity and driving performance.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-
fic conditions.
CAUTION
●
Remov
e the cross bars and the roof carrier
system before entering a car wash.
●
Vehicle height is increased by the installa-
tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system and
the load secured on them. For this purpose,
check that your vehicle's height does not sur-
pass the headspace limit, for example, for un-
derpasses or for entering garage doors.
●
Cross bars, a roof carrier system and the
load secured on them should not interfere
with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the
panoramic sun roof ››› page 129 and the rear
lid.
●
On opening the rear lid make sure that it
does not knock into the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
When cross bars and a roof carrier system are
inst
alled, the increased air resistance means
that the vehicle uses more fuel.
Attach the cross bars of the roof carri-
er sy
s
t
em
Fig. 183 Leon/Leon SC: attachment points for
the r
oof
r
ailings for the roof carrier system.
»
161
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Fig. 184 Leon ST: attachment points for the
roof r
ailings for the roof carrier system.
The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe-
c
i
al
roof carrier systems. For safety reasons,
special fixtures must be used to safely trans-
port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or
boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can
be acquired at SEAT dealerships.
Always secure the crossbars and the roof car-
rier system properly. Always take the assem-
bly instructions that come with the crossbars
and the roof carrier system in question into
account.
LEON model
The front and rear attachment points
1
and
2
are only visible when the doors are open
›
›
›
Fig. 183 A.
Leon SC model
The front and rear attachment points
1
are
on
ly
visible when the doors are open. The
rear attachment points
3
are marked on the
t
op edg
e of
the glass with arrow heads
››› Fig. 183 B.
LEON ST model
The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-
ings. The attachment points can be seen on
bottom of the roof railing ››› Fig. 184.
WARNING
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-
bars
and the roof carrier system may cause
the whole system to detach from the roof and
cause an accident and injuries.
●
Always take the manufacturer assembly in-
structions into account.
●
Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys-
tem when they are in perfect condition and
are properly secured.
●
Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier
system properly.
●
Check threaded joints and attachments
travelling and if necessary tighten them after
you have travelled a short distance. When
making long trips, check the threaded joints
whenever you stop for a rest.
●
Always fit the special roof carrier systems
correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc.
●
Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
roof carrier system.
Note
Always read the assembly instructions that
come with the c
rossbars and the roof carrier
system carefully and keep them in the vehi-
cle.
Loading the roof carrier system
The load can only be secured if the crossbars
and the roof c
arrier system are properly in-
stalled ›››
.
Maximum authori
sed roof load
The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.
This figure comes from the combined weight
of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load
itself on the roof
›››
.
A
lw
a
ys check the weight of the roof carrier
system, the cross bars and the weight of the
load to be transported and weigh them if
necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-
thorised roof load.
If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier
with a lower weight rating, you will not be
able to carry the maximum authorised roof
load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-
mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is
listed in the fitting instructions.
162
Air conditioning
Distributing a load
Di
s
trib
ute loads uniformly and secure them
correctly ›››
.
Chec
k
att
achments
Once the cross bars and roof carrier system
have been installed, check the bolted con-
nections and attachments after a short jour-
ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-
cy.
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load
can re
sult in accidents and considerable vehi-
cle damage.
●
Never exceed the maximum authorised
load on the roof and on the axles or the vehi-
cle's maximum authorised weight.
●
Never exceed the load capacity of the cross
bars and the roof carrier system, even if the
maximum authorised roof load has not been
reached.
●
Secure heavy items as far forward as possi-
ble and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.
WARNING
If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall
from the roof
carrier system or cause acci-
dents and injuries.
●
Always use belts or retaining straps that
are suitable and in a good condition.
●
Secure the load properly.
Air conditioning
He
atin
g,
ventilation and cool-
ing
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 45
Viewing Climatronic information
On the screen of Climatronic control unit and
on the screen of the factory-fitted Easy Con-
nect system, the theoretical values of the
temperature zones are shown.
The unit of temperature measurement can be
changed in the Easy Connect system.
Dust and pollen filter
The dust and pollen filter with its activated
charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against
impurities in the air taken into the vehicle in-
terior.
The dust and pollen filter must be changed
regularly so that air conditioner performance
is not adversely affected.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due
to use in areas with very high levels of air
pollution, the filter must be changed more
frequently than stated in the Service Sched-
ule.
WARNING
Reduced visibility through the windows in-
cre
ases the risk of serious accidents.
●
Always ensure that all windows are free of
ice and snow, and that they are not fogged,
so as to maintain good visibility of everything
outside.
●
The maximum heat output required to de-
frost windows as quickly as possible is only
available when the engine has reached its
normal running temperature. Only drive when
you have good visibility.
●
Always ensure that you use the heating
system, fresh air system, air conditioner and
the heated rear window to maintain good visi-
bility to the outside.
●
Never leave the air recirculation on for a
long period of time. If the cooling system is
switched off and air recirculation mode
switched on, the windows can mist over very
quickly, considerably limiting visibility.
●
Switch air recirculation mode off when it is
not required.
WARNING
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re-
duce driver c
oncentration possibly resulting
in a serious accident.
●
Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or
use the air recirculation for long periods of
time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be
refreshed.
»
163
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
CAUTION
●
Switc
h the air conditioner off if you think it
may be broken. This will avoid additional
damage. Have the air conditioner checked by
a specialised workshop.
●
Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-
cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT rec-
ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.
Note
●
When the coolin
g system is turned off, air
coming from the outside will not be dried. To
prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recom-
mends leaving the cooling system (compres-
sor) turned on. To do this, press the button
. The button lamp should light up.
●
The maximum heat output required to de-
fros
t windows as quickly as possible is only
available when the engine has reached its
normal running temperature.
●
Keep the air intake slots in front of the
windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en-
sure heating and cooling are not impaired,
and to prevent the windows from misting
over.
Adjust using the Easy Connect sys-
t
em*
3 Applies to vehicles with a Media System
Touc
h/Colour.
In the Easy Connect system it is also possible
to perform various adjustments to the Clima-
tronic.
Open the air conditioner menu
●
Press the
button of the Climatronic
contro
ls.
●
OR: press the
MENU
button in Easy Con-
nect
.
W
ith the rotating switch select the air
conditioner menu and open it.
On the touch screen you can see and change
the current settings, for example, the temper-
ature set for the driver and passenger sides,
the air distribution and the fan speed. With
button
the driver and passenger side
t
emper
at
ures are synchronised
›››
Book-
let Media System Touch/Colour, chapter Air
conditioning.
To switch a function on or off, or to select a
submenu, you must press the corresponding
function button.
For more information about functions
›››
page 110.
Func-
tion
button
Function
OFF Switch off and switch on the Climatronic.
SETUP
The air conditioning settings submenu is
opened. It is possible to make the following
adjustments:
Function button
Air conditioning profile
: to ad-
just the level of the fan in AUTO mode. You
can choose between low, medium and
high.
Function button
Automatic air recirculation
to
switch on and off automatic air recircula-
tion ››› page 166.
BACK
function button to close the sub-
menu.
Adjust using the Easy Connect sys-
t
em*
3 Applies to vehicles with a Media System Plus/Navi
S
ystem.
In the Easy Connect system it is also possible
to perform various adjustments to the Clima-
tronic.
Open the air conditioner menu
●
Press the
button of the Climatronic
c
ontr
o
ls.
On the top of the screen you can see and
change the current settings, such as, for ex-
ample, the temperature set for the driver side
164
Air conditioning
and for that of passenger. Temperatures up
t
o +22 °C
(+72 °F) ar
e shown with blue ar-
rows, and temperatures over +22 °C (+72 °F)
with red arrows.
To switch a function on or off, or to select a
submenu, you must press the corresponding
function button.
Function
button
Function
Air condi-
tioning pro-
file
Adjust the fan level in AUTO mode. You
can choose between low, medium and
high.
OFF Climatronic is switched off.
ON Climatronic is switched on.
SETUP
The air conditioning settings submenu
is opened. It is possible to make the fol-
lowing adjustments:
Function button
Air conditioning profile
: to
adjust the level of the fan in AUTO
mode. You can choose between low, me-
dium and high.
Function button
Automatic air recirculation
to switch on and off automatic air recir-
culation ››› page 166.
BACK
function button to close the
submenu.
Function
button
Function
Automatic
supplemen-
tary heating
Activate/deactivate the automatic acti-
vation of the supplementary heating for
colder countries (only for engines with
supplementary heating). With the option
deactivated, depending on the outside
temperature the heating may need more
time than normal to reach a comfortable
temperature.
Air conditioning user instructions
The interior cooling system only works when
the en
gine i
s
running and fan is switched on.
The air conditioner operates most effectively
with the windows and the panoramic sliding
sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has
heated up after standing in the sun for some
time, the air inside can be cooled more quick-
ly by opening the windows and the panoram-
ic sliding sunroof briefly.
Climatronic: change the temperature unit on
the screen of the radio or on the factory-fit-
ted navigation system
Changing the temperature display from Cel-
sius to Fahrenheit on radio or on the factory-
fitted navigation system is done using the
menu on the instrument panel
›››
page 30.
The cooling system cannot be activated
If the air conditioning system cannot be
switched on, this may be caused by the fol-
lowing:
●
The engine is not running.
●
The fan is switched off.
●
The air conditioner fuse has blown.
●
The outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +3°C (+38°F).
●
The air conditioner compressor has been
temporarily switched off because the engine
coolant temperature is too high.
●
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
conditioner checked by a specialised work-
shop.
Special Characteristics
If the humidity and temperature outside the
vehicle are high, condensation can drip off
the evaporator in the cooling system and
form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is
normal and does not indicate a leak!
Note
After starting the engine, any residual humid-
ity in the air conditioner c
ould mist over the
windscreen. Switch on the defrost function as
soon as possible to clear the windscreen of
condensation.
165
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Air outlets
Fig. 185 On the dash panel: air vents
Air vents
T
o en
s
ure proper heating, cooling and venti-
lation in the vehicle interior, air vents
››› Fig. 185
1
should remain open.
●
Turn the corresponding thumbwheel (de-
t
ai
l) in the r
equired direction to open and
close the air vents. When the thumbwheel is
in the position, the corresponding air vent
is closed.
●
Change the air direction using the ventila-
tion grille lever.
There are other additional, non-adjustable air
vents in the dash panel
2
, in the footwell
and in the r
e
ar ar
ea of the interior.
Note
Food, medicine and other heat or cold sensi-
tive ob
jects should never be placed in front of
the air outlets as they may be damaged or
made unsuitable for use by the air coming
from the air vents.
Air recirculation mode
Basic points
Air recirculation:
Manual recirculation
Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient
air fr
om ent
erin
g the interior.
When the outside temperature is very high,
selecting manual air recirculation mode for a
short period refreshes the vehicle interior
more quickly.
For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is
switched off when the button is press-
ed or the air distributor turned to .
Switching the manual air recirculation mode
on and off
To switch system on: press the button un-
til the warning lamp lights up.
To switch system off: press the button un-
til the warning lamp goes off.
166
Driving
Functioning mode of automatic air recircula-
tion (air c
onditionin
g menu)
W
ith the automatic air recirculation mode ac-
tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin
interior is enabled. If the system detects a
high concentration of hazardous substances
in the ambient air, air recirculation mode is
switched on automatically. When the level of
impurities drops to within a normal range, re-
circulation mode is switched off.
The system is unable to detect unpleasant
smells.
The air recirculation will not connect auto-
matically in versions without humidity sensor
and in the following external conditions:
●
The outside temperature is lower than +3°C
(+38°F).
●
The cooling system is switched off and the
outside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).
●
The cooling system is switched off, the out-
side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) and
the windscreen wipers are switched on.
Activation/deactivation of automatic air recir-
culation is done in the air conditioner menu,
under Configuration.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Intro-
duction on page 163
.
●
If the coo
ling system is switched off and air
recirculation mode switched on, the windows
can mist over very quickly, considerably limit-
ing visibility.
●
Switch air recirculation mode off when it is
not required.
CAUTION
Do not smoke when air recirculation is
sw
itc
hed on in vehicles with an air condition-
er. The smoke taken in could lie on the cool-
ing system vaporiser and on the activated
charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen fil-
ter, leading to a permanently unpleasant
smell.
Note
Climatronic: air recirculation mode is activa-
ted to pr
event exhaust gas or unpleasant
odours from entering the vehicle interior
when it is in reverse and while the automatic
windscreen wiper is working.
Driving
Ignition loc
k
Sw
it
ching the ignition on and starting
the engine with the key
Fig. 186 Ignition key positions.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 24
Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer
than usual to start on cold days. Therefore
the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or the
brake pedal (automatic gearbox) must re-
main pressed until the engine starts up. Dur-
ing preheating, the warning lamp remains
lit.
The preheating time depends on the coolant
and exterior temperatures. With the engine at
operating temperature, or at outside temper-
atures above +8°C, the warning lamp will
»
167
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
light up for about one second. This means
th
at
the en
gine starts immediately.
If the engine does not immediately start up,
interrupt the starting process and try again
after 30 seconds. To start the engine again,
return the key to position
1
.
St
ar
t
-Stop System*
If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop
system* switches off the engine, the ignition
remains switched on.
Automatic gearbox: before leaving the vehi-
cle, make sure that the ignition is switched
off and the selector lever is in position P.
Driver messages on the instrument panel
display
Press the clutch
This message appears on vehicles with a
manual gearbox if the driver tries to start the
engine without having the clutch pedal
pressed. The engine will only start if you
press the clutch pedal.
Press the brake
This message appears on vehicles with an
automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start
the engine without having the brake pedal
pressed.
Select N or P
This message appears if you try to start or
stop the engine when the selector lever of
the automatic gearbox is not in position P or
N. The engine can only start or stop in certain
positions.
Engage position P; the vehicle
can move; doors can only close in
position P.
For safety reasons, this driver message ap-
pears and an audible warning sounds if the
selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not
in position P after you switch off the ignition.
Put the selector lever in position P, otherwise
the vehicle could roll away.
Gear change: selector lever in
the drive position!
This driver message is displayed when the
selector lever is not in the position P when
the driver door is opened. Additionally, a
buzzer will sound. Put the selector lever in
position P, otherwise the vehicle could roll
away.
Ignition is switched on
This driver message is displayed and a buz-
zer is sounded when the driver door is
opened with the ignition switched on.
WARNING
●
Never run the en
gine in confined spaces, as
the exhaust gases are poisonous.
CAUTION
Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and
extreme lo
ad conditions until the engine has
reached its normal operating temperature,
otherwise this can damage the engine.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine by idling it. You
should driv
e off as soon as you start the en-
gine. This will help avoid unnecessary ex-
haust emissions.
Note
●
If it i
s difficult to turn the ignition key to
the position
1
, turn the steering wheel to
both sides
to release the steering lock.
●
When starting from cold, the engine may be
a little noisy for the first few seconds until oil
pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve
lifters. This is quite normal, and no cause for
concern.
●
If the vehicle battery is disconnected and
reconnected, the key must remain in the posi-
tion
1
for around 5 seconds before starting
up.
168
Driving
●
Vehicl
es with automatic gearbox: after
switching off the ignition, you can only re-
move the ignition key if the selector lever is
in position “P” (parking lock). Next, the se-
lector lever is locked.
Switching off the engine with the key
Switching off the engine
–
Stop the vehicle.
–
Turn the ignition key to position
1
››› Fig. 186.
Engagin
g the steering wheel lock
In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni-
tion key can only be removed when the selec-
tor lever is in position P.
–
Remove the key from the ignition in posi-
tion
1
›
›
› Fig. 186
›››
.
–
Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en-
g
ag
e.
P
ossible vehicle theft is prevented with the
steering lock engaged.
WARNING
●
Never swit
ch the engine off until the vehi-
cle is stationary. The brake servo and power
steering functions will not be completely cov-
ered under warranty. More force may also be
needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake.
As you cannot steer and brake in the normal
manner, ther
e is a greater risk of accidents
and serious injury.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-
ing could suddenly lock, making it impossible
to steer the vehicle: risk of accident!
●
Always take the key with you when you
leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-
tant if there are children in the vehicle, as
they might otherwise be able to start the en-
gine or use power-operated equipment (e.g.
the electric windows), which could cause in-
juries.
CAUTION
If the engine has been running under high
load f
or a long time, there is a risk of heat
building up in the engine compartment after
it has been switched off; this could cause en-
gine damage. For this reason, you should idle
the engine for approximately 2 minutes be-
fore you switch it off.
Note
●
After the en
gine is switched off the radiator
fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if
the ignition is switched off. It is also possible
that the fan turns itself on once more if the
coolant temperature increases due to the
heat accumulated in the engine compartment
or due to its prolonged exposure to solar ra-
diation.
●
If the v
ehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop
system* switches off the engine, the ignition
remains switched on. Make sure that the igni-
tion is switched off before leaving the vehi-
cle, otherwise the battery could discharge.
Starter button*
Fig. 187 In the lower part of the centre con-
so
l
e: s
tarter button.
The vehicle engine can be started with a
s
t
ar
ter button (Press & Drive). To do so, there
must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the
area of the front or rear seats.
Opening the driver's door when exiting the
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the
steering column if the ignition is disabled.
Switching the ignition on/off manually
Briefly push the starter button without touch-
ing the brake or clutch pedal ›››
.
»
169
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
For vehicles with both manual and automatic
tr
an
smi
ssion, the starter button text
START ENGINE STOP
flashes like a heartbeat
when the sy
s
t
em is preset for switching the
ignition on and off.
Automatic ignition switch-off
If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve-
hicle key with them but leaving the ignition
on, the ignition is switched off automatically
after a certain time. If at that time the dipped
beam is on, the parking lights will stay on for
approx. 30 minutes. The side light can be
turned off by blocking the vehicle
››› page 116 or manually ››› page 131.
Emergency starting function
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,
an emergency start-up will be required. The
relevant message will appear in the dash
panel display. This may happen when, for ex-
ample, the battery of the vehicle key button
is very low or flat:
●
Immediately after pushing the starter but-
ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right
trim of the steering column.
●
The ignition connects and the engine starts
automatically.
Emergency disconnection
If the engine does not switch off after briefly
pressing the starter button, an emergency
disconnect will be required:
●
Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-
onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-
ond ›››
.
●
The engine turns off automatically.
En
gine r
e
start feature
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle
after the engine stops, you will only have 5
seconds to restart it. A warning will display
on the dash panel screen.
After this interval, it will not be possible to
start the engine without a valid key inside
the vehicle.
Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve-
hicles with the Start-Stop system
The ignition is switched off automatically
when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-
matic engine shutdown is active, if:
●
The driver's seat belt is not fastened,
●
the driver does not step on any pedal,
●
the driver door is opened.
After automatically turning off the ignition, if
the dipped beam is on, the side light re-
mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat-
tery is sufficiently charged). If the driver locks
the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the
side light goes out.
WARNING
Any accidental movement of the vehicle could
res
ult in serious injury.
●
When switching on the ignition, do not
press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise
the engine could start immediately.
WARNING
If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-
out due car
e, this may cause accidents and
serious injury.
●
Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor-
ised person could lock the vehicle, start the
engine or connect the ignition and, in this
way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. the
windows).
Note
●
Befor
e leaving the vehicle, always discon-
nect the ignition manually and, if appropri-
ate, take into account the instructions on the
screen of the dash panel.
●
If the vehicle is stationary for a long time
with the ignition on, the vehicle battery
might be discharged and it might not be pos-
sible to start the engine.
●
In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in
the engine starting if it requires preheating.
170
Driving
●
If during the
STOP phase you press the
START ENGINE STOP
button, the ignition is
switc
hed off and the button flashes.
●
If the indication “Start-Stop system deacti-
vated: Start the engine manually” is dis-
played on the dash panel display, the
START ENGINE STOP
button will blink.
Starting the engine
3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button.
Step
Starting the engine with the starter but-
ton ››› page 169.
1.
Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 is
performed.
1a.
In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press and
hold the clutch down until the engine starts.
2.
Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selector
lever in position P or N.
3.
Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 187 with-
out pressing the accelerator. For the engine to
start there must be a valid key in the vehicle.
After starting the engine, the light of the
START ENGINE STOP
button changes to a fixed
light indicating that the engine has started.
4.
If the engine does not start, stop and wait for
approx. 1 minute before trying again. If neces-
sary, perform an emergency start ››› page 170.
5.
Disconnect the electronic parking brake when
you are about to start driving ››› page 172.
WARNING
Never leave the vehicle with the engine run-
ning, es
pecially if a gear or gear range is en-
gaged. The vehicle could then suddenly move
or something strange could happen that
would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
WARNING
Cold start sprays could explode or cause a
sudden inc
rease in the engine speed.
●
Never use sprays to cold start the engine.
CAUTION
●
The star
ter motor or the engine may be
damaged if you try to start the engine while
driving or if you restart it immediately after
switching it off.
●
If the engine is cold, avoid high engine
speeds, pushing the engine too hard and rap-
id acceleration.
●
Do not start the engine by pushing the ve-
hicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could enter
the catalytic converter and damage it.
Note
●
Do not wait
until the engine warms up with
the vehicle stationary; if you have good visi-
bility through the windows, start driving im-
mediately. This helps the engine reach oper-
ating temperature faster and reduces emis-
sions.
●
Electrica
l components with a high power
consumption are switched off temporarily
when the engine starts.
●
When starting with a cold engine, noise
levels may briefly increase. This is quite nor-
mal, and no cause for concern.
●
When the outside temperature is below
+5°C (+41°F), if the engine is diesel, some
smoke may appear under the vehicle when
the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.
Stopping the engine
3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button.
Step
Switch off the engine with the starter
button ››› page 169.
1. Stop the vehicle completely ››› .
2.
Press and hold the brake pedal until the step
4 is performed.
3.
If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place
the selector lever in position P.
4.
Connect the electronic parking brake
››› page 172.
5.
Briefly press the start-up button ››› Fig. 187.
The
START ENGINE STOP
button blinks again. If
the engine fails to switch off, perform an emer-
gency disconnect ››› page 170.
6.
If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gear-
box, put it into 1st or reverse.
»
171
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while the vehicle
is mo
ving. This could cause loss of control of
the vehicle, accidents and serious injury.
●
The airbags and belt tensioners do not
work when the ignition is switched off.
●
The brake servo does not work with the en-
gine off. Therefore, you need to press the
break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.
●
Power steering does not work when the en-
gine is not running. You need more strength
to steer when the engine is switched off.
●
If the ignition is switched off, the steering
column could be locked, making it impossible
to control the vehicle.
CAUTION
If the engine is made to work hard for a long
time, it ma
y overheat after being switched
off. To prevent damage to the engine before
switching it off, leave it idle for approx. 2 mi-
nutes in neutral.
Note
After switching off the engine, the cooling fan
may
continue to operate in the engine com-
partment for a few more minutes, even with
the ignition off. The radiator fan is automati-
cally switched off.
“My Beat” Function
For vehicles with a convenience key there is
the “My B
eat” function. This feature provides
an additional indication of the vehicle igni-
tion system.
When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening
the doors with the remote control, the
START ENGINE STOP
button flashes, drawing at-
tention to the r
elevant starter system button.
Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light
of the
START ENGINE STOP
button flashes. With
the en
gine sw
it
ched off, after a few seconds,
the
STOP ENGINE START
button stops flashing
and g
oe
s
out.
With the engine running, the
START ENGINE STOP
button light stays on, indi-
c
atin
g th
at the engine is running. Upon
switching the ignition off with the
START ENGINE STOP
button, it starts flashing
ag
ain.
In
v
ehicles with the Start-Stop system, the
“My Beat” function also offers additional in-
formation:
●
When the engine stops during the Stop
phase, the light of the
START ENGINE STOP
but-
t
on s
t
ays on, since, even though the engine
is off, the Start-Stop system is active.
●
When the engine cannot be stated again
with the Start-Stop system,
›››
page 191, and
needs to be started manually, the
START ENGINE STOP
button flashes to indicate
thi
s
f
act.
Braking and parking
Electronic parking brake*
Fig. 188 In the lower part of the centre con-
so
l
e: el
ectronic parking brake button.
The electronic parking brake replaces the
h
andbr
ak
e.
Activating the electronic parking brake
The electronic parking brake can be activated
whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, even
when the ignition is switched off. Activate it
whenever you leave or park the vehicle.
●
Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 188 button.
●
The parking brake is activated when the
control light of the ››› Fig. 188 button (arrow)
172
Driving
and the r
ed control light of the display in
the d
a
sh panel are on.
●
Release the button.
Releasing the electronic parking brake
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the button ››› Fig. 188. At the same
time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the
engine is running, press the accelerator ped-
al slightly.
●
The control light of the ››› Fig. 188 button
(arrow) and the red control light of the dis-
play in the dash panel go out.
Automatic release of the electronic parking
brake on starting the engine
The electronic parking brake is automatically
switched off when starting if, after the driv-
er's door is closed and the driver's seat belt
fastened, any of the following situations take
place:
●
On vehicles with an automatic gearbox: A
gear range is engaged or the vehicle is
switched to another one and the accelerator
pedal is lightly pressed.
●
In vehicles with a manual gearbox: The
clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting
off and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-
ed.
●
To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are
exceptions that allow the automatic parking
brake to be released without the driver's seat
belt being fastened.
The parking brake can be prevented from be-
ing automatically released by continuously
pulling up the ››› Fig. 188 switch when
starting off.
The electronic parking brake is not discon-
nected until the button is released. This
can facilitate starting off when a heavy load
is towed ››› page 234.
Automatic activation of the electronic park-
ing brake when exiting the vehicle incorrect-
ly
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
electronic parking brake is activated auto-
matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly
if:
●
The selector lever is in the D/S or R posi-
tion or in the Tiptronic selection track.
●
AND: the vehicle is stationary.
●
AND: the driver door is open.
Emergency braking function
Only use the emergency brake function if you
are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot
brake ›››
.
●
Pull and hold the ›
›
›
Fig. 188 button in
this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At
the same time, an acoustic warning can be
heard.
●
To stop the braking process, release the
button or press the accelerator.
WARNING
The improper use of the electronic parking
brake c
an cause accidents and serious injury.
●
Never use the electronic parking brake to
stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.
The braking distance can be much longer. Al-
ways use the foot brake.
●
Never accelerate from the engine when a
gear range or a gear is engaged and the en-
gine is running. The vehicle could move, even
if the electronic parking brake is activated.
CAUTION
To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally
movin
g when parking it, first apply the elec-
tronic parking brake and then remove your
foot from the brake pedal.
Note
●
In vehic
les with a manual gearbox, releas-
ing the clutch and accelerating at the same
time automatically disconnects the electronic
parking brake.
●
If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be
possible to disconnect the electronic parking
brake. Use the jump-start ›››
page 61.
»
173
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
When the electronic
parking brake is ap-
plied or released, noises may be heard.
●
The system performs automatic and audi-
ble tests sporadically in the parked vehicle if
some time elapses without the electronic
parking brake being used.
Using the handbrake
Fig. 189 Handbrake between the front seats.
The handbrake should be applied firmly to
pr
ev
ent
the vehicle from accidentally rolling
away.
Always apply the handbrake when you leave
your vehicle and when you park.
Applying the handbrake
–
Pull the handbrake lever up firmly
››› Fig. 189.
Releasing the handbrake
–
Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-
lease knob in the direction of the arrow
››› Fig. 189 and guide the handbrake lever
down fully ›››
.
A
lw
a
ys pull the handbrake all the way up, so
there is less risk of driving off with it still en-
gaged ›››
.
The h
andbr
ak
e warning lamp lights up
when the handbrake is applied and the igni-
tion switched on. The warning lamp turns off
when the handbrake is released.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) with
the handbrake on, the following message*
will appear on the instrument panel: HAND-
BRAKE ON. You will also hear an audible
warning.
WARNING
●
Never use the h
andbrake to stop the vehi-
cle when it is in motion. The braking distance
is considerably longer, because braking is
only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci-
dent!
●
If the handbrake is only partially released,
this will cause the rear brakes to overheat,
which can impair the function of the brake
system and could lead to an accident. This al-
so causes premature wear on the rear brake
pads.
CAUTION
Always apply the handbrake before you leave
the vehic
le. Put it in 1st gear as well.
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly ap-
plied when the v
ehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when park-
ing the vehicle:
–
Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
Put it in 1st gear.
–
Switch the engine off and remove the key
from the ignition. T
urn the steering wheel
slightly to engage the steering lock.
–
Never leave a vehicle key in the vehicle.
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on
gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle
rolls against the kerb if it started to roll.
●
If the vehicle is parked facing downhill,
turn the front wheels so that they point to-
wards the kerb.
●
If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn
the front wheels so that they point away from
the kerb.
174
Driving
●
Sec
ur
e the
vehicle as usual by applying the
handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.
WARNING
●
Take me
asures to reduce the risk of injury
when you leave your vehicle unattended.
●
Never park where the hot exhaust system
could ignite inflammable materials, such as
dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
●
Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in
the vehicle when it is locked. They would be
unable to open the vehicle from the inside,
and could become trapped in the vehicle in
an emergency. In the event of an emergency,
locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle
occupants.
●
Never leave children alone in the vehicle.
They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-
ample, by releasing the handbrake or the
gearbox lever.
●
Depending on weather conditions, it may
become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi-
cle. This can be fatal.
Brakes
New brake pads
F
or the fir
s
t 400 km (250 miles), new brake
pads have not yet reached their maximum
braking capacity, and need to be “run in”
first. However, you can compensate for the
slightly reduced braking effect by applying
more pressure on the brake pedal. Avoid
overloading the brakes while running them
in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends
a great deal on how you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is
a particular problem in urban traffic and
short stretches, or with very sporty driving.
Depending on the speed, the braking force
and the environmental conditions (for exam-
ple, the temperature, air humidity, etc.)
noises may be produced on braking.
Wet roads or road salt
In certain situations (for example, on driving
through flooded areas, in severe downpours
or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-
tion could be delayed if the discs and pads
are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the
brakes should be “dried” by pressing the
brake pedal several times.
At high speed and with the windscreen wip-
ers activated, the brake pads will briefly
touch the brake discs. This takes place, al-
though unnoticeable to the driver, at regular
intervals to improve the response time of the
brakes when they are wet.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be
temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven
for some distance without using the brakes
when there is a lot of salt on the road in win-
ter. The layer of salt that accumulates on the
discs and pads can be removed by gently ap-
plying the brakes a few times.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for corrosion to
form on the discs and dirt to build up on the
brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently
or the brakes are not used very often.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if
rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable
to clean off the pads and disks by braking
firmly a few times at a moderately high speed
›››
.
F
au
lt
in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel should ever increase
suddenly, this may mean that one of the two
brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately
to the nearest specialised workshop and
have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly
and remember that you will have to apply
more pressure on the brake pedal and allow
for longer stopping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if
the brake fluid level is too low. The brake flu-
id level is monitored electronically.
»
175
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Brake servo
The br
ak
e ser
vo increases the pressure you
apply to the brake pedal. It works only when
the engine is running.
WARNING
●
Apply
the brakes heavily to clean the brake
system only in a suitable traffic situation. Do
not put other road users in danger: there is
risk of causing an accident.
●
Ensure the vehicle does not move while in
neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in an
accident.
●
If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is
subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can
form in the brake system. This reduces the ef-
ficiency of the brakes.
CAUTION
●
Never let
the brakes “drag” by leaving your
foot on the pedal when it is not necessary to
brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in
longer stopping distances and greater wear.
●
Before driving down a long, steep gradient,
it is advisable to reduce speed and select a
lower gear. This makes use of engine braking
and relieves the brakes. If you still have to
use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at
intervals than to apply the brakes continu-
ously.
Note
●
If the brak
e servo is out of action, for exam-
ple when the car is being towed, you will
have to press the brake pedal considerably
harder than normal to make up for the lack of
servo assistance.
●
If you wish to equip the vehicle with acces-
sories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers,
it is important that the flow of air to the front
wheels is not obstructed, otherwise the
brakes can overheat.
Braking and stability systems
El
ectr
onic
Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces
the t
endency
t
o skid and improves the stabil-
ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC
detects critical handling situations, such as
vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin
on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehi-
cle by braking individual wheels or by reduc-
ing the engine torque. The warning lamp will
flash on the instrument panel when the ESC
is intervening .
ESC includes the Anti-lock brake system
(ABS), the brake assist system, the traction
control system (ASR), electronic differential
lock (EDL), electronic self-locking*, selective
torque control* and tractor-trailer sway miti-
gation*. ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle
by changing the torque.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-
der braking until the vehicle has reached a
virtual standstill. You can continue to steer
the vehicle even when the brakes are on full.
Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not
pump the brakes. You will feel the brake ped-
al pulsate while the ABS is working.
Brake assist system
The brake assist system can reduce the re-
quired braking distance. The braking force is
automatically boosted if you press the brake
pedal quickly in an emergency. You must
keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-
ger has passed.
Traction control system (ASR)
In the event of wheelspin, the traction control
system reduces the engine torque to match
the amount of grip available. This helps the
car to start moving, accelerate or climb a gra-
dient.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes
the spinning wheel and directs the power to
the other driven wheel. This function is active
up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).
176
Driving
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel
fr
om o
v
erheating, the EDL cuts out automati-
cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-
hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch
on again automatically when the brake has
cooled down.
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*
If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control
the following: Tractor-trailers tend to sway.
When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the
vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-
matically brake the towing vehicle within the
limits of the system and mitigate the sway.
Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available
in all countries.
Electronic torque management (XDS)
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-
tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn
at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In
this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out-
er wheel) receives less drive torque than the
inner wheel. This may mean that in certain
situations the torque delivered to the inner
wheel is too high, causing the wheels to
spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is
receiving a lower drive torque than it could
transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral
grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer
or “lengthening” of the trajectory.
The XDS system can detect and correct this
effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside
wheel and counter the excess driving torque
of that wheel. This means that the driver's
desired trajectory is much more precise.
The XDS system works in combination with
the ESC and is always active, even when ASR
traction control is disconnected, or the ESC in
Sport mode or disconnected.
Multi-collision brake
In an accident, the multi-collision brake can
help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of
skidding during the accident, which could
lead to further collisions.
The multi-collision brake works for front, side
or rear accidents, when the airbag control
unit records its activation level and the acci-
dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h
(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the
vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-
aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-
board network
The following actions control automatic brak-
ing during the accident:
●
When the driver presses the accelerator,
the automatic braking does not take place.
●
When the braking pressure through press-
ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-
tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake
automatically.
●
Multi-collision braking will not be available
if ESC is malfunctioning.
WARNING
●
The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDL, electr
onic self-
locking differential or selective torque control
systems cannot exceed the limits imposed by
the laws of physics. Always bear this in mind,
especially on wet or slippery roads. If you no-
tice the systems cutting in, you should re-
duce your speed immediately to suit the road
and traffic conditions. Do not be encouraged
to take risks by the presence of more safety
systems. If you do, an accident may occur.
●
Please remember that the accident risk al-
ways increases if you drive fast, especially in
corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow
too close behind the vehicle in front of you.
The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDL, electronic
self-locking and selective torque control sys-
tems cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-
dents!
●
Accelerate with caution on slippery surfa-
ces (for example, icy or snow-covered). De-
spite the control systems, the driven wheels
could spin, affecting the stability of the vehi-
cle: risk of accident!
Note
●
The ABS and ASR wi
ll only operate correctly
if the four wheels have identical tyres. Any
differences in the rolling radius of the tyres
can cause the system to reduce engine power
when this is not desired.
»
177
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
The regu
lating processes of the systems
can make noises when they intervene.
●
If the warning lamp lights up, or alter-
natively, there could be a fault ››› page 109.
Switching on/off the ESC and ASR
Fig. 190 Centre console: Button for switching
on/off
the E
SC
and ASR
The ESC is switched on automatically when
the en
gine i
s
started, and only works when
the engine is running and includes the ABS,
EDS and ASR systems.
The ASR and ESC function should only be
switched off in situations in which traction is
insufficient, among others:
●
When driving in deep snow or on surfaces
that are not very firm.
●
To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck.
Then switch the ASR and ESC function back
on.
Depending on finishes and versions, it is
possible either to disconnect only the ASR or
else activate ESC Sport mode.
ESC in “Sport” mode
Sport mode can be connected via the Easy
Connect ››› page 110 system menu. The ac-
tion of the ESC and the ASR is limited ›››
.
The c
ontr
o
l lamp lights up. For vehicles
with a driver information system*, the driver
will be shown the electronic stability
control (ESC) option: sport.
Warning! Limited stability.
Disable ESC “Sport” mode
Through the Easy Connect system menu
››› page 110. The warning lamp will switch
off. For vehicles with a driver information sys-
tem*, the driver will be shown the elec-
tronic stability control (ESC)
option: on.
Disable ASR
The Easy Connect system menu is used to
switch off the ASR ››› page 110. The traction
control system will be disabled.
The control lamp lights up. For vehicles
with a driver information system* the driver
will be informed that ASR is disabled.
Activate ASR
The Easy Connect system menu ››› page 110
is used to switch on the ASR. The traction
control system will be enabled.
The control lamp switches off. For vehicles
with a driver information system* the driver
will be informed that ASR is enabled.
Disconnection of the ESC
In some versions of the model, besides the
traction control system (ASR), the electronic
stability programme (ESC) can also be
switched off.
●
Press the button ››› Fig. 190 for approxi-
mately 1 second to switch off the ASR func-
tion.
●
Press the button ››› Fig. 190 for approxi-
mately 3 seconds to switch off the Electronic
Stability programme (ESC), including the ASR
function.
●
The ASR and ESC function are reconnected
by pressing the button ››› Fig. 190.
●
OR: activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC
function in the Easy Connect system by
means of the button
and the function
b
utt
on
s
SETUP
and
E
SC
System
.
WARNING
You should switch on the ESC Sport mode on-
ly if the tr
affic conditions and your driving
178
Driving
ability allow you to do so safely: risk of
skiddin
g!
●
With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising
function will be limited to allow for a sportier
drive. The driving wheels could spin and the
vehicle could “skid”.
●
If the ESC/ASR is deactivated, the vehicle
stabilisation function is not available.
Note
If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s Sport
mode i
s sel
ected, cruise control* will be
switched off.
Hill driving assistant
The hill driving assistant helps the driver to
mo
v
e off
and upward on a hill when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
The system maintains brake pressure for ap-
proximately two seconds after the driver
takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent
the vehicle from lurching backward when it is
started. During these 2 seconds, the driver
has enough time to release the clutch pedal
and accelerate without the vehicle moving
and without having to use the handbrake,
making start-up easier, more comfortable
and safer.
These are the basic operation conditions:
●
being on a ramp or hill/slope,
●
doors closed,
●
vehicle completely stationary,
●
engine running and foot on the brake,
●
besides having a gear engaged or being in
neutral for manual gear change and with the
selector lever at position S, D or R for an au-
tomatic gearbox.
This system is also active when reversing up-
hill.
WARNING
●
If y
ou do not start the vehicle immediately
after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the
vehicle may start to roll back under certain
conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use
the hand brake immediately.
●
If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped-
al or use the hand brake immediately.
●
When following a line of traffic uphill, if you
want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back
accidentally when starting off, hold the brake
pedal down for a few seconds before starting
off.
Note
The Official Service or a specialist workshop
can tel
l you if your vehicle is equipped with
this system.
Manual gearbox
Ch
an
gin
g gear
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 42
In some countries the clutch pedal must be
fully pressed down for the engine to start.
Selecting reverse gear
●
Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle
is stopped.
Changing down gears
While driving, changing down a gear must al-
ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-
rectly below and when the engine speed is
not too high
›››
. Changing down while by-
p
a
s
sing one or various gears at high speeds
or at high engine speeds can damage the
clutch and the gearbox, even if the clutch
pedal remains depressed
›››
.
WARNING
When the engine is running, the vehicle will
star
t to move as soon as a gear is engaged
and the clutch released. This is also the case
with the electronic parking brake switched
on.
●
Never engage reverse gear when the vehi-
cle is moving.
»
179
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
WARNING
If the gear is changed down inappropriately
by sel
ecting a gear that is too low, you may
lose control of the vehicle, causing an acci-
dent and serious injuries.
CAUTION
When travelling at high speeds or at high en-
gine speeds, sel
ecting a gear that is too low
can cause considerable damage to the clutch
and the gearbox. This can also occur if the
clutch pedal is pressed and held and it does
not engage.
CAUTION
To prevent damage and avoid premature
wear
, please observe the following:
●
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever
while driving. The pressure applied by your
hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector
forks.
●
Always ensure that the vehicle is complete-
ly stopped before engaging the reverse gear.
●
Always press the clutch to the floor when
changing gears.
●
Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on
hills with the engine on.
Automatic gearbox/DSG auto-
m
atic
g
earbox*
Introduction
›››
table on page 2
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-
ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be-
tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-
mitted via two independent clutches. They re-
place the torque converter found on conven-
tional automatic gearboxes and allow for
smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-
hicle.
The tiptronic system allows the driver to
change gears manually if desired
›››
page 182, Changing gears in tiptronic
mode*.
Selector lever positions
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 43
The selector lever position engaged is high-
lighted on the display in the instrument clus-
ter. With the selector lever in the manual
gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged
gear is also indicated on the display.
P – Parking lock
When the selector lever is in this position,
the driven wheels are locked mechanically.
The parking lock must be engaged only when
the vehicle is stationary ›››
.
The int
erloc
k
button (the button on the selec-
tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si-
multaneously the brake pedal must be de-
pressed before moving the selector lever ei-
ther in or out of position P.
R – Reverse gear
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling
›››
.
T
o mo
v
e the selector lever to position R, the
interlock button must be pressed in and at
the same time the brake pedal must be de-
pressed. The reverse lights come on when
the selector lever is in the R position with the
ignition on.
N – Neutral (idling)
With the selector lever in this position, the
gear is in neutral.
D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position
The selector lever in the D/S position enables
the gears to be controlled in normal mode (D)
or Sport mode (S). To select Sport mode (S),
move the selector lever backwards. Moving
the lever again will select normal mode (D).
180
Driving
The selected driving mode is shown on the
in
s
trument
panel display.
In normal mode (D), the gearbox automatical-
ly selects the best gear ratio. This depends
on the engine load, the road speed and the
dynamic gear control programme (DCP).
Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty
driving style. This setting makes use of the
engine's maximum power output. When ac-
celerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.
Press the brake pedal to move the selector
lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta-
tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)
›››
.
Under c
er
t
ain circumstances (e.g. when driv-
ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to
switch temporarily to tiptronic mode
››› page 182, in order to manually select gear
ratios to suit the driving conditions.
WARNING
●
Take c
are not to accidentally press the ac-
celerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped.
The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-
mediately (in some cases even if the parking
brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an
accident.
●
Never move the selector lever to R or P
when driving. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion could result in an accident.
●
With selector lever in any position (except
P) the vehicle must always be held with the
foot brake when the engine is running. This is
because an aut
omatic gearbox still transmits
power even at idling speed, and the vehicle
tends to “creep”. The accelerator pedal must
on no account be pressed inadvertently when
a gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary.
The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-
mediately (in some cases even if the parking
brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an
accident.
●
While you are selecting a gear and the vehi-
cle is stopped with the engine running, do
not accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion could result in an accident.
●
As a driver you should never leave your ve-
hicle if the engine is running and a gear is en-
gaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while
the engine is running, you must apply the
handbrake and engage the parking lock (P).
●
To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake
and put the selector lever in position P before
opening the bonnet and working on the vehi-
cle with the engine running. Please always
observe the important safety warnings
››› page 262, Work in the engine compart-
ment.
Note
●
If the select
or lever is moved accidentally
to N when driving, release the accelerator and
let the engine speed drop to idling before se-
lecting gear range D or S again.
●
Should the power supply to the selector
lever be interrupted in position P, the selector
lever will be locked. If this should happen the
manual
release can be used ›››
page 43.
Selector lever lock
Fig. 191 Selector lever lock.
The selector lever lock prevents gears from
bein
g en
g
aged inadvertently, so that the ve-
hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.
The selector lever lock is released as follows:
–
Switch the ignition on.
–
Press the brake pedal and at the same time
press in the interlock button.
Automatic selector lever lock
With the ignition switched on, the selector
lever is locked in the positions P and N. The
brake pedal must be pressed to release the
lever while pressing the release button if the
selector lever is in the position P. As a
»
181
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
reminder for the driver, with the lever in posi-
tion
s
P or N the f
ollowing message will be
shown on the display:
When stationary, apply footbrake
while selecting a gear.
Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta-
tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h
(3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph)
the lever lock is automatically deactivated in
position N.
The selector lever lock is not engaged if the
selector lever is moved quickly through posi-
tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This
makes it possible, for instance, to rock the
vehicle “backwards and forwards” if it is
stuck. The selector lever lock engages auto-
matically if the brake pedal is not depressed
and the lever is in position N for more than
about two seconds.
Interlock button
The interlock button on the selector lever
handle prevents the driver from inadvertently
engaging certain gears. Press the button in
to disengage the selector lever lock. The se-
lector lever positions in which the interlock
button has to be pressed are shown in the il-
lustration, highlighted in colour ››› Fig. 191.
Safety interlock for ignition key
Once the ignition has been turned off, the
key may be removed only if the gear selector
is in position P. While the key is not in the ig-
nition, the selector lever is locked in position
P.
Note
●
If the select
or lever lock does not engage,
there is a fault. The transmission is interrup-
ted to prevent the vehicle from accidentally
moving. Follow the procedure below in order
for the selector lever lock to engage again:
–
With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brake
pedal and release it again.
–
With a 7-speed gearbox: press the brake
pedal. Move the selector lever to posi-
tion P or N and subsequently engage a
gear.
●
Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicle
does not move forwards or back. Proceed to
the next mode:
–
When the vehicle does not move in the
required direction, the system may not
have the gear range correctly engaged.
Press the brake pedal and engage the
gear range again.
–
If the vehicle still does not move in the
required direction, there is a system mal-
function. Seek specialist assistance and
have the system checked.
Changing gears in tiptronic mode*
Fig. 192 Centre console: changing gear with
tiptr
onic
Fig. 193 Steering wheel: automatic gearbox
l
ev
er
s
The tiptronic gives the driver the option to
c
h
an
ge gears manually.
182
Driving
Changing gear manually with the selector
l
ev
er
It
is possible to change to tiptronic mode,
both when the vehicle is stopped and while
driving.
–
To switch to tiptronic mode, move the se-
lector lever from position D/S to the right.
As soon as the change is made the selector
level will be shown in the position M on the
instrument panel display (for example M4
means that the fourth gear is engaged).
–
Move the selector lever forwards
+
to se-
l
ect
a higher g
ear ››› Fig. 192.
–
Move the selector lever backwards
–
to
sel
ect
a lo
wer gear.
Changing gear manually with the gearshift
paddles*
The gearshift paddles can be used when the
selector lever is in the position D/S or M.
–
Press the gearshift paddle
+
to select a
higher g
e
ar ›
›› Fig. 193.
–
Press the gearshift paddle
–
to select a
lo
w
er g
ear.
–
With the selector lever in position D/S, if no
paddle is operated during a short period of
time, the gearbox control system switches
back to automatic mode. To switch to per-
manent manual gear change using the
gearshift paddles, move the selector lever
from position D/S to the right.
When accelerating, the gearbox automatical-
ly shifts up into the next gear shortly before
the maximum engine speed is reached.
If you select a lower gear, the automatic gear-
box will not shift down until there is no risk of
over-revving the engine.
When the kick-down feature is used, the
gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend-
ing on road speed and engine speed.
Driving tips
The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical-
ly
a
s
the vehicle moves.
The engine can only start with the selector
lever in the position P or N. At low tempera-
tures, below -10°C (50°F), the engine can on-
ly start with the selector lever in the position
P.
Starting the vehicle
–
Press and hold the brake pedal.
–
Press and hold the interlock button (the
button on the selector lever handle), move
the selector lever to the desired position,
for instance D
›››
page 180, and release the
interlock button.
–
Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a
slight movement can be felt).
–
Release the brake and press the accelerator
›››
.
St
op
pin
g briefly
–
Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle
briefly when stationary (for instance at traf-
fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.
Stopping/Parking
If the driver door is opened and the selector
lever is not in position P, the vehicle could
move. The driver message will be: Gear
change: selector lever in the
drive position!. Additionally, a buzzer
will sound.
–
Press and hold the brake pedal ›››
.
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
Move the selector lever to position P.
Ho
l
din
g the car on a hill
–
Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from “moving backwards;
if necessary, apply the handbrake” ›››
.
Do not tr
y
t
o stop the vehicle “rolling back”
by increasing the engine speed when a
gear is engaged (pressing the accelerator)
›››
.
Mo
v
in
g off uphill in vehicles without Hill
start assistant*
–
Apply the handbrake.
»
183
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
–
Onc
e
y
ou have engaged a gear press the
accelerator carefully and disengage the
handbrake.
Moving off uphill in vehicles with Hill start
assistant*
–
Once you have engaged a gear, release the
footbrake and press the accelerator
››› page 179, Hill driving assistant.
Driving down hills: in some situations (on
mountain roads or when towing a trailer or
caravan) it can be advantageous to switch
temporarily to the manual gearbox pro-
gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec-
ted manually to suit the driving conditions
›››
.
On l
ev
el
ground it is sufficient to move the
selector lever to position P. On slopes, first
engage the parking brake and then put the
selection lever into the P position. This
avoids overloading the locking mechanism
and it will be easier to move the selector lev-
er from position P.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Selector
lever po
sitions on page 181.
●
Never allow the brake to rub and do not use
the brake pedal too often or for long periods.
Constant braking causes overheating in the
brakes. This could significantly reduce brak-
ing power, increase braking distance or even
res
ult in the total failure of the brake system.
●
To avoid rolling back on gradients always
hold the vehicle with the footbrake or hand-
brake if you have to stop.
CAUTION
●
If
y
ou stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not
attempt to stop it from rolling by depressing
the accelerator when a gear has been selec-
ted. This could cause overheating and dam-
age the automatic gearbox. Apply the hand-
brake firmly or press the brake pedal in order
to prevent the vehicle from rolling back.
●
If you allow the car to roll with the selector
lever in position N with the engine switched
off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged
as it will not be lubricated.
●
In certain driving situations or traffic condi-
tions, such as frequently starting, prolonged
“creeping” of the vehicle or traffic jams with
continuous stoppages, the gearbox could
overheat causing damage! If the warning
lamp lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible and wait for the gearbox to cool
››› page 187.
Kick-down feature
The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-
c
el
er
ation to be reached.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right
down past the point of resistance at full throt-
tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower
gear, depending on road speed and engine
speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is
delayed until the engine reaches maximum
rpm.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slip-
pery or w
et, the kick-down feature could
cause the driving wheels to spin, which could
result in skidding.
Launch control programme
3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-Speed
D
SG with diesel engines superior to 125 kW and pet-
rol engines superior to 140 kW.
The Launch control programme enables maxi-
mum acceleration.
Important: the engine must have reached op-
erating temperature and the steering wheel
must not be turned.
The engine speed for launch-control is differ-
ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use the
launch-control you must disconnect the anti-
slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con-
nect system menu
›››
page 110. The warning
lamp will stay switched on or will flash
slowly depending on whether or not the vehi-
cle has a driver information system*.
184
Driving
On vehicles with the driver information sys-
t
em, the E
SC
lamp lights up permanently and
the corresponding text message Stability
control deactivated (temporary) ap-
pears on the instrument panel to indicate the
deactivation status.
–
When the engine is running, switch off the
traction control (ASR)
1)
.
–
Turn the selector lever to the position “S”
or tiptronic, or else select the sport driv-
ing mode from the SEAT Drive Profile*
››› page 219.
–
Press the brake pedal firmly with your left
foot and hold it down for at least one sec-
ond.
–
With your right foot, press the accelerator
down to the full throttle or kick-down posi-
tion. The engine speed will stabilise at
about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about
2,000 rpm (diesel engine).
–
Take your left foot off the brake pedal.
WARNING
●
Alwa
ys adapt your driving style to the traf-
fic conditions.
●
Only use the launch control programme
when road and traffic conditions permit, and
make sure your manner of driving and accel-
erating the
vehicle does not inconvenience or
endanger other road users.
●
Make sure that the ESC remains switched
on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC
are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin,
causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of acci-
dent!
●
After putting the vehicle into gear, the
“sport” mode of the ESC should be deactiva-
ted again by briefly pressing the
OFF
but-
ton.
Note
●
After u
sing the Launch control programme,
the temperature in the gearbox may have in-
creased considerably. In this case, the pro-
gramme could be disabled for several mi-
nutes. The programme can be used again af-
ter the cooling phase.
●
Accelerating with the Launch control pro-
gramme places a heavy load on all parts of
the vehicle. This can result in increased wear
and tear.
Downhill speed control*
The downhill speed control function helps
the driver when drivin
g down steep gradi-
ents.
Downhill speed control is activated when the
selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies
the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto-
matically engages a lower gear that is suita-
ble for the slope. The downhill speed control
function attempts to maintain the speed at
which the vehicle was travelling when the
foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of
physics and technical drive limitations). It
may be necessary to adjust the speed again
using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv-
en that the downhill speed control can only
change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de-
scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In
this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to
2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and
reduce the charge on the brakes.
Downhill speed control is deactivated as
soon as the road levels out again or you
press the accelerator pedal.
On vehicles with cruise control system*
›››
page 195, downhill speed control is acti-
vated when you set a cruising speed.
»
1)
Vehicles without driver information system: the
warning l
amp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver in-
formation system: the warning lamp stays on.
185
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
WARNING
The downhill speed control cannot defy the
law
s of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be
maintained constant in all situations. Always
be prepared to use the brakes!
Inertia mode
The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy
of the v
ehicle to be harnessed enabling cer-
tain stretches to be driven without using the
accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved.
Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll”
before, for example, arriving in a town.
Switching on inertia mode
Important: selector lever must be in position
D, gradients below 12 %.
–
Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode
›››
page 219.
–
Take your foot off the accelerator.
The driver message Inertia will be dis-
played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12
mph), the gearbox will automatically disen-
gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without
the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi-
cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.
Stopping inertia mode
–
Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.
To make use of the braking force and switch
off the engine again, simply press the brake
pedal briefly.
Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged
section with less energy) and the switching
off using inertia (= shorter section without
the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel
consumption and emission balance.
WARNING
●
If the inerti
a mode has been switched on,
take into account, when approaching an ob-
stacle and releasing the accelerator pedal,
that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usu-
al manner: risk of accident!
●
When using inertia mode while travelling
down hills, the vehicle can increase speed:
risk of accident!
●
If other users drive your vehicle, warn them
about inertia mode.
Note
●
Inertia mode i
s only available in eco (SEAT
Drive Profile*) driving mode.
●
The driver message Inertia is only dis-
played with the current consumption. In iner-
tia mode the gear will no longer be displayed
(for example “E” will appear instead of “E7”).
●
On downhill sections with gradients above
15 %, the inertia mode will automatically be
switched off temporarily.
Backup programme
A backup programme is in place if a fault
should oc
cur in the control system.
If all the positions of the selector lever are
shown over a light background on the instru-
ment panel display, there is a system fault
and the automatic gearbox will operate in
with the backup programme. When the back-
up programme is activated, it is possible to
drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and
within a selected range of gears. In some ca-
ses driving in reverse gear may not be possi-
ble.
CAUTION
If the gearbox operates with the backup pro-
gramme, tak
e the vehicle to a specialised
workshop and have the fault repaired without
delay.
Clutch
Clutch overheating! Please
stop!
The clut
ch has overheated and could be dam-
aged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the gear-
box to cool with the engine at idling speed
and the selector lever in position P. When the
warning lamp and the driver message switch
off, have the fault corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay. If the warning lamp
186
Driving
and the driver message do not switch off, do
not
c
ontinue driv
ing. Seek specialist assis-
tance.
Gearbox malfunctions
Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve-
hicle and place the lever in the
position P.
Ther
e i
s a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-
ing. Seek specialist assistance.
Gearbox: System fault! You
may continue driving.
Have the fault corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
Gearbox: System fault! You
can continue driving with re-
strictions. Reverse gear disa‐
bled
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
and have the fault repaired without delay.
Gearbox: System fault! You
can continue driving in D until
switching off the engine
Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away
from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis-
tance.
Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your
driving accordingly
Continue driving at moderate speeds. When
the warning lamp switches off, you can con-
tinue driving in a normal manner.
Gearbox: press the brake and
engage a gear again.
If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a
high temperature, this driver message will be
displayed when the gearbox has cooled
again.
Run-in and economical driving
Running-in the engine
A new vehicle should be run in over a dis-
t
anc
e of
1500 km (1000 miles). For the first
1,000 km the engine speed should not ex-
ceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine
speed. In doing so, do not accelerate at full
throttle and do not drive with a trailer! From
1000 to 1500 km (600 to 1000 miles) you
can gradually increase the engine rpm and
road speed.
During its first few hours of running, the in-
ternal friction in the engine is greater than
later on when all the moving parts have bed-
ded down.
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500
km influences the future engine perform-
ance. Subsequently, also drive at a moderate
rate, especially when the engine is still cold:
this will lead to less engine wear and tear
and will prolong its useful life.
You should also avoid driving with the engine
speed too low. Change down to a lower gear
when the engine no longer runs “smoothly”.
If the engine revs too much, cut fuel injection
to protect the engine.
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top priority in
the de
s
ign, c
hoice of materials and manufac-
ture of your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage recy-
cling
●
Joints and connections designed for easy
dismantling
●
Modular construction to facilitate disman-
tling
●
Increased use of single-grade materials.
●
Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
ISO 1629.
Choice of materials
●
Use of recycled materials.
»
187
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
U
se of
c
ompatible plastics in the same part
if its components are not easily separated.
●
Use of recycled materials and/or materials
originating from renewable sources.
●
Reduction of volatile components, includ-
ing odour, in plastic materials.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-
valent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
●
Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
●
Use of plastic film as protection during ve-
hicle transport.
●
Use of solvent-free adhesives.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-
tems.
●
Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
dues (RDF).
●
Improvement in the quality of waste water.
●
Use of systems for the recovery of residual
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
etc.).
●
The use of water-soluble paints.
Economical and environmentally-
friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution
and wear t
o the engine, brakes and tyres de-
pends largely on driving style. Fuel consump-
tion can be reduced by 10-15% with an eco-
nomical driving style and proper anticipation
of traffic conditions. The following section
gives you some tips on lessening the impact
on the environment and reducing your oper-
ating costs at the same time.
Active cylinder management (ACT
®
)*
››› table on page 2
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active
cylinder management (ACT
®
) may automati-
cally deactivate some of the engine cylinders
if the driving situation does not require too
much power. When it is switched off, no fuel
is injected into these cylinders, hence total
fuel consumption may be reduced. The num-
ber of active cylinders can be seen on the in-
strument panel display
›››
page 31.
Foresight when driving
Acceleration causes the vehicle to consume
more fuel. If you think ahead when driving,
you will need to brake less and thus acceler-
ate less. Wherever possible, let the car roll
slowly to a stop, with a gear engaged (for in-
stance when you can see that the next traffic
lights are red). This takes advantage of the
engine brak
ing effect, reducing wear on the
brakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel con-
sumption will drop to zero due to the overrun
fuel cut-off.
Changing gear to save energy
An effective way of saving is to change in ad-
vance to a higher gear. Running the engine at
high rpm in the lower gears uses an unneces-
sary amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second
gear as soon as possible. In any case, we rec-
ommend that you change to a higher gear
upon reaching 2,000 rpm. Choosing the right
gear enables fuel savings. Select the highest
possible gear appropriate for the driving sit-
uation (the engine should continue function-
ing with cyclical regularity).
Automatic gearbox: accelerate gradually and
without reaching the “kick-down” position.
Avoid driving at high speed
Avoid travelling at top speed, whenever pos-
sible. Fuel consumption, emission of harmful
gases and noise pollution multiply dispropor-
tionately as speed is increased. Driving at
moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Reduce idling time
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling
is automatically reduced. In vehicles without
188
Driving
the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off
the en
gine, f
or e
xample, at level crossings
and at traffic lights that remain red for long
periods of time. When an engine has reached
operating temperature, and depending on
the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off
for a minimum of about 5 seconds already
saves more than the amount of fuel necessa-
ry for restarting.
The engine takes a long time to warm up
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-
tant emissions are also especially high dur-
ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore
best to drive off immediately after starting
the engine. Avoid running the engine at high
speed.
Regular maintenance
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even
before the engine is started. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel
efficiency as well as maximum reliability and
an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced
engine can consume up to 10% more fuel
than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
The engine and catalytic converter need to
reach their optimal operating temperature in
order to minimise fuel consumption and
emissions.
A cold engine consumes a disproportionate
amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-
ing temperature after about four kilometres
(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re-
turn to a normal level.
Check tyre pressure
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the
correct pressures ››› page 272 to save fuel. If
the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-
tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater
rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-
ses tyre wear and impairs handling.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they
increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid carrying unnecessary loads
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable
to always check the luggage compartment to
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
ing transported.
Since the luggage rack increases the aerody-
namic drag of the vehicle, you should remove
it when not needed. At speeds of 100-120
km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12% of fuel.
Save electrical energy
The engine drives the alternator, thereby gen-
erating electricity. This implies that any in-
crease in power consumption also increases
fuel consumption! For this reason, switch off
any unneeded electrical devices. Devices that
use a lot of electricity includes the blower at
a high setting, the rear window heating or
the seat heating*.
Engine management and ex-
haust gas purification system
Introduction
WARNING
●
Becau
se of the high temperatures which
can occur in the exhaust purification system
(catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil-
ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-
haust can come into contact with flammable
materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at
the forest edge). Fire hazard!
●
Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
hazard!
Note
While the control lamps , , or re-
main lit, ther
e may be engine problems, fuel
consumption may increase and the engine
may lose power.
189
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Catalytic converter
3 Applies to vehicles with petrol engine
The v
ehicle must only be used with unleaded
petrol, otherwise the catalytic converter will
be irreparably damaged.
Never drive until the tank is empty; an irregu-
lar supply of fuel can cause faulty combus-
tion. In these cases, unburned fuel reaches
the exhaust system, which can overheat and
damage the catalytic converter.
Diesel particulate filter
3 Applies to vehicles with diesel engine
The die
sel engine particulate filter eliminates
most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys-
tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil-
ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter is
cleaned automatically without need for indi-
cation by the warning lamp . This may be
noticed because the engine idle speed in-
creases and an odour may be detected.
If automatic filter purification cannot be car-
ried out (because only short trips are taken,
for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-
ter and the Diesel particulate filter warning
lamp will switch on.
Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-
ess by driving in the following manner: drive
for approximately 15 minutes at a minimum
speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear
(automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the en-
gine speed at ap
proximately 2,000 rpm. The
rise in temperature causes the soot on the fil-
ter to burn. On completion of the cleaning
the warning lamp will switch off. If the warn-
ing lamp does not switch off, go immediately
to a specialised workshop to rectify the prob-
lem.
Engine management*
This warning lamp monitors the engine man-
ag
ement
sy
stem for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Con-
trol) lights up when the ignition is switched
on while system operation is being verified. It
should go out once the engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electronic engine
management system while you are driving,
this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi-
cle to a specialised workshop as soon as
possible and have the engine checked.
Emission control system*
Control lamp fl
a
she
s:
When there is misfiring that can damage the
catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive
carefully to the nearest specialised workshop
to have the engine checked.
The control lamp lights up:
If a fault has developed during driving which
has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas
(e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and
drive carefully to the nearest specialised
workshop to have the engine checked.
Engine pre-heating/fault system*
The warning lamp lights up to show that the
glow plug
s are preheating the diesel engine.
The control lamp lights up
If the control lamp lights up when the en-
gine is started it means that the glow plugs
are preheating. The engine can be started
straight away when the lamp switches off.
Control lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management
system while you are driving, the glow plug
system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to
a specialised workshop as soon as possible
and have the engine checked.
190
Driver assistance systems
Driving tips
Driv
in
g thr
ough flooded roads
To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-
ing through w
ater, for example, along a floo-
ded road, please observe the following:
●
The water should never come above the
lower edge of the bodywork.
●
Drive at pedestrian speed.
WARNING
After driving through water, mud, sludge,
etc., the br
aking effect can be delayed slight-
ly due to moisture build-up on the discs and
brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully
several times will remove the moisture and
restore the full braking effect.
CAUTION
●
Driving thr
ough flooded areas may severely
damage vehicle components such as the en-
gine, transmission, running gear or electrical
system.
●
Whenever driving through water, the Start-
Stop system* must be switched off
››› page 191.
Note
●
Check the depth of
the water before enter-
ing the flooded zone.
●
Do not st
op in the water, drive in reverse, or
stop the engine in any situation.
●
Note that vehicles travelling in the opposite
direction may splash water that could exceed
the maximum permitted water height for your
vehicle.
●
Avoid driving through salt water (corro-
sion).
Driver assistance systems
St
ar
t
-Stop system*
Description and operation
›››
table on page 2
The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re-
duce CO
2
emissions.
In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-
cally switch off when the vehicle stops, when
stopping at traffic lights for example. The ig-
nition remains switched on during the stop-
ping phase. The engine automatically
switches back on when required.
As soon as the ignition is switched on, the
Start-Stop function is automatically activa-
ted.
Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The driver must have their seat belt fas-
tened.
●
The bonnet mu
st be closed.
●
The vehicle must have travelled at more
than 4 km/h (2 mph) since the last stop.
●
The vehicle cannot be towing a trailer.
»
191
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
WARNING
●
Never swit
ch the engine off until the vehi-
cle is stationary. The brake servo and power
steering functions will not be completely cov-
ered under warranty. More force may also be
needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake.
As you cannot steer and brake in the normal
manner, there is a greater risk of accidents
and serious injury.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-
ing could lock making it impossible to steer
the vehicle.
●
To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-
Stop system is switched off when working in
the engine compartment ››› page 193.
CAUTION
The Start-Stop system must always be
switc
hed off when driving through flooded
areas ››› page 193.
Stopping/Starting the engine
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
–
When the vehicle is stopped, put it into
neutr
al
and r
elease the clutch pedal. The
engine will switch off. The warning lamp
will appear on the instrument panel dis-
play.
–
When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-
gine will start up again. The warning lamp
will switch off.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
–
Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a
stop and keep the brake pedal pressed
down with your foot. The engine will switch
off. The warning lamp will appear in the
display.
–
When you take your foot off the brake pedal
the engine will start up again. The warning
lamp will switch off.
Additional information related to the auto-
matic gearbox
The engine stops when the selector lever is in
the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to
when in manual mode. With the selector lev-
er in position P, the engine will also remain
switched off when you take your foot off the
brake pedal. In order to start the engine up
again the accelerator must be pressed, or an-
other gear engaged or the brake released.
If the selector lever is placed in position R
during the stopping phase, the engine will
start up again.
Change from position D to P to prevent the
engine from accidentally starting when
changing and passing by position R.
Note
●
You can c
ontrol whether the engine should
switch off or not by reducing or increasing the
brake force applied. While the vehicle re-
mains stopped, the engine will not stop if the
brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jams
with frequent stopping and starting for exam-
ple. As soon as strong pressure is applied to
the brake pedal, the engine will stop.
●
In vehicles with manual gearbox, during
the stopping phases the brake pedal must re-
main depressed to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
●
If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with man-
ual gearbox, it can be directly started up
again by immediately pressing the clutch
pedal.
General notes
The system can interrupt the Start-Stop mode
fr
equently
f
or different reasons.
The engine does not switch off
Before the stopping phase, the system veri-
fies whether certain conditions are met. The
engine does not switch off, in the following
situations for example:
●
The engine has not yet reached the mini-
mum required temperature for the Start-Stop
mode.
192
Driver assistance systems
●
The int
erior t
emper
ature selected for the air
conditioner has not yet been reached.
●
The interior temperature is very high/low.
●
Defrost function button activated
›››
page 45.
●
The parking aid* is switched on.
●
The battery is very low.
●
The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-
ing turned.
●
If there is a danger of misting.
●
After engaging reverse gear.
●
In case of a very steep gradient.
●
In the CUPRA version with automatic gear-
box, when it is in Tiptronic mode or in its
sports driving position (S).
The indication is shown on the instrument
panel display, and in addition, the driver in-
formation system* shows, .
The engine starts by itself
During a stopping phase the normal Start-
Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow-
ing situations: The engine restarts by itself
without involvement from the driver.
●
The interior temperature differs from the
value selected on the air conditioner.
●
Defrost function button activated
›››
page 45.
●
The brake has been pressed several times
consecutively.
●
The battery is too low.
●
High power consumption.
Note
In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if the
selector l
ever is placed in position D, N or S
after engaging reverse gear, the vehicle must
be driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (6
mph) for the system to return to conditions in
which the engine can be stopped.
Manually switching on/off the Start-
St
op sy
s
tem
Fig. 194 Centre console: Start-Stop system
b
utt
on
If you do not wish to use the system, you can
sw
it
c
h it off manually.
–
To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop
system, press the button
. The button
symbo
l
r
emains lit up yellow when the sys-
tem is switched off.
Note
The system is automatically switched on each
time the engine is
deliberately stopped dur-
ing a stopping phase. The engine will start
automatically.
Driver messages on the instrument
p
anel
di
splay
Start-Stop system deactivated.
Start the engine manually
This driv
er message is displayed when cer-
tain conditions are not met during the stop-
ping phase and the Start-Stop system cannot
restart the engine. The engine must be star-
ted manually.
Start-Stop system: Fault! Func-
tion not available
There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take
the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault
repaired.
193
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Auto Hold Function*
D
e
s
cription and operation
Fig. 195 In the lower part of the centre con-
so
l
e: Aut
o Hold function button.
The control light of the ›
›
›
Fig. 195 button
remains on when the Auto Hold function is
connected.
Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-
sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-
ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-
od of time with the engine running, for exam-
ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at
traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-
tent stops.
When connected, the Auto Hold function au-
tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling
when stationary without pressing the brake
pedal.
After detecting that the vehicle is stationary
and the brake pedal has been released, the
Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The
driver can lift their foot off the brake pedal.
When the driver touches the accelerator ped-
al or accelerates slightly to continue driving,
the Auto Hold function releases the brake.
The vehicle moves according to the slope of
the road.
If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-
ditions required by the Auto Hold function is
impaired, it disconnects itself and the but-
ton's control light goes out ››› Fig. 195. The
electronic parking brake connects automati-
cally, if necessary, to park the vehicle safe-
ly ›››
.
C
ondition
s
for keeping the vehicle stationary
with the Auto Hold function
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
●
The engine is running.
Switching the Auto Hold function on and off
Press the button ›››
. The control lamp on
the b
utt
on g
oes out when the Auto Hold func-
tion is switched off.
Automatically engaging and disengaging the
Auto Hold function
If the Auto Hold function was switched on
with the button before disengaging the ig-
nition, the function will remain on after the
ignition is re-engaged.
If the Auto Hold function was not switched
on, it will automatically remain off next time
the ignition is engaged.
The Auto Hold function is automatically
switched on if the following conditions are
met:
All conditions must be met at the same time
›››
:
Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox
1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the brake ped-
al on a flat surface or on a slope.
2. The engine rotates “correctly”.
Upon pressing the
clutch and accelerating
at the same time, the
brake releases gradu-
ally.
Upon accelerating, the
brake releases gradu-
ally.
194
Driver assistance systems
The Auto Hold function is automatically
t
urned off
if
the following conditions are
met:
Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox
1.
If any of the conditions mentioned on
››› page 194, Conditions for keeping the vehicle
stationary with the Auto Hold function are no lon-
ger met.
2.
If the engine is running irregularly or an anomaly
is detected.
3.
If the engine is turned
off or stalls.
If the engine is switch-
ed off.
4.
The clutch and the ac-
celerator are pressed at
the same time.
If the accelerator is
pressed.
5.
If any of the tyres has
only minimal contact
with the ground, e.g. in
the case of axle articu-
lation.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into the
Auto Hol
d function cannot defy the laws of
physics; it only works within the limits of the
system. The greater convenience provided by
the Auto Hold function should never tempt
you to take any risk that may compromise
safety.
●
Never leave the vehicle running and with
the Auto Hold function switched on.
●
The Auto Hol
d function cannot always keep
the vehicle stationary uphill or downhill or
stop it sufficiently, for example, on slippery
or frozen surfaces.
Note
Before entering a car wash, always switch off
the Aut
o Hol
d function, because if the elec-
tronic parking brake is automatically connec-
ted, it may cause damage.
Cruise control system (CCS)*
Oper
ation
Fig. 196 Instrument panel display: CCS status
indic
ation
s
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 39
The cruise control system (CCS) is able to
maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15
mph).
The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas-
ing to accelerate, not by actively braking the
vehicle ›››
.
C
ontr
o
l lamp
When the warning lamp is lit, cruise con-
trol is active.
Several warning and control lamps light up
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
Displayed on the CCS screen
Status Fig. 196:
CCS temporarily switched off. The set
speed is displayed in small figures.
System error. Contact a specialised work-
shop.
CCS switched on. The speed memory is
empty.
The CCS is switched on. The set speed is
displayed in large figures.
»
A
B
C
D
195
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
WARNING
Use of the cruise control could cause acci-
dents and sev
ere injuries if it is not possible
to drive at a constant speed maintaining the
safety distance.
●
Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf-
fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is
insufficient, on steep roads, with several
bends or in slippery circumstances (snow,
ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
●
Never use the CCS when driving off-road or
on unpaved roads.
●
Always adapt your speed and the distance
to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,
weather conditions, the condition of the road
and the traffic situation.
●
To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise
control system, turn it off every time you fin-
ish using it.
●
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
too high for the prevailing road, traffic or
weather conditions.
●
When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot
maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends
to accelerate under its own weight. Select a
lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the
vehicle.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Warning
and contro
l lamps on page 109.
Operating the cruise control system*
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 39
The value indicated in the table in brackets
(in mph, miles per hour) only refers to instru-
ment panels with indications in miles.
Changing gear in CCS mode
The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch
pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-
cally after a gear is engaged.
Travelling down hills with the CCS
When travelling down hills the CCS cannot
maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle
down using the brake pedal and reduce
gears if required.
Automatic off
The cruise control system (CCS) is switched
off automatically or temporarily:
●
If the system detects a fault that could af-
fect the w
orking order of the CCS.
●
If you press and maintain the accelerator
pedal for a certain time, driving faster than
the stored speed.
●
If the dynamic driving control systems in-
tervene (e.g. ASR or ESC).
●
If the airbag is triggered.
Adaptive Cruise Control ACC*
Introduction
Fig. 197 Detection area.
›››
table on page 2
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an exten-
sion of the normal cruise control system
(CCS) ›››
.
The A
C
C
function allows the driver to estab-
lish a cruise speed of between 30 and 210
km/h (18 and 150 mph), as well as the tem-
porary distance required with regard to the
vehicle in front. The ACC function will adapt
the vehicle's cruise speed at all times, main-
taining a safe distance with the vehicle in
front.
The ACC function is based on a radar sensor
that can measure the distance to the vehicles
in front.
196
Driver assistance systems
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic
g
e
arbo
x, the ACC can brake the vehicle until
it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it
stops.
Driver intervention prompt
During driving, the ACC is subject to certain
limitations inherent in the system. In other
words, in certain circumstances the driver will
have to adjust speed him or herself, as well
as the distance from other vehicles.
In this case, the instrument panel screen will
warn you to intervene by applying the brake
and a warning tone will be heard
››› page 198.
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the ACC cannot
over
come the system's inherent limitations
or change the laws of physics. If used negli-
gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious
accidents and injuries. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-
bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
●
Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad,
on steep roads, with several bends or in slip-
pery circumstances such as snow, ice, rain or
loose gravel, or on flooded roads.
●
Never use the ACC when driving off-road or
on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-
signed for use on paved roads only.
●
The ACC
does not react on approaching a
fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic
jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stopped
at the traffic lights.
●
The ACC only reacts to people if a pedes-
trian monitoring system is available. In addi-
tion, the system does not react to animals or
vehicles crossing your path or approaching
head-on down the same lane.
●
If the ACC does not reduce speed sufficient-
ly, brake the vehicle immediately by applying
the pedal.
●
If you are driving using the spare wheel,
the ACC system could automatically switch
off during the journey. Switch off the system
when starting off.
●
If the vehicle continues to move involuntar-
ily after a driver intervention prompt, brake
the vehicle by applying the pedal.
●
If the dash panel displays a driver interven-
tion prompt, adjust the distance yourself.
●
The driver should be ready to accelerate or
brake by him/herself at all times.
CAUTION
If you have the sensation that the radar sen-
sor is d
amaged, disconnect the ACC. This will
avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it
adjusted.
●
Repairs to the radar sensor require special-
ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-
pose.
Note
●
If the AC
C system does not work as descri-
bed in this chapter, do not use it until it has
been checked by a specialised workshop.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
for this purpose.
●
Maximum speed with the ACC activated is
limited to 210 km/h (150 mph).
●
When the ACC is switched on, strange
noises may be heard during automatic brak-
ing cause by the braking system.
197
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Indications on the display, warning
and c
ontr
o
l lamps
Fig. 198 On the instrument panel display: (A)
A
C
C
temporarily inactive, vehicle detected in
front, temporary distance adjusted. (B) ACC
active, vehicle detected in front, temporary
distance adjusted.
Status display
Indic
ation
s
on the display ››› Fig. 198:
Vehicle in front, the ACC is inactive.
1
Distance margin selected, the ACC is in-
activ
e.
V
ehic
le detected in front. The ACC is ac-
tive.
Adjustment of the temporary distance
from the vehicle in front with a program-
med speed.
Temporary distance adjustment from the
vehicle in front with a programmed
speed.
Warning and control lamps
›››
in Warning and control lamps on
p
ag
e 109
.
The speed reduction by the ACC to
maintain the distance from the vehi-
cle in front is not sufficient.
Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt.
The ACC is not currently available.
a)
With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine and
start it up again. Check the radar sensor visually for dirt,
ice or knocks. If it is still unavailable, refer to a special-
ised workshop to have the system inspected.
a)
The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in
colour.
2
3
4
5
The ACC is active.
No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speed
remains constant.
If the symbol is white: the ACC is ac-
tive.
A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjusts
speed and distance from the vehicle in front.
If the symbol is grey: the ACC is not
active.
The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.
It lights up green
The ACC is active.
Some warning and control lamps will light up
briefly
when the ignition i
s
switched on to
check certain functions. They will switch off
after a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Warning
and contro
l lamps on page 109.
Note
When the ACC is connected, the indications
on the instrument
panel screen may be con-
cealed by warnings from other functions,
such as an incoming call.
198
Driver assistance systems
Radar sensor
Fig. 199 On the front bumper: radar sensor.
A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-
er t
o det
ermine the tr
affic situation
››› Fig. 199
1
. This sensor can detect vehi-
c
l
e
s in front up to a distance of approximately
120 m.
The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired
by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-
fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the
adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work.
The instrument panel displays the following
message: ACC: No sensor vision! If
necessary clean the radar sensor ›››
.
When the r
a
d
ar sensor begins to operate
properly again, the ACC will automatically be
available again. The message on the instru-
ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC
will be reactivated again.
ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-
dar reverse reflection. This may occur, for ex-
ample, in a closed car park or due to the
presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the
road or sheets used in road works).
The area in front of and around the radar sen-
sor should not be covered with adhesives,
additional or similar headlights, as this may
negatively affect ACC operation.
If structural modifications are made to the ve-
hicle, for example, if the suspension is low-
ered or the front spoiler is modified, ACC op-
eration may be affected. So structural modifi-
cations should only be made by specialised
workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this purpose.
If work is done incorrectly on the front of the
vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged
or lose its settings, and ACC operation may
be affected. So repair work should only be
made by specialised workshops. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-
pose.
CAUTION
If you have the sensation that the radar sen-
sor is d
amaged or has lost its settings, dis-
connect the ACC. This will avoid possible
damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.
●
The sensor may become damaged or lose
its settings when knocked, for example, dur-
ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-
mise the sys
tem's efficacy or disconnect it.
●
Repairs to the radar sensor require special-
ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-
pose.
●
Clean away the snow with a brush and the
ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer
spray.
199
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Operating the Adaptive Cruise Control
A
C
C
Fig. 200 On the left of the steering column:
thir
d l
ev
er for operating the Adaptive Cruise
Control.
Fig. 201 On the left of the steering column:
thir
d l
ev
er for operating the Adaptive Cruise
Control.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
c
onnect
ed, the gr
een control lamp will
light up on the instrument panel, and the
programmed speed and ACC status will be
displayed ››› Fig. 198.
Conditions for the adaptive cruise control to
be activated
●
The selector lever must be at the D or S po-
sition or in the tiptronic selection track. In
manual gearbox any forward gear must be
engaged, except the 1st gear.
●
In vehicles with manual gearbox, if there is
no programmed speed, drive at least at
30 km/h (18 mph).
Speed control
When the ACC is connected, speed can be
programmed and adjusted. The programmed
speed must be different from the speed at
which the vehicle travels if the distance is be-
ing adjusted at the time.
What functions can be operated?
If you activate the ACC the current speed can
be programmed as the “control speed”.
During driving, control can be operated at
any time and the speed also modified.
The following settings can also be adjusted:
●
Distance.
●
Driving Programme.
●
Driving style.
Activating/Deactivating
Any speed
1)
between 30 and 210 km/h (19
and 150 mph) can be adjusted.
Activating the ACC
●
Pull the lever to position
1
›
›
› Fig. 200
.
ACC standby will be shown on the instrument
panel display.
Programme speed and activate control
●
Press the
SET
›
›
› Fig. 201
button to pro-
gramme current speed.
●
Automatic gearbox: apply the brake pedal
to activate control with the vehicle stationary.
Deactivating the ACC
●
Move the lever to position
0
until it en-
g
ag
e
s. The text ACC: off appears.
Altering speed
●
To increase or reduce speed step by step,
press the lever up/down briefly
›››
Fig. 201.
1)
Different speed limits apply in each country and
depend on the unit indic
ated on the speedometer.
200
Driver assistance systems
Any modification to the programmed speed
i
s
sho
wn on the bottom left part of the instru-
ment panel display.
Adjusting distance level
The distance according to speed with regard
to the vehicle in front can be controlled on
the Easy Connect system on 5 levels
›››
page 27.
In wet road conditions, you should always set
a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in
front than when driving in dry conditions.
The following distances can be preselected:
●
Very short
●
Short
●
Media
●
Long
●
Very long
You can use the Easy Connect system to ad-
just the level of distance that should be ad-
justed when the ACC is switched on with the
button and the
S
ETUP
and
Driv
er a
s
sistance
function buttons ›
›
›
page 27.
Adjusting the driving programme
In vehicles with driving profile selection
(SEAT Drive Profile), the profile selected can
influence acceleration behaviour
››› page 219.
The following driving programmes items can
be selected:
●
Normal
●
Sport
●
Eco
In vehicles without the driving profile selec-
tion function, acceleration behaviour can be
influenced by selecting a driving programme
on the Easy Connect system using the
button and the
S
ETUP
and
Driv
er a
s
sistance
function buttons ›
›
›
page 27.
The following conditions may lead the ACC
not to react:
●
If the accelerator is pressed.
●
If there is no gear engaged.
●
If the ESC is controlling.
●
If the driver is not wearing his/her seat
belt.
●
If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
trically connected trailer are damaged.
●
If the vehicle is reversing.
●
Driving faster than 210 km/h (150 mph).
WARNING
There is a danger of rear collision when the
minimum dist
ance to the vehicle in front is
exceeded and the speed difference between
both vehicles is so great that a speed reduc-
tion by the ACC will not suffice. In this case
the brake ped
al should be applied immedi-
ately.
●
The ACC may not be able to detect all situa-
tions properly.
●
“Stepping” on the accelerator may cause
the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver
braking will have priority over intervention by
the speed control or adaptive cruise control.
●
Always be ready to use the brakes!
●
Observe country-specific provisions gov-
erning obligatory minimum distances be-
tween vehicles.
Note
●
The programmed s
peed is erased once the
ignition or the ACC are switched off.
●
When the traction control system (ASR) is
deactivated during acceleration or else the
ESC is activated in Sport* Mode
(››› page 110), the ACC switches off automati-
cally.
●
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the
engine switches off automatically during the
ACC stopping phase and restarts automatical-
ly to begin driving.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic
g
e
arbo
x, the ACC can brake the vehicle until
»
201
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it
s
t
op
s.
The ACC will still be available for a few sec-
onds. The vehicle will restart by itself if the
vehicle in front moves (traffic jam assistant).
Disconnection criteria
The ACC will switch off if the driver applies
the brake pedal or the driver's door is
opened.
Restarting the vehicle with the ACC manually
The ACC can be activated again by moving
the lever to position
2
›
›
› Fig. 202
.
CAUTION
●
If y
our vehicle with ACC does not start up
as expected, you can drive off by briefly step-
ping on the accelerator.
●
The Start-Stop system usually acts if you
are driving with ACC.
Interrupting control
Fig. 202 On the left of the steering column:
thir
d l
ev
er for operating the Adaptive Cruise
Control.
Important: the ACC is active.
Int
erruptin
g c
ontrol during driving
●
Move the lever to the position
3
. The A
CC
s
t
andby message is displayed to the driver.
or
●
Brake.
●
To resume the programmed speed, turn the
lever to position
2
.
Int
errupt
s
peed control with the vehicle sta-
tionary
Applies to vehicles with automatic gearbox:
●
Move the lever to the position
3
. The A
CC
s
t
andby message is displayed to the driver.
●
To resume control, apply the brake and turn
the lever to position
2
.
WARNING
It is dangerous to activate control and resume
the programmed s
peed if the road, traffic or
weather conditions do not permit this. Risk of
accident!
Setting the distance
Fig. 203 Control lever: setting the distance.
●
To display the distance currently program-
med, briefly
pr
e
ss the rocking button
››› Fig. 203.
●
To increase/reduce the distance one level,
press the rocking button again towards the
left/right. The instrument panel display
modifies the distance between both vehicles.
If the vehicle approaches another vehicle de-
tected in front of it, the ACC reduces the
202
Driver assistance systems
speed accordingly and then controls the ad-
ju
s
t
ed distance. If the vehicle detected in
front accelerates, the adaptive cruise control
will also accelerate up to the target speed
programmed at most.
The greater the speed, the greater the dis-
tance in metres should be ›››
. We recom-
mend the settin
g
Di
stance 3.
WARNING
With regard to distance setting, the driver is
res
ponsible for observing country-specific
legislation.
Driver messages
ACC not available
The sy
stem can no longer continue to guar-
antee safe vehicle detection and will be de-
activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is
damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised
workshop and have the fault repaired.
ACC: currently not available. No sensor vi-
sion
ACC and Front Assist: currently not availa-
ble. No sensor vision
This message will be displayed to the driver if
the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for
example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.
Cle
an the sensor.
ACC: currently not available. Gradient too
steep
The maximum road slope has been excee-
ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be
guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on.
ACC: only available in D, S or M
Select the D/S or M position on the selector
lever.
ACC: parking brake applied
The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is
applied. The ACC is available once again after
the parking brake is released.
ACC: currently not available. Intervention
of stability control
The message for the driver is displayed when
the electronic stability control (ESC) inter-
venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically
switched off.
ACC: Take action!
The message for the driver is displayed if,
when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a
mild slope, the vehicle rolls back even al-
though the ACC is activated. Apply the brake
to stop the vehicle from moving/colliding
with another vehicle.
ACC: speed limit
The message for the driver is displayed if, in
vehicles with manual gearbox, the current
speed is too low for the ACC mode.
The speed to be stored must be at least
30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter
switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h
(12 mph).
ACC: available as of the 2nd gear
The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear
(manual gearbox).
ACC: engine speed
The message for the driver is displayed if,
when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the driv-
er does not shift up or down a gear in time,
which means exceeding or not reaching the
permissible engine speed. The ACC switches
itself off. A buzzer warning is heard.
ACC: clutch pressed
Vehicles with a manual gearbox: pressing the
clutch pedal for longer abandons control
mode.
Door open
Vehicles with automatic gearbox: the ACC
cannot be activated with the vehicle station-
ary and the door open.
203
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Function to avoid overtaking on the
wr
on
g s
ide
Fig. 204 On the instrument panel display:
A
C
C
active, vehicle detected in an outer lane
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a func-
tion th
at
help
s avoid overtaking while driving
in inside lanes at certain speeds.
If another vehicle is detected travelling at a
slower speed in an outer lane, it is displayed
on the multifunction display ››› Fig. 204.
To avoid overtaking while driving in an inside
lane the system will gently brake, and in ac-
cordance with the speed will prevent the car
from overtaking. The driver can interrupt this
intervention at any time.
Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol ACC temporarily in certain situa-
tions
In the following situations the Adaptive
Cruise C
ontrol (ACC) should be deactivated
due to the system's limitations ›››
:
●
When changing lanes, on tight bends and
round
abouts, in acceleration and decelera-
tion lanes on motorways or in sections with
road works to prevent involuntary accelera-
tion to reach the programmed speed.
●
When going through a tunnel, as operation
coul
d be affected.
●
On roads with several lanes, when other ve-
hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-
ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be
overtaken on the right.
●
In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the
vehicle in front might not be detected proper-
ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be
detected at all.
WARNING
If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-
tions de
scribed, serious accidents and inju-
ries may occur.
●
Always switch off the ACC in critical situa-
tions.
Note
If you do not switch off the ACC in the afore-
mentioned situation
s, you may commit a le-
gal offence.
204
Driver assistance systems
Special driving situations
Fig. 205 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy-
c
li
s
t ahead out of range of the radar sensor.
Fig. 206 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One
v
ehic
l
e turning and another stationary.
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has certain
ph
y
s
ical limitations inherent in the system.
For example, certain reactions of the ACC, in
certain circumstances, may be unexpected or
come late from the driver's point of view. So
pay attention in order to intervene if necessa-
ry.
For example, the following traffic situations
call for the utmost attention:
Starting driving after a stopping phase (only
vehicles with automatic gearbox)
After a stopping phase the ACC may begin
driving automatically when the vehicle in
front drives off.
Overtaking
When the turn signal lights up before the ve-
hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the
ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically
and thus reduces the distance from the vehi-
cle in front.
When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane,
if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in
front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro-
grammed speed and maintains it.
System acceleration can be interrupted at
any time by pressing the brake or moving the
third lever backwards ››› page 200.
Driving through a bend
On entering or exiting bends, the radar sen-
sor may no longer determine the vehicle in
front or react to a vehicle in the adjacent lane
››› Fig. 205 A. In these situations the vehicle
may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to re-
act to the vehicle in front. In this case, the
driver has to intervene by accelerating or in-
terrupting the braking process by applying
the brake or pushing the third lever back-
wards ››› page 200.
Driving in tunnels
When driving through tunnels the radar sen-
sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-
nels.
»
205
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Narrow or misaligned vehicles
The r
a
d
ar sensor can only detect narrow or
misaligned vehicles when they are within
range ››› Fig. 205 B. This applies particularly
to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In
these cases, you should brake as necessary.
Vehicles with special loads and accessories
Special loads and accessories of other vehi-
cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or
over the top may be out of the ACC's range.
Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi-
cles with special loads and accessories or
when overtaking them. In these cases, you
should brake as necessary.
Other vehicles changing lanes
Vehicles changing lanes a short distance
away from your own can only be detected
when they are within range of the sensors.
Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re-
act ››› Fig. 206 C. In these cases, you should
brake as necessary.
Stationary vehicles
The ACC does not detect stationary objects
while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged
vehicles.
If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or
moves over and there is a stationary vehicle
in front of it, the ACC will not react to it
››› Fig. 206 D. In these cases, you should
brake as necessary.
Vehicles driving in the opposite direction
and vehicles crossing your path
The ACC does not react to vehicles approach-
ing from the opposite direction or vehicles
crossing your path.
Metal objects
Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets
used in road works, can confuse the radar
sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.
Factors that may affect how the radar sensor
operates
If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to
heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is
deactivated temporarily. The relevant text
message will appear in the dash panel dis-
play. If necessary, clean the radar sensor.
When the radar sensor begins to operate
properly again, the ACC will automatically be
available again. The message on the instru-
ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC
will be reactivated again.
ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-
dar reverse reflection, for example in a closed
car park.
Trailer mode
When driving with trailer the ACC controls
less dynamically.
Overheated brakes
If the brakes overheat, for example after
abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,
the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. The
relevant text message will appear in the dash
panel display. In this case, adaptive cruise
control cannot be activated.
Adaptive cruise control can be reactivated
once brake temperature has cooled suffi-
ciently. The message will disappear from the
instrument panel display. If the message ACC
not available remains on for quite a long
time it means that there is a fault. Contact a
specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-
iting a SEAT dealership.
WARNING
If the message ACC ready to start ap-
pears
on the instrument panel display and
the vehicle in front starts up, the vehicle will
start up automatically. In this case the radar
sensor may not detect obstacles on the road.
This could cause an accident and serious in-
juries.
●
Before driving off, check that the road is
clear. If necessary, apply the brake.
206
Driver assistance systems
Front Assist system including
C
ity
emer
gency braking and
pedestrian monitoring*
Introduction
›››
table on page 2
The Front Assist system including City emer-
gency braking and pedestrian monitoring can
help avoid collisions.
The Front Assist system may warn the driver,
within the constraints of the system, of im-
pending collisions, prepare the vehicle for
emergency braking in case of danger, provide
support during braking and apply automatic
braking.
The City emergency braking and pedestrian
monitoring functions are an integral part of
the Front Assist system.
The Front Assist is not a replacement for
driver awareness.
Distance warning
If the system detects that safety is endan-
gered by the proximity of the vehicle in front,
it may warn the driver by means of a message
on the instrument panel when driving at a
speed of between approximately 60 km/h
(37 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph)
››› Fig. 207.
The warning moment varies depending on
the traffic s
ituation and driver behaviour.
Advance warning
If the system detects a possible collision with
the vehicle in front, it may warn the driver by
means of an audible warning and an indica-
tion on the instrument panel when driving at
a speed of between approximately 30 km/h
(18 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph)
››› Fig. 207.
The warning moment varies depending on
the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At
the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a
possible emergency braking ›››
.
C
ritic
a
l warning
If the driver fails to react to the advance
warning, the system may actively intervene in
the brakes when driving at a speed of be-
tween approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) and
250 km/h (156 mph), generating a brief jolt
to warn of the imminent collision.
Automatic braking
If the driver also fails to react to the advance
warning, the system may brake the vehicle
automatically, by progressively increasing
braking effect driving at a speed of between
approximately 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and
250 km/h (156 mph). By reducing speed in
case of a possible collision, the system may
contribute to reducing the consequences of
an accident.
Front assist
If the Front Assist notices that the driver is
not braking sufficiently in case of a collision
hazard, the system can increase braking ef-
fect and thus avert the collision when driving
at a speed of between approximately 4 km/h
(2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Front
assist only acts while the brake pedal is
pressed down hard.
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the Front Assist
cannot c
hange the laws of physics. The driver
is always responsible for braking in time. If
the Front Assist issues a warning, then, de-
pending on the traffic circumstances, you
must brake immediately or dodge the obsta-
cle.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-
bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
●
The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-
dents and serious injuries.
●
In complex driving situations, the Front As-
sist may issue unnecessary warnings and in-
tervene unnecessarily in braking, such as in
traffic islands.
●
If the operation of the Front Assist is im-
paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra-
dar sensor has lost its settings, the system
»
207
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
may issue unnecessary warnings and
interv
ene inopportunely in the braking.
●
During driving, the Front Assist does not re-
act to people or animals or vehicles crossing
your path or which approach you head-on in
the same lane.
●
The driver must always be ready to take
over the control of the vehicle.
Note
●
When the Fr
ont As
sist causes a braking,
the brake pedal is “harder”.
●
Automatic interventions by the Front Assist
on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing
the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.
●
If the Front Assist does not work as descri-
bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several
times unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the
system checked by a specialised workshop.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.
On-screen warning lamps and mes-
s
ag
e
s
Fig. 207 On the instrument panel display:
W
arnin
g indic
ations.
Distance warning
If
the s
af
e distance with regard to the vehicle
in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will
appear on the instrument panel display
.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Warning
and contro
l lamps on page 109.
Note
When the Front Assist is connected, the indi-
cations
on the instrument panel screen may
be concealed by warnings from other func-
tions, such as an incoming call.
Radar sensor
Fig. 208 On the front bumper: radar sensor.
A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-
er t
o det
ermine the tr
affic situation
››› Fig. 208
1
. This sensor can detect vehi-
c
l
e
s in front up to a distance of approximately
120 m.
The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired
by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-
fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the
Front Assist monitoring system does not
work. The instrument panel displays the fol-
lowing message: Front Assist: No
sensor vision! If necessary clean the ra-
dar sensor ›››
.
When the r
a
d
ar sensor begins to operate
properly again, the Front Assist will automati-
cally be available again. The message will
disappear from the instrument panel display.
208
Driver assistance systems
Front Assist operation may be affected by a
s
tr
on
g radar reverse reflection. This may oc-
cur, for example, in a closed car park or due
to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails
on the road or sheets used in road works).
The area in front of and around the radar sen-
sor should not be covered with adhesives,
additional or similar headlights, as this may
negatively affect Front Assist operation.
If structural modifications are made to the ve-
hicle, for example, if the suspension is low-
ered or the front spoiler is modified, Front As-
sist operation may be affected. So structural
modifications should only be made by speci-
alised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting
a SEAT dealership for this purpose.
If work is done incorrectly on the front of the
vehicle, the radar sensor could be damaged
or lose its settings, and Front Assist opera-
tion may be affected. So repair work should
only be made by specialised workshops.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
for this purpose.
CAUTION
If you have the sensation that the radar sen-
sor is d
amaged or has lost its settings, dis-
connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos-
sible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.
●
The sensor may become damaged or lose
its settings when knocked, for example, dur-
ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-
mise the sys
tem's efficacy or disconnect it.
●
Repairs to the radar sensor require special-
ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-
pose.
●
Clean away the snow with a brush and the
ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer
spray.
Operating the Front Assist monitoring
syst
em
Fig. 209 On the instrument panel display:
Fr
ont
As
sist switched off message.
Front Assist is active whenever the ignition is
sw
it
c
hed on.
When the Front Assist is switched off, so too
are the advance warning function (pre warn-
ing) and the distance warning.
SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-
ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 210,
Switch Front Assist off in the following situa-
tions.
Activating and deactivating Front Assist
With the ignition switched on, the Front As-
sist can be switched on and off as follows:
●
Select the corresponding menu option us-
ing the button for the driver assistance sys-
tems ›››
page 31.
●
OR: switch the system on and off in Easy
Connect using the
button and the
Set
up
and
Driv
er a
s
sistance
function buttons
›
›
›
page 27.
When Front Assist is switched off, the instru-
ment panel will inform that it has been
switched off with the following indicator
››› Fig. 209.
Switching the advance warning function on
or off
The advance warning function may be switch-
ed on and off in the Easy Connect system us-
ing the
button and the
Set
up
and
Driv
er a
s
sistance
function buttons
›
›
›
page 27.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping the advance
warning function switched on at all times.
»
209
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Depending on the infotainment system in-
s
t
al
led in the vehicle, the advance warning
function may be adjusted as follows:
●
Ready
●
Medium
●
Delayed
●
Deactivated
SEAT recommends driving with the function
in “Medium” mode.
Switching distance warning on and off
If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle
in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will
appear on the instrument panel display
. In this case, increase the safe dis-
tance.
The distance warning may be switched on
and off in the Easy Connect system using
the
button and the
S
ETUP
and
Driv
er a
s
sistance
function buttons
›
›
›
page 27.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping the distance
warning switched on at all times.
Switch Front Assist off in the following
situations
In the following situations the Front Assist
Monitoring
System should be deactivated
due to the system's limitations ›››
:
●
When the vehicle is to be towed.
●
If the vehicle is on a test bed.
●
When the radar sensor is damaged.
●
If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for
examp
le in a rear collision.
●
If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
●
If the radar sensor is covered temporarily
with some kind of
accessory, such as an ad-
ditional headlight or the like.
●
When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,
ferry or train.
WARNING
If the Front Assist is not switched off in the
situation
s described, serious accidents and
injuries may occur.
●
Switch off the Front Assist in critical situa-
tions.
System limitations
Front Assist has certain physical limitations
inher
ent
in the sy
stem. Thus, in certain cir-
cumstances some of the system's reactions
may be inopportune or be delayed from the
driver's standpoint. So pay attention in order
to intervene if necessary.
The following conditions may cause Front As-
sist not to react or to do so too late:
●
On taking tight bends.
●
Pressing the accelerator all the way down.
●
If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-
aged.
●
If the ASR has been manually disconnec-
ted.
●
If the ESC is controlling.
●
If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
trically connected trailer are damaged.
●
If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
●
If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the
road or sheets used in road works.
●
If the vehicle is reversing.
●
If the vehicle over-accelerates.
●
In case of snow or heavy rain.
●
In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-
bikes.
●
Misaligned vehicles.
●
Vehicles crossing the other's path.
●
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-
tion.
210
Driver assistance systems
●
S
pec
i
al loads and accessories of other ve-
hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards
or over the top.
City Emergency braking function
Fig. 210 On the instrument panel display: ad-
v
anc
e w
arning message
The City emergency braking function is part
of
Fr
ont
Assist and is active whenever the
system is switched on.
Depending on the equipment, the City emer-
gency braking function may be switched on
and off in the Easy Connect system using
the
button and the
S
ETUP
and
Driv
er a
s
sistance
function buttons
›
›
›
page 27.
The City Emergency braking function picks
up, at speeds between approximately 4 km/h
(2.5 mph) and 30 km/h (19 mph), the traffic
situation in front of the vehicle.
If the system detects a possible collision with
a vehicle in front of it, the vehicle prepares
for a possible emergency braking ›››
.
If
the driv
er f
ails to react to a possible colli-
sion, the system may brake the vehicle auto-
matically, by progressively increasing braking
effect driving to reduce speed in the event of
a collision. The system can thus help to re-
duce the consequences of an accident.
Status display
Automatic deceleration by means of the City
Emergency braking function is displayed on
the instrument panel by means of the ad-
vance warning ››› Fig. 210
1)
.
WARNING
The smart technology included in the City
Emergency
braking function cannot defy the
laws of physics. The driver is always respon-
sible for braking in time.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-
bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
●
The City Emer
gency braking function alone
cannot prevent accidents or serious injury.
●
In complex driving situations, the City
Emergency braking function may issue unnec-
essary warnings and intervene inopportunely
in braking, such as in work areas or if there
are metal rails.
●
If the operation of the City Emergency brak-
ing function is impaired, for example, by dirt
or because the radar sensor has lost its set-
tings, the system may issue unnecessary
warnings and intervene inopportunely in the
braking.
●
During driving, the City Emergency braking
function does not react to people or animals
or vehicles crossing your path or which ap-
proach you head-on in the same lane.
Note
●
When the City Emer
gency braking function
causes a braking, the brake pedal is “hard-
er”.
●
Automatic interventions on the brakes by
the City Emergency braking function may be
interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelera-
tor or moving the wheel.
●
The City Emergency braking function can
brake the vehicle until it stops completely.
However, the brake system does not halt the
vehicle permanently. Use the foot brake!
»
1)
The symbol on the instrument panels with colour
disp
lay is in colour.
211
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
●
If sever
al inopportune intervenes occur,
switch off the Front Assist and with it the City
Emergency braking function. Take it to a spe-
cialised workshop, SEAT recommends visiting
a SEAT dealership.
●
If numerous unnecessary interventions oc-
cur, the City Emergency braking function may
switch off automatically.
Pedestrian Monitoring*
1)
Fig. 211 On the instrument panel display:
Adv
anc
e w
arning message. Pedestrian
Monitoring deactivated.
The pedestrian monitoring system can help
pr
ev
ent
accidents involving pedestrians or
reduce the consequences of an accident.
The system warns of danger of collision, pre-
pares the vehicle for emergency braking, as-
sists in the braking and brakes automatically.
If the system detects a possible collision with
a pedestrian, it warns the driver with an
acoustic signal and a message on the dash
panel display ››› Fig. 211.
The pedestrian monitoring system, including
the advance warning, is automatically con-
nected when the ignition is switched on
››› page 167.
SEAT recommends always having the pedes-
trian monitoring system connected. The ex-
ceptions set out for the Front Assist system
are equally valid for the pedestrian monitor-
ing system ››› page 210.
Switching the pedestrian monitoring system
on and off
With the ignition on, the pedestrian monitor-
ing system can be switched on and off as fol-
lows:
●
Switch the system on and off in the info-
tainment system using the
button and
the
S
ETUP
and
Driv
er a
s
sistance
function but-
t
on
s
›››
page 27.
When the pedestrian protection system is
switched off, the dash panel display shows a
message indicating this ››› Fig. 211 . The
pedestrian monitoring system is switched off
with the Front Assist function.
WARNING
The technology in the pedestrian monitoring
syst
em cannot defy the laws of physics and
only works within the system's limits. The
driver is always responsible for braking in
time. If the pedestrian monitoring system is-
sues a warning, brake the vehicle immediate-
ly with the brake pedal or swerve to avoid the
pedestrian, depending on traffic conditions.
●
The pedestrian monitoring system alone
cannot avoid accidents or serious injury.
●
In complex driving situations, the pedes-
trian monitoring system may issue unneces-
sary warnings and intervene unnecessarily in
braking, such as in main roads with turnings.
●
If the operation of the system is impaired,
for example, because the radar sensor and
camera are covered or have lost their set-
tings, the system may issue unnecessary
warnings and intervene inopportunely in the
braking.
●
The driver must always be ready to take
over the control of the vehicle.
1)
Depending on the vehicle equipment, pedestrian
monitoring i
s not available in all countries.
212
Driver assistance systems
Note
●
When the vehic
le is braked via the pedes-
trian monitoring system, the brake pedal be-
comes stiffer.
●
Automatic interventions by the pedestrian
monitoring system on the brakes may be in-
terrupted by pressing the accelerator or mov-
ing the wheel.
●
If the pedestrian monitoring system does
not work as described in this chapter (e.g. if
it intervening unnecessarily several times),
switch if off, contact a specialist workshop
immediately and request to have the system
checked. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
Lane Assist system*
Intr
oduction
›››
table on page 2
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the Lane Assist
syst
em cannot change the limits imposed by
the laws of physics and by the very nature of
the system. Careless or uncontrolled use of
the Lane Assist system may cause accidents
and injury. The system is not a replacement
for driver awareness.
●
Alwa
ys adapt your speed and the distance
to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,
weather conditions, the condition of the road
and the traffic situation.
●
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel so it can be turned at any time.
●
The Lane Assist system does not detect all
road markings. The road surfaces, road struc-
tures or objects in poor condition can be in-
correctly detected as road markings under
certain circumstances by the Lane Assist sys-
tem. In such situations, switch the Lane As-
sist system off immediately.
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
●
Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-
roundings.
●
When the area of vision of the camera be-
comes dirty, covered or is damaged, the Lane
Assist system function can be affected.
CAUTION
In order to avoid influencing the operation of
the syst
em, the following points must be tak-
en into account:
●
Regularly clean the area of vision of the
camera and keep it in a clean state, without
snow or ice.
●
Do not cover the area of vision of the cam-
era.
●
Check that the area of vision of the wind-
screen camera is not damaged.
Note
●
The Lane Assi
st system has been exclusive-
ly developed for driving on paved roads only.
●
If the Lane Assist system does not work as
described in this chapter, do not use it and
contact a specialised workshop.
●
If there is a fault in the system, have it
checked by a specialised workshop.
213
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Indications on the display and lamps
Fig. 212 On the instrument panel display: In-
dic
ation on the Lane As
s
ist system display
(example 1).
Fig. 213 On the instrument panel display: In-
dic
ation on the Lane As
s
ist system display
(example 2).
Status display
The sy
s
t
em is active, but not available,
either because the minimum speed has
not been reached or because the lane
lines are not recognised ››› Fig. 212 A.
The system is active and available, both
lane lines are recognised. The steering
angle is not being corrected at this mo-
ment ››› Fig. 212 B.
–
–
The system is operational, the highligh-
ted line
A
indicates that there was a
ri
sk
of
involuntarily crossing the lane
line and that the steering is being adjus-
ted to correct the angle ››› Fig. 213 C.
The two lines
A
light up simultaneously
when both l
ane line
s
are recognised and
the Lane Assist function is active
››› Fig. 213 D.
Control lamps
Blinks or lights up yellow: Lane Assist
active but not available.
The system can not accurately recognise the lane.
Please see page 215, the Lane Assist system is not
available (the control lamp is lit up yellow).
Blinks or lights up green:
Lane Assist system active and available.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›››
in Warning
and contro
l lamps on page 109.
–
–
214
Driver assistance systems
Operation
Fig. 214 In the windscreen: field of vision of
the Lane As
s
i
st system camera.
Using the camera located in the windscreen,
the Lane As
s
i
st system detects the possible
lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in-
voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has
detected, the system notifies the driver with
a corrective steering movement. This move-
ment can be over-regulated at any time.
No warning is produced with the turn signals
activated, given that the Lane Assist system
understands that a lane change is required.
Steering wheel vibration
The following situations can cause vibration
in the steering wheel and require the driver
to take active control of driving:
●
When the limits of the very nature of the
system are reached.
●
When the maximum rotational torque dur-
ing the corrective steering movement is not
enough to keep the vehicle inside the lane.
●
When no lane is detected during the correc-
tive steering movement.
Switching the Lane Assist system on or off
Through the Easy Connect system
●
Press the Easy Connect button
.
●
Press the
S
ETUP
function button.
●
Press the function button
driv
er a
s
sistance
to
open the menu.
OR: thr
ough the driving assist b
utt
on
on the turn signal level*.
The Lane centring guide is activa-
ted/deactivated in the Easy Connect system
using the
button and the
S
ETUP
function
b
utt
on ›
›› page 110.
Self-deactivation: the Lane Assist system can
be automatically deactivated if there is a sys-
tem malfunction. The control lamp disap-
pears.
Hands-Off Function
●
In the absence of steering wheel activity
the system alerts the driver with acoustic sig-
nals and a text message on the dash panel
asking to actively take over the steering.
●
If the driver does not react to this, the sys-
tem also alerts the driver with a little shaking
motion through the brakes and, if the vehicle
has it, activates the Emergency Assist func-
tion ››› page 217.
●
In vehicles without Emergency Assist, the
adaptive lane guidance function will be disa-
bled after the corresponding warnings to the
driver.
The lane assist system is active but it is not
available (the control lamp is lit up yellow)
●
When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38
mph).
●
When the Lane Assist system does not de-
tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-
ple, in the event warnings indicating road
works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflec-
tions.
●
When the radius of a curve is too small.
●
When no road markings can be seen.
●
When the distance to the next marking to
too great.
●
When the system does not detect any clear
and active steering movement during a long
period of time.
●
Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic
driving styles.
●
If a turn signal is activated.
●
With the stability control system (ESC) in
Sport mode or switched off.
»
215
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Note
●
Befor
e starting a journey, verify that the
field of vision of the camera is not covered
››› Fig. 214.
●
Always keep the field of vision of the cam-
era clean.
Switching off the Lane Assist system
in the fol
lowing situations
Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system,
sw
it
c
h it off in the following situations:
●
When more attention is required of the
driver
●
When driving in a sporty style
●
In unfavourable weather conditions
●
On roads in poor condition
●
In areas of road works
Note
The Lane Assist system deactivates when
driving belo
w 60 km/h (37 mph).
Traffic Jam Assist
D
e
s
cription and operation
›››
table on page 2
Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep the
car within its
lane and to move in convoy in
case of traffic congestion or slow traffic.
Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function of
Lane Assist ››› page 213 and combines Lane
Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) ››› page 196. Therefore, it is essential
that you read these two chapters carefully
and note the limitations of the systems and
the information about them.
Operation of Traffic Jam Assist
At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), Traffic
Jam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis-
tance preset by the driver with respect to the
vehicle ahead and help stay within the lane
›››
.
T
o do thi
s, the sy
stem automatically controls
the acceleration, brakes and steering, and
slows down the vehicle until it stops fully
when behind another vehicle that is stop-
ping. It then automatically moves off again
when the car in front does so.
Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use on
motorways and wide roads. Therefore, never
use it in city traffic.
Switching Traffic Jam Assist on and off
If Lane Assist is on,
›››
page 213 Traffic Jam
Assist is switched on and off in the infotain-
ment system using the
button and the
SETUP
and
Driv
er a
s
sistance
function buttons
›
›
›
page 27.
It is activated by switching on Lane Assist
and the lane centring guide in the infotain-
ment system. If the lane centring guide is not
active, the Traffic Jam Assist system is not ac-
tive
Traffic Jam Assist may be disconnected using
the button for driver assistance systems to-
gether with Lane Assist ›››
page 31.
Technical requirements for using Traffic Jam
Assist
●
Lane Assist must be activated ››› page 213,
Lane Assist system*.
●
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be con-
nected and active ››› page 196.
●
The selector lever must be in the D/S posi-
tion or in the Tiptronic selection track.
●
The speed must be below 60 km/h
(38 mph).
●
The lane centring guide must be active
››› page 215.
Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane As-
sist control light turns yellow)
●
If any of the conditions mentioned on
page 216, Technical requirements for using
Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met.
216
Driver assistance systems
●
If
an
y
of the conditions required for opera-
tion of the Lane Assist are not met
››› page 213.
●
If any of the conditions necessary for the
adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no
longer fulfilled ››› page 196.
Situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must
be switched off
Due to the limitations of the system, Traffic
Jam Assist must always be switched off in the
following situations:
●
When more attention is required by the
driver.
●
When driving in a very sporty style.
●
In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in case
of snow or heavy rain.
●
When driving on roads in poor condition.
●
In sections with roadworks.
●
In city journeys.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into Traf-
fic Jam Ass
ist cannot defy the laws of phys-
ics; it only works within the limits of the sys-
tem. Accidents and severe injury may occur if
Traffic Jam Assist is used negligently or invol-
untarily. The system is not a replacement for
driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Do not u
se Traffic Jam Assist in city jour-
neys.
●
Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there is poor
visibility, for example, in case of snow, ice,
rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slippery
sections or flooded roads.
●
Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or on
roads where the surface is not firm. Traffic
Jam Assist has been designed for use on
paved roads only.
●
Traffic Jam Assist does not react to people
or animals or vehicles crossing your path or
that approach you head-on down the same
lane.
●
If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce speed
sufficiently, brake the vehicle immediately by
applying the pedal.
●
If the vehicle continues to move when you
wish it to stop after a driver intervention
prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the
pedal.
●
If driver intervention is requested on the
dash panel display, immediately resume con-
trol of the vehicle.
●
Keep your hands on the wheel at all times
to be ready to intervene in the steering at any
time. The driver is always responsible for
keeping the vehicle in its own lane.
●
Always be prepared to take charge of driv-
ing (accelerating or braking) yourself.
Note
●
If T
raffic Jam Assist does not work as de-
scribed in this chapter, stop using it and con-
tact a specialised workshop.
●
If the system is faulty, take it to a special-
ised workshop and have it checked.
Emergency Assist
Des
cription and operation
Emergency Assist detects whether there is in-
activ
ity
b
y the driver and can automatically
keep the car within the lane and stop it alto-
gether if necessary. This way the system can
actively help avoid an accident.
Emergency Assist is an additional function of
Lane Assist
›››
page 213 and combines Lane
Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)
›››
page 196. Therefore, it is essential
that you read these two chapters carefully
and note the limitations of the systems and
the information about them.
Operation of Emergency Assist
Emergency Assist detects when the driver
ceases to perform any activity and repeatedly
requests that he/she regain active control of
the vehicle, through the use of optical and
acoustic warnings and by applying the
brakes.
»
217
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys-
t
em aut
om
atically takes over the accelerator,
brakes and steering in order to brake the ve-
hicle and keep it in its lane ›››
. If the re-
m
ainin
g br
aking distance is sufficient, if nec-
essary the system slows down the vehicle un-
til it stops completely and automatically
switches on the electronic parking brake
››› page 172.
When the Emergency Assist is actively adjust-
ing, the hazard warning lights come on
››› page 135 and the vehicle makes slight zig-
zag movements in the lane in order to warn
other drivers.
Switching the Emergency Assist on and off
The Emergency Assist is switched on auto-
matically when the Lane Assist is switched on
››› page 213.
Technical requirements for using the Emer-
gency Assist
●
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be
switched on ››› page 196.
●
The Lane Assist must be switched on
››› page 213.
●
The selector lever must be at the D/S posi-
tion or in the Tiptronic selection track.
●
The system must have detected a lane sep-
aration line on both sides of the vehicle
››› Fig. 213.
The following conditions may cause the
Emergency Assist not to react or to switch off
automatically:
●
If the driver accelerates, brakes or moves
the steering wheel.
●
If any of the conditions mentioned in
››› page 218, Technical requirements for us-
ing the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled.
●
If any of the conditions required for opera-
tion of the Lane Assist are not met
››› page 213.
●
If any of the conditions necessary for the
adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no
longer fulfilled ››› page 196.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into the
Emergency
Assist cannot overcome the limits
imposed by the laws of physics; it only works
within the limits of the system. The driver is
responsible for driving the vehicle.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Keep your hands on the wheel at all times
to be ready to intervene in the steering at any
time.
●
The Emergency Assist alone cannot always
avoid accidents or serious injuries.
●
If the operation of the Emergency Assist is
impaired, for example if the radar sensor of
the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the Lane
Assi
st camera are covered or have lost their
settings, the system may intervene inoppor-
tunely in braking or in steering.
●
The Emergency Assist does not react to
people or animal or vehicles crossing your
path or which approach you head-on in the
same lane.
WARNING
If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-
t
unely
, serious accidents and injuries may oc-
cur.
●
If the Emergency Assist does not operate
properly, switch off the Lane Assist
››› page 213. Doing so will also switch off the
Emergency Assist.
●
Have the system checked by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
Note
●
Automatic
interventions by the Emergency
Assist on the brakes may be interrupted by
pressing the accelerator or brake or by mov-
ing the wheel.
●
Hazard warning lights that come on auto-
matically can be switched off by pressing the
accelerator or the break, moving the steering
wheel or pressing the hazard warning light
switch.
218
Driver assistance systems
●
If this
occurs, the Emergency Assist may
decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a com-
plete stop.
●
When the Emergency Assist is activated, it
is only available again after the ignition has
been switched off and back on again.
SEAT Drive Profile*
Introduction
›››
table on page 2
SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to
choose between four profiles or modes, Nor-
mal, Sport, Eco and Individual, that
modify the behaviour of various vehicle func-
tions, providing different driving experiences.
In the FR and X-PERIENCE models equipped
with dynamic chassis control, the Comfort
profile is also available.
In the Leon Cupra model the four profiles are
Comfort, Sport, Cupra and Individual.
The Individual profile can be configured
according to personal preferences. The other
profiles are fixed.
Description
Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-
hicle,
SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the
following functions:
Engine
Depending on the profile selected, the en-
gine responds more spontaneously or more
in harmony with the movements of the accel-
erator. Additionally, when Eco mode is selec-
ted, the Start-stop function is automatically
activated.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
gear change points are modified to position
them in lower or higher engine speed ranges.
Additionally, the Eco
1)
mode activates the In-
ertia function, enabling consumption to be
further reduced.
In manual gearbox vehicles, Eco
1)
mode cau-
ses the gear change recommendation indica-
tions that appear on the instrument panel to
vary, facilitating more efficient driving.
Dynamic chassis control (DCC)
››› table on page 2
DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb-
ers t
o the condition of the road and current
driving conditions, according to the pre-set
programme.
In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow-
ing message is displayed on the instrument
screen Fault: damping setting.
Address
Power steering becomes more robust in
Sport mode to enable a sportier driving
style. In the Leon Cupra the power steering
becomes more robust in Cupra mode.
Air conditioning
In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate
in eco
1)
mode, especially restricting fuel con-
sumption.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
2)
According to the active driving profile, the ac-
celeration gradient of the adaptive cruise
control varies.
Electronic self-locking differential
2)
The self-locking differential adapts its behav-
iour depending on the driving profile chosen.
»
1)
In the Leon Cupra model, Eco
mode is selected
through the Individual profile.
2)
Applies to the Leon Cupra model.
219
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Normal mode or Cupra mode can be selected
t
o prioriti
se impr
oved traction in sport driv-
ing.
Setting driving mode
Fig. 215 Centre console: MODE button.
You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco
and Individual.
Y
ou c
an sel
ect the required mode either by
repeatedly pressing the button MODE
›››
Fig. 215, or on the touch screen, in the
menu that opens when the above button is
pressed.
An icon on the Easy Connect system display
informs about the active mode.
The MODE button light remains lit up yellow
when the active mode is different to Normal.
Driving
profile
Characteristics
Normal
Offers a balanced driving experience, suit-
able for everyday use.
Sport
Provides a complete dynamic performance
in the vehicle, enabling the user a more
sporty driving style.
Eco
Places the vehicle in a particularly low
state of consumption, facilitating a fuel-
saving driving style that is respectful to
the environment.
Individ-
ual
Enables some configurations to be modi-
fied by pressing the Profile settings
button. The functions that can be adjusted
depend on the equipment fitted in the ve-
hicle.
Conven-
ience
a)
It permits more relaxed and comfortable
driving, for example for long motorway
journeys. Its main characteristic is the soft
suspension setting (DCC).
a)
Only for FR and X-PERIENCE models equipped with dynamic
chassis control.
WARNING
When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten-
tion to al
l traffic: doing otherwise could cause
an accident.
Note
●
When the vehic
le is switched off it will al-
ways store the driving profile that was selec-
ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev-
erthele
ss, when the engine is restarted the
engine and the gear will not restart in its
sportier mode in order to save fuel. For en-
gine and gear to revert to a sportier mode,
select the corresponding driving profile again
on the Easy Connect system screen.
●
Your speed and driving style must always
be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic
conditions.
●
The eco mode is not available when towing
a trailer.
Setting driving mode
3 Applies to the model: Leon Cupra
Fig. 216 Centre console: Cupra Drive Profile
b
utt
on.
›››
table on page 2
220
Driver assistance systems
You can select from Convenience, Sport,
Cupra and Individual.
C
upr
a Driv
e Profile button
You can select the required mode either by
repeatedly pressing the button with the Cu-
pra logotype ››› Fig. 216, or on the touch
screen, in the menu that opens when the
above button is pressed.
An icon on the Easy Connect system display
informs about the active mode.
The light of the button with the Cupra logo-
type remains lit up only when the Cupra pro-
file is active.
Driving
profile
Characteristics
Conven-
ience
It permits more relaxed and comfortable
driving, for example for long motorway
journeys. Its main characteristic is the
soft suspension setting (DCC).
Sport
It represents the vehicle's default behav-
iour, suitable for dynamic driving.
Cupra
It gives the vehicle a decidedly sportier
nature, and makes for maximum perform-
ance.
Individ-
ual
Enables some configurations to be modi-
fied by pressing the Profile settings
button. The functions that can be adjus-
ted depend on the equipment fitted in the
vehicle.
WARNING
When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten-
tion to al
l traffic: doing otherwise could cause
an accident.
Note
●
When the vehic
le is switched off it will al-
ways store the driving profile that was selec-
ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev-
ertheless, when the engine is restarted the
engine and the gear will not restart in its
sportier mode in order to save fuel. For en-
gine and gear to revert to a sportier mode,
select the corresponding driving profile again
on the Easy Connect system screen.
●
Your speed and driving style must always
be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic
conditions.
Kick-down
The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-
c
el
er
ation to be reached.
If the eco*
›››
page 220 mode has been se-
lected in SEAT Drive Profile*, and the acceler-
ator is pressed beyond a hard point, the en-
gine power is automatically controlled to give
your vehicle maximum acceleration.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slip-
pery or w
et, the kick-down feature could
cause the driving wheels to spin, which could
result in skidding.
221
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Traffic sign detection system
Intr
oduction
The traffic sign detection system can help the
driver with inf
ormation on speed limits or if
overtaking is prohibited at that moment.
The traffic signs and additional information
detected by the system are represented on
the instrument panel display and in the visu-
al presentation of the Infotainment system
(representation of the navigation system
map).
Countries in which it works
When this instruction manual went to print,
the traffic sign detection system was operat-
ing in the following countries:
Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia,
Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Lux-
embourg, the Netherlands, Norway, Poland,
Portugal, Romania, San Marino, Slovakia,
Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, the
United Kingdom and the Vatican City.
WARNING
The technology in the traffic sign detection
syst
em cannot change the limits imposed by
the laws of physics and only works within the
system's limits. Do not let the extra conven-
ience afforded by the traffic sign detection
system tempt you into taking any risks when
driving.
The system is not a replacement for
driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog
may lead to the system failing to display traf-
fic signs or not displaying them correctly.
●
If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-
ered or damaged, system operation may be
impaired.
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic indi-
cations
shown on the traffic sign detection
system may differ from the actual current
traffic situation.
●
The system may not detect or correctly
show all the traffic signs.
●
Traffic signs and traffic regulations have
priority over the recommendations and dis-
plays provided by the system.
Note
In order not to compromise the system's op-
eration, pl
ease take the following points into
account:
●
Regularly clean the area of vision of the
camera and keep it in a clean state, without
snow or ice.
●
Do not co
ver the field of vision of the cam-
era.
●
Check that the windscreen is not damaged
in the area of the camera's field of vision.
Note
●
The u
se of out
dated maps on the naviga-
tion system may cause the system to show
traffic signs incorrectly.
●
In the waypoints mode of the navigation
system, the traffic sign detection system is
only partly available.
222
Driver assistance systems
Indication on display
Fig. 217 On the instrument panel display: ex-
amp
l
e
s of speed limits or overtaking prohibi-
tions with their respective additional signs.
Speed limits or overtaking prohibitions with
their r
e
s
pective additional signs may be
shown on the instrument panel display
››› Fig. 217 and, depending on the navigation
system installed in a vehicle, also on the in-
fotainment system display ›››
page 27.
Traffic sign de-
tection system
messages
Cause and solution
There are no
traffic signs
available
The system is booting up.
OR: the camera has not recog-
nised any obligation or prohibi-
tion signs.
Error: Detec-
tion of traffic
signs
There is a fault in the system.
Have the system checked by a
specialised workshop.
Detection of
traffic signs:
Clean the wind-
screen!
The windscreen is dirty in the
camera area.
Clean the windscreen.
Traffic sign
detection is
currently limi-
ted
The navigation system is not
transmitting any data.
Check that the navigation sys-
tem has up-to-date maps.
OR: The vehicle is currently in a
region that is not included in the
navigation system's map.
Function not
available
The traffic sign detection system
does not work in the current
country.
WARNING
If messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall
in traffic and c
ause accidents and severe inju-
ries.
●
Never ignore the messages displayed.
●
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
Note
Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-
sponding t
ext messages when they light up
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Operation
The traffic sign detection system does not
work in al
l countries ››› page 222, Countries
in which it works. Keep this in mind when
travelling abroad.
Display of traffic signs
When the traffic sign detection system is con-
nected, a camera located on the base of the
interior rear-view mirror records the traffic
signs in front of the vehicle. After checking
and evaluating the information from the cam-
era, the navigation system and the current
vehicle data, up to three valid traffic signs
are displayed
›››
Fig. 217 B in conjunction
with their corresponding additional signs.
The sign that is currently valid for the
driver is shown in the left side of the
screen For example, a maximum speed
limit of 130 km/h (100 mph)
›››
Fig. 217 A.
A sign valid only in certain circum-
stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is
shown second, together with the addi-
tional rain sign.
»
First:
Second:
223
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
If the windscreen wiper is
w
ork
in
g while you are driving, the signal
with the additional rain sign will be
shown first, on the left, as it is the one
that is applicable at the time.
A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g.
No overtaking at certain times, will be
displayed third ››› Fig. 217 C.
Town or city entrance and exit signs activate
the display of current speed limits in the
country's cities or roads. If there is an addi-
tional speed limit sign next to the town or
city entrance and exit signs, this sign will al-
so be displayed.
Signs indicating the end of a speed limit or
the end of an overtaking prohibition are not
displayed.
No warning will be given if the speed limit
sign displayed is exceeded. The correspond-
ing legal provisions are applicable.
Activating and deactivating traffic sign dis-
play on the instrument panel
The permanent display of traffic signs on the
instrument panel can be activated or deacti-
vated on the infotainment system by means
of the
button and the function buttons
S
ETUP
and
Driv
er As
s
istance
.
Ad
dition
al
sign:
Third:
Trailer mode
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
device from the factory and a trailer that is
electrically connected to the vehicle, it is pos-
sible to activate or deactivate the display of
specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer,
such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-
tions. Activation or deactivation is performed
on the infotainment system by means of
the
button and the function buttons
S
ETUP
and
Driv
er As
s
istance
›
››
p
age 27.
F
atigue detection (break rec-
ommendation)*
Introduction
›››
table on page 2
The Fatigue detection informs the driver
when their driving behaviour shows signs of
fatigue.
WARNING
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue
detection sys
tem tempt you into taking any
risks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi-
cient in length when making long journeys.
●
The driver always assumes the responsibil-
ity of driving to their full capacity.
●
Never drive if you are tired.
●
The syst
em does not detect the tiredness of
the driver in all circumstances. Consult the in-
formation in the section ››› page 225, System
limitations.
●
In some situations, the system may incor-
rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu-
vre as driver tiredness.
●
No warning is given in the event of the ef-
fect called microsleep!
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
Note
●
Fatigue detection h
as been developed for
driving on motorways and well paved roads
only.
●
If there is a fault in the system, have it
checked by a specialised workshop.
224
Driver assistance systems
Function and operation
Fig. 218 On the instrument panel display: fa-
tigue det
ection symbo
l
.
Fatigue detection determines the driving be-
h
av
iour of
the driver when starting a journey,
making a calculation of tiredness. This is
constantly compared with the current driving
behaviour. If the system detects that the driv-
er is tired, an audible warning is given with a
sound and an optic warning is shown with a
symbol and complementary message on the
instrument panel display ››› Fig. 218. The
message on the instrument panel display is
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-
pending on the case, is repeated. The system
stores the last message displayed.
The message on the instrument panel display
can be switched off by pressing the
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the
b
utt
on
on the multi function steering
wheel
›
›
›
page 30.
The message can be recalled to the instru-
ment panel display using the multifunction
display ›››
page 30.
Conditions of operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to
around 200 km/h (125 mph).
Switching on and off
Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-
vated in the Easy Connect system with the
button and the
S
ETUP
›
›
› p
age 110 func-
tion button. A mark indicates that the adjust-
ment has been activated.
System limitations
The Fatigue detection has certain limitations
inherent to the system. The following condi-
tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-
vent it from functioning.
●
At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)
●
At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
●
When cornering
●
On roads in poor condition
●
In unfavourable weather conditions
●
When a sporty driving style is employed
●
In the event of a serious distraction to the
driver
Fatigue detection will be restored when the
vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,
when the ignition is switched off or when the
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and
opened the door.
In the event of slow driving during a long pe-
riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the
system automatically re-establishes the tired-
ness calculation. When driving at a faster
speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-
ted.
Parking aid
General information
Various systems are available to help you
when p
ark
in
g or manoeuvring in tight
spaces, depending on the equipment fitted
on your vehicle.
The rear parking aid is an audible assistant
that warns about obstacles located behind
the vehicle
›››
page 227.
During parking, Parking System Plus assists
the driver by visually and audibly warning
them about obstacles detected in front and
behind the vehicle
›››
page 227.
»
225
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
WARNING
●
Alwa
ys pay attention, also when looking
straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle
surroundings. The assistance systems are not
a replacement for driver awareness. When in-
serting or removing the vehicle from a park-
ing space, or when performing similar ma-
noeuvres the driver always assumes the re-
sponsibility.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-
fic conditions.
●
The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in
which obstacles and people are not regis-
tered. Pay special attention to children and
animals.
●
Always keep visual control of the vehicle
surroundings: use the mirrors for additional
help.
CAUTION
Parking Aid functions may be negatively af-
fected b
y different factors that may lead to
damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-
rounds:
●
Under certain circumstances, the system
does not detect or display certain objects:
–
Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars,
fences, posts and thin trees.
–
Objects that are located above the sen-
sors, such as protrusions in a wall.
–
Obj
ects with certain surfaces or struc-
tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-
der snow.
●
Certain surfaces of objects and garments
do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-
nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor-
rectly, these objects or people wearing such
clothes.
●
Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected
by external sound sources. In certain circum-
stances this may prevent them from detect-
ing people or objects.
●
Please note that low obstacles detected by
the system may no longer be registered by
the sensors as the car moves closer, so the
system will not give any further warning. In
certain circumstances, objects such as high
kerbs that could damage the bottom of the
vehicle are not detected either.
●
If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig-
nored, the vehicle could suffer considerable
damage.
●
The knocks or damage on the radiator
grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under-
body can adjust the orientation of the sen-
sors. This can affect the parking aid function.
Have the function checked by a specialised
workshop.
Note
●
In cert
ain situations, the system can give a
warning even though there is no obstacle in
the detected area, e.g:
–
with rough or c
obbled floors or ground
with long grass;
–
with external ultrasound sources, such as
cleaning vehicles or other vehicles;
–
In downpours, intense snow or dense ex-
haust gases;
–
if the registration plate (front or rear) is
not properly affixed to the bumper sur-
face;
–
or in locations such as the brow of a hill.
●
In order to guarantee good system opera-
tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free
of snow or ice, and do not cover them with
adhesives or other objects.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply
it directly only very briefly and always from a
distance of more than 10 cm.
●
Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,
such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the
operation of the Parking Aid.
●
In order to familiarise yourself with the sys-
tem, it is advised that you practice parking in
an area or car park that is free from traffic.
There must be good weather and light condi-
tions.
●
The volume and tone of the warnings can
be modified, in addition to the indications
››› page 230.
●
In vehicles without a driver information
system, these parameters can be modified in
a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised
workshop.
226
Driver assistance systems
●
Plea
se observe information on towing a
trailer ››› page 230.
●
The display on the Easy Connect screen
shows a slight time delay.
Rear parking aid*
The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in
parkin
g by means of audible warning
sounds.
Description
There are sensors integrated in the rear
bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta-
cle, you are alerted by audible warnings.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
not covered by adhesives, residues and the
like, as this could affect the system's opera-
tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 248.
The approximate measurement range of the
rear sensors is:
side area 0.60 m
central area 1.60 m
As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-
v
al
betw
een the audible warnings will be re-
duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
warning will be constant: Do not continue to
move forward (or backward)
›››
in General
information on page 226, ›
›
›
in General in-
f
orm
ation on p
age 226 !
If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
the volume of the warning begins to reduce
after four seconds (does not affect the tone
of the constant warning).
Activating/Deactivating
When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid
is automatically switched on. This is con-
firmed with a short warning.
On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid
system is disconnected immediately.
Parking system plus*
Fig. 219 Represented area.
Parking system plus assists you audibly and
v
i
s
ually when parking.
There are sensors integrated in the front and
rear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle,
you are alerted by audible warnings and visu-
ally on the Easy Connect system.
In the event of danger of a frontal collision,
the audible warnings come from the front of
the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of
a rear-end collision they come from the rear.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
not covered by adhesives, residues and the
like, as this could affect the system's opera-
tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 248.
The approximate measurement range of the
sensors is:
1.20 m
0.60 m
1.60 m
0.60 m
As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-
val between the audible warnings will be re-
duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
warning will be constant: do not continue to
move forward (or backward)!
If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
the volume of the warning begins to reduce
after four seconds (does not affect the tone
of the constant warning).
A
B
C
D
227
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Parking Aid operation
Fig. 220 Centre console: parking aid button.
Manual connection of Parking Aid
●
Press the b
utt
on
once.
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid
●
Press the button again.
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display
(the audible sounds remain active)
●
Press a button on the main menu of the fac-
tory-assembled infotainment system.
●
OR: Press the BACK function button.
Automatic connection of Parking Aid
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
OR: depending on the equipment, if the ve-
hicle rolls back
1)
.
●
OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle
that is in its forwards path at a speed below
10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 229, Automatic ac-
tivation. The obstacle is detected as of a dis-
tance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic con-
nection is activated in the infotainment sys-
tem. A reduced display is shown.
Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid
●
Move the selector lever to position P.
●
OR: accelerate to more than approx.
10 km/h (6 mph) forward.
Temporary suppression of sound in Parking
Aid
●
Press the function button.
Change from reduced view to full view
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
OR: depending on the equipment, if the ve-
hicle rolls back
1)
.
●
OR: press the car icon in reduced view.
If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image
(Rear View Camera “RVC”)
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
OR: Press the RVC function button.
A short confirmation signal will be heard and
the button symbol will light up yellow when
the system is switched on.
1)
With certain equipment, the system will be activa-
ted autom
atically when the vehicle reverses for a cer-
tain distance (about 10 cm if an obstacle is detected
in the rear area and about 20 cm if no obstacle is de-
tected in the rear area).
228
Driver assistance systems
Automatic activation
Fig. 221 Miniature indication of automatic ac-
tiv
ation
When the Parking System Plus is switched on
aut
om
atic
ally, a miniature of the vehicle will
be displayed and the segments will be
shown on the left side of the screen
››› Fig. 221.
Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-
proaching an obstacle located in front of the
vehicle. It only operates every time the speed
is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6
mph) for the first time.
If the parking aid is switched off using the
button, the following actions must be carried
out in order for it to automatically switch on:
●
Switch off the ignition and switch it on
again.
●
OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be-
fore reducing speed below this number
again.
●
OR: place the selector lever in position P
and then move it from this position.
●
OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-
tion in the Easy Connect system menu.
The automatic activation with parking aid
miniature indication can be switched on and
off from the Easy Connect system menu
›››
page 27:
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Select:
CAR
button > Settings > Parking
and manoeuvring.
●
Select the Automatic activation op-
tion.
When the f
u
nction button check box is
activated , the function is on.
If the system has been activated automatical-
ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv-
en when obstacles in front are at a distance
of less than 50 cm.
CAUTION
The automatic connection of the Parking Aid
only w
orks when you are driving slowly. If
driving style is not adapted to the circum-
stances, an accident and serious injury or
damage may be caused.
Segments of the visual indication
Fig. 222 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-
nect
sy
s
tem screen.
The distance of separation from the obstacle
c
an be e
s
timated using the segments around
the vehicle.
The optical indication of the segments works
as follows:
a white segment is dis-
played when the obstacle is not within
the vehicle's trajectory or the direction
of travel is in the opposite direction to
its location.
obstacles located in the
vehicle's trajectory and which are more
than 30 cm away from the vehicle are
displayed in yellow.
obstacles that are less than
30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-
played in red.
»
White segments:
Yellow segments:
Red segments:
229
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Moreover, with the SEAT Media System
Plu
s/Nav
i
System radios, a yellow trail indi-
cates the vehicle's expected journey based
on the steering wheel angle.
Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-
cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding
audible warning will sound.
As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the
segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.
When the penultimate segment is displayed,
this means that the vehicle has reached the
collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob-
stacles are represented in red, including
those out of the path. Do not continue to
move forward (or backward) ›››
in General
inf
orm
ation on p
age 226, ›››
in General in-
f
orm
ation on p
age 226 !
Adjusting the display and audible
warnings
The settings for the display and audible
w
arnin
g
s are controlled via the Easy Con-
nect*.
Automatic activation
on – activates the Automatic activa-
tion option
›››
page 229.
off – deactivates the Automatic ac-
tivation option ››› page 229.
Front volume*
Volume in the front and rear area.
Front sound settings/sharpness*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front
area.
Rear volume*
Volume in the rear area.
Rear sound settings/sharpness*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear
area.
Adjust volume
With the parking aid switched on, the active
audio/video source volume will be reduced
to the intensity of the selected setting.
Error messages
When the Parking Aid is activated or when it
i
s
sw
itched on, if a message reporting a Park-
ing aid error is displayed on the instrument
panel, there is a fault in the system.
If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-
necting the ignition, next time that parking
aid is engaged in reverse, it will not be indi-
cated.
Parking System Plus*
If there is a fault in the parking aid system a
message will appear on the instrument panel
indicating the error. In addition the key
LED will blink.
If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is
displayed on the Easy Connect display in
front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is
faulty, only the obstacles in the areas
A
and
B
are displayed ›
›
›
Fig. 219. If a front sensor
is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas
C
and
D
are displayed.
Hav
e the f
au
lt corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
Towing bracket
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
dev
ic
e fr
om the factory, when the trailer is
connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear
sensors will not be activated when reverse
gear is engaged, when the selector lever is
turned to position R or when the button is
pressed.
Parking System Plus
The distance to possible obstacles at the rear
of the vehicle will not be displayed on the
screen and nor will it be indicated by means
of audible sound signals.
230
Driver assistance systems
The Easy Connect system screen will only dis-
p
l
a
y objects detected at the front, and the ve-
hicle's trajectory will be hidden.
Braked manoeuvre function*
3 Valid only with Parking system plus
If an o
bstacle is detected while reversing, the
braked manoeuvre function activates the
emergency brake. Depending on the equip-
ment, the braked manoeuvre function can al-
so activate the emergency brake while mov-
ing forwards.
The emergency braking function helps to
minimise collisions. The vehicle's speed
must be no higher than 10 km/h.
The braked manoeuvre function is active or
inactive when the parking light is lit or off, re-
spectively. If the emergency brake has been
activated, the function will remain inactive
until the gear is changed.
The limitations of Parking Aid apply.
The braked manoeuvre function is configured
in the Easy Connect system with the
but-
t
on and the f
u
nction buttons
SETUP
and
P
ark
in
g and manoeuvring
.
●
on – enables use of the braked ma-
noeu
vre function.
●
off – disables use of the braked ma-
noeuvre function.
Temporary suppression of emergency brak-
ing
●
When deactiv
ating the function with the
Braked manoeuvre
button, which appears on
the P
ark
in
g aid screen of the Easy Connect
system.
●
When any of the doors, the rear lid or the
bonnet are opened.
Rear Assist “Rear View Cam-
era”*
Operating and safety warnings
WARNING
●
The Rear As
sist does not make it possible
to precisely calculate the distance from ob-
stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it
overcome the system's own limits, hence us-
ing it may cause serious accidents and inju-
ries if used negligently or without due care.
The driver should be aware of his/her sur-
roundings at all times to ensure safe driving.
●
The camera lens expands and distorts the
field of vision and displays the objects on the
screen in a different, vague manner. The per-
ception of distances is also distorted by this
effect.
●
Some objects may, due to the resolution of
the display screen - not be displayed in a sat-
isfactory manner or may not be displayed at
all. Take special care with thin posts, fences,
railin
gs or trees that might not be displayed
on screen and could damage the vehicle.
●
The rear assist has blind spots where it is
not possible to represent people or objects
(small children, animals and certain objects
cannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon-
itor the vehicle's surrounding area at all
times.
●
Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and
snow, and do not cover it.
●
The system is not a replacement for driver
awareness. Supervise the parking operation
at all times, as well as the vehicle's surround-
ing area. Adapt your speed and driving style
at all times to suit visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions.
●
Do not be distracted from the traffic by
looking at the screen.
●
The images on the rear assist screen are
only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial
depth, protruding parts or holes in the road,
for example, are more difficult to detect or
may not be seen at all.
●
Vehicle load modifies the representation of
the orientation lines displayed. The width
represented by the lines diminishes with ve-
hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi-
cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve-
hicle of the luggage compartment is carrying
a heavy load.
●
In the following situations, the objects or
other vehicles shown in the navigation sys-
tem display appear to be further away or
»
231
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
closer than they really are: Pay special atten-
tion:
–
On movin
g from a horizontal plane to a
slope.
–
On moving from a slope to a horizontal
plane.
–
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the
rear.
–
When the vehicle approaches objects
that are not on the ground surface or are
jutting out from it. These objects may al-
so be outside the camera's angle of vi-
sion when reversing.
Note
●
It is
important to take great care and pay
special attention if you are not yet familiar
with the system.
●
Rear assist will not be available if the vehi-
cle's rear lid is open.
Instructions for use
Fig. 223 On the rear bumper: location of the
r
e
ar a
ssist camera
A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver
durin
g r
ev
erse parking or manoeuvring
››› Fig. 223. The camera image is viewed to-
gether with orientation lines projected by the
system on the Easy Connect system screen.
The bottom of the screen displays part of the
bumper corresponding to the number plate
area that will be used as reference by the
driver.
Rear assist settings:
Rear assist offers the user the possibility to
change the image's brightness, contrast and
colour settings.
To change these settings:
●
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
●
Apply the parking brake.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If necessary, switch on the Easy Connect
system.
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
Press the function button displayed on
the right of the image.
●
Make the desired adjustments on the menu
by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by
moving the corresponding scroll button.
Necessary conditions for parking and ma-
noeuvring with the rear assist
The system should not be used in the follow-
ing cases:
●
If the image displayed is not very reliable or
is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty
lens.
●
If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-
played very clearly or is incomplete.
●
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.
●
If the position and installation angle of the
camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-
end collision. Have the system checked by a
specialised workshop.
Familiarising yourself with the system
To familiarise yourself with the system, the
orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-
ommends practising parking and manoeu-
vring with the rear assist in a place without
232
Driver assistance systems
too much traffic or in a car park when there
ar
e g
ood w
eather and visibility conditions.
Cleaning the camera lens
Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow
and ice:
●
Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-
based glass cleaning product and clean the
lens with a dry cloth.
●
Remove snow using a small brush.
●
Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.
CAUTION
●
Never use abr
asive cleaning products to
clean the camera lens.
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could
damage the camera.
Parking and manoeuvring with the
r
e
ar a
ssist
Fig. 224 Display on the Easy Connect system
s
c
r
een: orientation lines.
Switching the system on and off
●
The rear assist will switch on when the igni-
tion i
s
on or the en
gine running, on engaging
reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-
ing the selector lever to the R position (auto-
matic gearbox).
●
The system switches off 8 seconds after
disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)
or removing the selector lever from the R po-
sition (automatic gearbox). The system will
also disconnect immediately after the igni-
tion is switched off.
●
The camera will stop transmitting images
above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-
verse engaged.
In combination with the Parking System Plus
››› page 225, the camera image will cease to
be transmitted immediately when reverse
gear is disengaged or when the selector lever
is moved from the R position, and the optical
information provided by the Parking Aid sys-
tem will be displayed.
Also in combination with the system, the rear
assist image can also be concealed:
●
By pressing one of the Infotainment system
buttons on the display.
●
OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that
appears on the left of the screen (which
switches to the full-screen mode of the Park-
ing System Plus's optical system).
If you wish to display the rear assist image
again:
●
Disengage reverse, or change the selector
lever's position, engage reverse again or
move the selector lever to position R.
●
OR: Press the RVC function button
1)
»
1)
WARNING: the RVC function b
utton will only be ac-
tivated and available when the reverse gear is en-
gaged or the selector lever is set to position R.
233
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Meaning of the orientation lines
›
›
›
Fig. 224
Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the
approximate width of the vehicle plus the
rear view mirrors) on the road surface.
End of the side lines: the area marked in
green ends approximately 2 m behind
the vehicle on the road surface.
Intermediate line: indicates a distance of
approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on
the road surface.
Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis-
tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear
of the vehicle on the road surface.
Parking manoeuvre
●
Place the vehicle in front of the parking
space and engage reverse gear (manual
gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-
tion (automatic gearbox).
●
Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel
so that the side orientation lines lead to-
wards the parking space.
●
Guide the vehicle into the parking space so
that the side orientation lines run parallel to
it.
1
2
3
4
Towing bracket device
T
o
w
ing bracket device*
Introduction
The towing bracket device fitted to your vehi-
cle, be it
factory-fitted or a genuine SEAT ac-
cessory, meets all the national technical and
legal requirements for towing.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector
for the electrical connection between the
trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip-
ped with a 7-pin connector you can use the
corresponding available adaptor that is a
genuine SEAT accessory.
The maximum authorised towing load is
80 kg.
WARNING
●
Befor
e each journey, make sure that the de-
tachable ball joint is properly fitted and se-
cured in its housing.
●
If the detachable ball joint is not properly
fitted and secured, do not use it.
●
Do not use the towing bracket device for
towing if it is damaged or has missing parts.
●
Do not modify or adapt the towing device
connection.
●
Never unhook the detachable ball joint
when the trailer is hitched.
CAUTION
Handle the detachable ball joint with care in
order to av
oid damaging the bumper paint-
work.
Note
Towing the vehicle with the detachable ball
joint ›
›› page 90.
Description
Fig. 225 Towing bracket device support / de-
t
ac
h
able ball joint / key
234
Towing bracket device
Depending on the country or version, the
t
o
w
ing bracket device's detachable ball joint
is located:
●
underneath the floor panel of the luggage
compartment.
●
or else on the surface of the floor panel of
the luggage compartment in a bag secured
to the fastening rings.
The ball joint is fitted and removed by hand.
The towing device bracket is supplied with a
key.
Key to ››› Fig. 225
13-pin connector
Safety lug
Hook housing
Hook housing cap
Ball protective cover
Detachable ball
Locking lever
Lock cover
Release bolt
Lock
Locking balls
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Note
Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you
lose y
our key.
Placing in standby position
Fig. 226 Step 1
Fig. 227 Step 2
Before assembling it, place the detachable
b
al
l
in the standby position with the follow-
ing two steps.
Step 1
●
Turn the key in the direction of arrow
1
un-
ti
l
the p
art of the key with the holes reaches
the top position ››› Fig. 226.
Step 2
●
Grip the detachable ball below the protec-
tive cover.
●
Press the release bolt
B
in the direction of
arr
o
w
2
, and at the same time press lever
C
in the direction of arrow
3
as far as it will
g
o ›
›
› Fig. 227.
The lever will remain blocked in this position.
235
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Standby position
Fig. 228 Standby position: Position of the lev-
er and the r
el
e
ase bolt
Standby position adjusted properly
●
Key
A
›
›
› Fig. 228
is in the released posi-
tion (the part of the key with the holes is fac-
ing upwards).
●
Lever
B
›
›
› Fig. 228
is in the bottom posi-
tion.
●
The release bolt
C
›
›
› Fig. 228
can be
moved.
Thus adjusted, the detachable ball is ready
for installation.
CAUTION
The key cannot be removed or turned in the
standb
y position.
Assembling the detachable ball - Step
1
Fig. 229 Fitting the detachable ball / Release
bo
lt
in the dep
loyed position
Fitting the detachable ball
●
Remove the hook housing cap
4
››› Fig. 225 downw
ards.
●
Set the detachable ball to its standby posi-
tion ›››
page 235.
●
Grip the detachable ball from below
››› Fig. 229 and insert it into the hook hous-
ing following the direction of arrow
1
until it
en
g
ag
es audibly ›››
.
L
ev
er
A
turns aut
omatically in the direction
of
arr
ow
2
upwards, and the release bolt
B
moves outwards (the red and green part will
be
v
i
sible) ›››
.
If
l
ev
er
A
does not turn automatically or the
r
el
e
ase bolt
B
does not come out, the de-
t
ac
h
able ball should be removed by turning
the lever as far as possible downwards from
the housing cavity, and the detachable ball's
support surfaces and the cavity should then
be cleaned.
WARNING
●
When attachin
g the detachable ball, keep
your hands well away from the reach of the
lever's rotation. There is a risk of injuring
your fingers!
●
Never try to pull the lever upwards by force
to turn the key. The detachable ball would not
be secured properly!
236
Towing bracket device
Assembling the detachable ball - Step
2
Fig. 230 Locking the lock
Fig. 231 Placing the cover over the lock.
Do not omit this first step ›
›
›
page 236, As-
sembling the detachable ball - Step 1 !
●
Turn key
A
in the direction of arrow
1
un-
ti
l
the p
art of the key with the holes reaches
the bottom position ››› Fig. 230.
●
Remove the key in the direction of arrow
2
.
●
Place cover
B
in the lock in the direction
of
arr
o
w
3
›
›› Fig. 231
›
››
.
●
Check that the detachable ball is secure
›
›
›
page 237.
CAUTION
●
After r
emoving the key, always place the
cover over the lever's lock. If the lock be-
comes soiled it will be impossible to insert
the key.
●
Keep the towing bracket device's housing
cavity clean at all times. Dirtiness can pre-
vent the detachable ball from being properly
secured!
●
If the detachable ball is removed, always
place the cap on the hook's housing.
Checking proper attachment
Fig. 232 Detachable ball properly attached
Whenever you go to use the detachable ball,
m
ak
e s
ure that it is properly attached first.
Detachable ball properly attached
●
The detachable ball will not fall out of the
housing cavity after a major “knock or jerk”.
●
Lever
A
›
›
› Fig. 232
is fully raised.
●
The release bolt
B
›
›
› Fig. 232
is sticking
fully out (the red and green part is visible).
●
The key has been removed.
●
Cover
C
›
›
› Fig. 232
is placed over the lock.
WARNING
The towing bracket device should only be
used if the det
achable ball has been properly
locked!
237
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Removing the detachable ball - Step 1
Fig. 233 Removing the lock cover
Fig. 234 Releasing the lock
●
Remove cover
A
from the lock in the direc-
tion of
arr
o
w
1
›
›
› Fig. 233
.
●
Insert key
B
into the lock in the direction
of
arr
o
w
2
›
›
› Fig. 234
.
●
Turn the key in the direction of arrow
3
un-
ti
l
the p
art of the key with the holes is facing
upwards.
WARNING
Never remove the detachable ball joint when
the trail
er is hitched.
Note
Before you remove the detachable ball, you
are adv
ised to place the protective cover on
the ball coupling.
Removing the detachable ball - Step 2
Fig. 235 Releasing the detachable ball
Do not omit this first step
›
›
›
page 238, Re-
moving the detachable ball - Step 1 !
Releasing the detachable ball
●
Grip the detachable ball from below.
●
Press the release bolt
A
in the direction of
arr
o
w
1
as far as it will go, and at the same
time press lever
B
in the direction of arrow
2
as far as it will go.
In thi
s
po
sition, the detachable ball is loose
and will fall/drop freely downwards. If this
does not occur when you release it, press it
with the other hand from above.
The detachable ball locks into the standby
position at the same time and is therefore
ready to be reinserted into the hook housing
›››
.
●
Fit the cap
4
›
›› Fig. 225
ont
o its housing.
WARNING
Never leave the detachable ball loose in the
luggag
e compartment. It could cause damage
in the luggage compartment in the case of
abrupt braking, and even jeopardise passen-
ger safety!
CAUTION
●
If y
ou hold the lever and do not press down
on it as far as you can, after you remove the
detachable ball, the latter will continue up-
wards and will not lock into the standby posi-
tion. The detachable ball should be placed in
this position before the next assembly.
●
Keep the detachable ball in the standby po-
sition, with the key inserted into the box
while you place it facing downwards with the
side opposite to the one where the key is in-
serted. The key could get damaged!
238
Towing bracket device
●
When operating the l
ever, do not apply too
much pressure (for example, do not stand on
it)!
Note
Remove any dirt from the detachable ball be-
f
ore
you put it away with the vehicle tools.
Operation and care
Put the cover on the housing cavity so that
dir
t
c
annot get in.
Before hooking up a trailer, always check the
ball coupling and apply suitable grease if
necessary.
Use the protective cover when putting the de-
tachable ball away to keep the luggage com-
partment clean.
Remove any dirt from the housing cavity sur-
faces and use a suitable cleaning product.
CAUTION
The top part of the hook housing is greased.
Make s
ure that the grease has not been re-
moved.
Trailer towing
Wh
at
do
you need to bear in mind
when towing a trailer?
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer
when fitted with the c
orrect equipment.
If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, con-
sult ››› page 243.
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector
for the electrical connection between the
trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to
use an adapter cable. It is available at any
Technical Service.
Trailer weight/drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If
you do not load the trailer up to the maxi-
mum permitted trailer weight, you can then
climb correspondingly steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only
applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above
sea level. With increasing altitude the engine
power and therefore the vehicle climbing
ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has
to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the
vehicle and trailer combination must be re-
duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or
part
thereof). The gross combination weight
is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus
the actual weight of the laden trailer. When
possible, operate the trailer with the maxi-
mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint
of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the
specified limit.
The figures for trailer weights and drawbar
loads that are given on the data plate of the
towing bracket are for certification purposes
only. The correct figures for your specific
model, which may be lower than these fig-
ures for the towing bracket, are given in the
vehicle documentation or in ››› chapter Tech-
nical Data.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as near to the axle as possible.
Loads carried in the trailer must be secured
to prevent them moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maximum permissi-
ble pressure shown on the sticker on the in-
side of the fuel tank flap. Set the tyre pres-
sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the
trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
»
239
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Exterior mirrors
Chec
k
whether
you can see enough of the
road behind the trailer with the standard rear
vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you
should have additional exterior mirrors fitted.
Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on
hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors
to give sufficient vision to the rear.
Tow rope
Always use a cable between the vehicle and
the trailer ››› page 240.
Trailer rear lights
The trailer's rear lights should comply with
the statutory safety regulations ››› page 240.
WARNING
Never transport people in a trailer. This could
res
ult in fatal accidents.
Note
●
Tow
ing a trailer places additional demands
on the vehicle. We recommend additional
services between the normal inspection inter-
vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow-
ing a trailer.
●
Find out whether special regulations apply
to towing a trailer in your country.
Hitching and connecting the trailer
Fig. 236 Schematic diagram: assignment of
the pins of the trailer's electrical socket.
Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 236:
Pin Meaning
1 Left turn signal
2 Rear fog light
3 Earth, pins 1, 2, 4 to 8
4 Right turn signal
5 Rear light, right
6 Brake lights
7 Rear light, left
8 Reverse lights
9 Permanent live
10 Cable without positive charge
11 Earth, pin 10
Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 236:
Pin Meaning
12 Unassigned
13 Earth, pin 9
Electrical socket for trailer
The vehic
le is fitted with a 13-pole power
socket for the electrical connection between
the trailer and the vehicle. If the system de-
tects that a trailer has been connected elec-
trically, the electrical equipment on the trailer
will receive voltage through this connection.
Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for
example, the trailer's interior lighting. Pin 10
is only powered when the engine is running.
The charge wire (pin 10) charges, for exam-
ple, a caravan battery.
Pin 9 and 10 should not be connected to
each other to avoid discharging or damaging
the vehicle's battery.
The earth wires, pin 3, pin 11 and pin 13,
should never be connected to each other to
avoid overloading the electrical system.
If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you
will need to use an adapter cable. In this case
the function corresponding to pin 10 will not
be available.
240
Towing bracket device
Trailer maximum electricity consumption
Brake lights (total) 84 Watts
Turn signal, on each side 42 Watts
Side lights (total) 100 Watts
Rear lights (total) 42 Watts
Rear fog light 42 Watts
Never exceed the values indicated!
Note
●
If the re
ar lights of the trailer are not cor-
rectly connected, the vehicle electronics may
be damaged.
●
If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur-
rent, the vehicle electronics may be dam-
aged.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric system
directly to the electrical connections of the
tail lights or any other power sources. Only
use the connections intended for providing
electric current to the trailer.
Ball coupling of towing bracket de-
v
ic
e*
The ball coupling is provided with instruc-
tions on fittin
g and removing the ball cou-
pling of the towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be
stor
ed securely in the luggage compartment
to prevent them being flung through the vehi-
cle and causing injury.
Note
●
By l
aw, the ball coupling must be removed
if a trailer is not being towed if it obscures
the number plate.
Driving with a trailer
Fig. 237 Turn the 13-pin connector
Before driving
●
Grip the 13-pin connector at area
A
and
r
emo
v
e it in the direction of the arrow
››› Fig. 237.
●
Remove the protective cover
5
›
›
› Fig. 225
up
wards.
After driving
●
Grip the 13-pin connector at area
A
and
in
ser
t
it in the opposite direction to the arrow
››› Fig. 237.
●
Fit the protective cover
5
›
›
›
Fig. 225 on
the ball coupling.
»
241
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
Safety lug
The s
af
ety
lug
B
›
›› Fig. 237
i
s used to hook
up the trailer's retainer cable.
On hooking it up to the safety lug, the retain-
er cable should have slack in all the trailer
positions with respect to the vehicle (sharp
bends, reverse gear, etc.).
Headlights
The front part of the vehicle may be raised
when the trailer is connected and the light
may dazzle the rest of the traffic.
Adapt the height of the headlights using the
headlight range rotary adjuster
1)
.
WARNING
●
Never use the s
afety lug to tow!
●
Adjust your speed to suit the road and traf-
fic conditions.
●
All work on the electrical system must be
carried out only by specialised workshops.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric system
to the electrical connections of the rear lights
or any other power sources.
●
After hooking up the trailer and connecting
the socket, check that all the trailer's rear
lights are working properly.
Note
●
If there i
s any fault in the trailer's lighting,
check the fuses in the instrument panel fuse
box ›››
page 54.
●
The contact between the retainer cable and
the safety lug may give rise to mechanical
wear in the lug's surface protection. This
wear will not prevent the safety lug from op-
erating properly or cause any fault and is ex-
cluded from the warranty.
●
When connecting and disconnecting the
trailer, the towing vehicle's handbrake
should be applied.
Anti-theft alarm system
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-
g
er
ed when the el
ectrical connection be-
tween vehicle and trailer is interrupted.
Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system
before connecting or disconnecting a trailer
›››
page 124.
Conditions for the integration of a trailer in
the anti-theft alarm system.
●
The vehicle is factory-equipped with an an-
ti-theft alarm system and a towing bracket
device.
●
The trailer is connected electrically to the
towing vehicle by the trailer connector.
●
The electrical system of the vehicle and the
trailer are prepared for operation.
●
The vehicle is locked with the ignition key
and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
CAUTION
For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rear
LED lights ar
e not integrated in the anti-theft
alarm system.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra
c
ar
e.
W
eight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer
with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable.
However, if this cannot be avoided, drive ex-
tra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight
distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re-
duced with increasing speed. For this reason,
it is advisable not to drive at the maximum
1)
This does not apply for vehicles with bi-xenon
headlights.
242
Towing bracket device
permissible speed in an unfavourable road,
w
e
ather or w
ind conditions. This applies es-
pecially when driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately
if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak-
ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-
creasing speed.
Always brake in due course. If the trailer has
an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at
first and then, firmly. This will prevent the
jerking that can be caused by locking of trail-
er wheels. Select a low gear in due course
before going down a steep downhill. This en-
ables you to use the engine braking to slow
down the vehicle.
Reheating
At very high temperatures and during pro-
longed slopes, driving in a low gear and high
engine speed, always monitor the coolant
temperature gauge ››› page 109.
Electronic stability control*
The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailer
in case of skidding or rocking.
Retrofitting a towing bracket*
Fig. 238 Attachment points for towing brack-
et
.
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve-
hic
l
e i
s purchased, this must be completed
according to the instructions of the towing
bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket
A
are on the lower part of the vehicle.
The di
s
t
ance between the centre of the ball
coupling and the ground should never be
lower than the indicated value, even with a
fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi-
mum drawbar load.
Elevation values for securing the towing
bracket:
B
65 mm (minimum)
C
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
D
1040 mm
E
317 mm
F
LEON/LEON SC LEON ST
319 mm 596 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
●
Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort
f
or the
v
ehicle. Therefore, before fitting a
towing bracket, please contact a Technical
Service to check whether your cooling system
needs modification.
●
The legal requirements in your country
must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-
rate control lamp).
●
Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear
bumper, must be removed and reinstalled.
The towing bracket securing bolts must be
»
243
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Operation
tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow-
er soc
k
et
must be connected to the vehicle
electrical system. This requires specialised
knowledge and tools.
●
Figures in the illustration show the eleva-
tion value and the attachment points which
must be considered if you are retrofitting a
towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing brackets should be fitted at a spe-
cia
lised workshop.
●
If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal-
led, there is a serious danger of accident.
●
For your own safety, please observe the tow
bracket manufacturer's instructions.
CAUTION
●
If the pow
er socket is incorrectly installed,
this could cause damage to the vehicle elec-
trical system.
Note
●
SEAT r
ecommends that the towing hooks
be fitted at a specialised workshop. Consult
your SEAT dealer in case additional modifica-
tions to your vehicle are necessary.
●
Due to the specific design of the exhaust,
the fitting of a conventional towing hook is
not recommended for some sportier versions.
Please consult your Technical Service.
244
Care and maintenance
Advice
C
ar
e and m
aintenance
Accessories and modifications
to the vehicle
Accessories, replacement parts and
repair work
Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer
f
or a
dv
ice before purchasing accessories and
replacement parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high
standard of active and passive safety. For this
reason, we recommend that you ask a SEAT
Official Service for advice before fitting ac-
cessories or replacement parts. Your SEAT Of-
ficial Service has the latest information from
the manufacturer and can recommend acces-
sories and replacement parts which are suita-
ble for your requirements. They can also an-
swer any questions you might have regarding
official regulations.
We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-
sories and Genuine SEAT parts
®
. SEAT has
tested these parts and accessories for suita-
bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official
Services have the necessary experience and
facilities to ensure that the parts are installed
correctly and professionally.
Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct
effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driv-
en, such as a cruise control system or elec-
tronically-controlled suspension, must be
approved for use in your vehicle and bear the
e mark (the European Union's authorisation
symbol).
If any additional electrical devices are fitted
which do not serve to control the vehicle it-
self (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or
ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the
sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in
the European Union).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders
or cup hol
ders, should never be fitted on the
covers, or within the working range of the air-
bags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if
the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Modifications
Modifications must always be carried out ac-
c
or
din
g to our specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic
components, software, wiring or data transfer
in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. Due
to the way the electronic components are
linked together in networks, other indirect
systems may be affected by the faults. This
can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive
wear of components, and also invalidate your
vehicle registration documents.
You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership
cannot be held liable for any damage caused
by modifications and/or work performed in-
correctly.
We therefore recommend that all work should
be performed by a SEAT Official Service using
genuine SEAT parts
®
.
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other
work on
your vehicle can lead to malfunctions
and cause accidents.
Radio transmitters and office equip-
ment
Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
An
y
r
etrofit installations of radio transmitters
in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT
generally authorises in-vehicle installations
of approved types of radio transmitters provi-
ded that:
●
The aerial is installed correctly.
●
The aerial is installed on the exterior of the
vehicle (and shielded cables are used togeth-
er with non-reflective aerial trimming).
●
The effective transmitting power does not
exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.
»
245
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-
shop w
i
l
l be able to inform you about options
for installing and operating radio transmitters
with a higher transmitting power.
Mobile radio transmitters
Commercial mobile telephones or radio
equipment might interfere with the electron-
ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.
This may be due to:
●
No external aerial.
●
External aerial incorrectly installed.
●
Transmitting power more than 10 W.
You must, therefore, do not operate portable
mobile telephones or radio equipment inside
the vehicle without a properly installed exter-
nal aerial ›››
.
Pl
e
a
se note also that the maximum range of
the equipment can only be achieved with an
external aerial.
Business equipment
Retrofit installation of business or private
equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-
ded the equipment cannot interfere with the
driver's immediate control of the vehicle and
that any such equipment carries the mark.
Any retrofit equipment that could influence
the driver's control of the vehicle must have a
type approval for your vehicle and must carry
the e mark.
WARNING
Mobile telephones or radio equipment which
is oper
ated inside the vehicle without a prop-
erly installed external aerial can create exces-
sive magnetic fields that could cause a health
hazard.
Note
●
The post
erior fitting of electric and elec-
tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its li-
cence and could lead to the withdrawal of the
vehicle registration document under certain
circumstances.
●
Please use the mobile telephone/radio op-
erating instructions.
Care and cleaning
Gener
a
l
information
Regular and careful care helps to m
aint
ain
the
value of the vehicle. This may also be one
of the requirements for upholding any war-
ranty claims in the event of corrosion or paint
defects.
SEAT Official Services and specialist retailers
carry stocks of suitable car care materials.
Please follow the instructions for use on the
packaging.
WARNING
●
Cle
aning products and other materials used
for car care can be damaging to your health if
misused.
●
Always keep care products in a safe place,
out of the reach of children. Failure to comply
could result in poisoning.
For the sake of the environment
●
If pos
sible, use environmentally friendly
products.
●
The remains of car care products should not
be disposed of with ordinary household
waste.
Vehicle exterior care
W
a
shin
g the vehicle
The longer substances such as insects, bird
dr
op
pin
gs, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in-
dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and
other aggressive materials remain on the ve-
hicle, the more damage they do to the paint-
work. High temperatures (for instance due to
strong sunlight) further intensify the corro-
sive effect.
After the period when salt is put on the roads
it is important to have the underside of the
vehicle washed thoroughly.
246
Care and maintenance
Automatic car washes
B
ef
or
e going through a car wash, be sure to
take the usual precautions such as closing
the windows and roof. If the vehicle has spe-
cial accessories such as spoilers or a roof
rack or two-way radio aerial, etc., it is advisa-
ble to consult the car wash tunnel operator.
It is best to use a car wash without revolving
bristles if possible.
Washing the vehicle with a high pressure
cleaner
When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-
sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-
structions for the equipment. This applies
particularly to the operating pressure and the
spraying distance. Do not hold the nozzle too
close to soft materials such as rubber hoses
or seals. The same applies to the parking aid
sensors*, which are located in the rear bump-
er.
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out
in a direct stream or one that has a rotating
jet for forcing off dirt.
Stickers attached by the factory
Follow these directions to avoid damaging
the stickers:
●
Do not use high pressure cleaners.
●
To remove ice or snow from the stickers do
not use window scrapers or ice scrapers.
●
Do not polish the stickers.
●
Do not use dirty cloths or sponges.
●
Preferably wash using a soft sponge and
soft neutral soap.
Washing the car by hand
When washing the car by hand, use plenty of
water to soften the dirt first, and rinse off as
well as possible.
Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge,
glove or brush using only slight pressure.
You should start on the roof and work down.
Special car soap should only be used for very
persistent dirt.
Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of-
ten.
Wheels, sills and similar should be cleaned
last. Use a second sponge for this.
WARNING
●
The vehic
le should only be washed with the
ignition switched off. Failure to follow this in-
struction could result in an accident.
●
Do not clean the underside of chassis, the
inside of wheel arches or wheel trims without
protecting your hands and arms. You may cut
yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Other-
wise, there is a risk of sustaining cuts.
●
When washing the car during the winter
season: water and ice in the brake system
can reduce braking effectiveness: risk of acci-
dent!
CAUTION
●
Do not wa
sh the vehicle in direct sunlight –
otherwise the paint can be damaged.
●
Do not use sponges, abrasive household
sponges or similar to clean insect remains.
This could damage the surface.
●
Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from
the headlights at regular intervals, for in-
stance when filling the fuel tank. The head-
lights should only be washed with water, do
not wipe them with a dry cloth or sponge. It
is best to use soapy water.
●
Never wash tyres with a jet that sprays the
water out in a direct stream. This could dam-
age the tyres even if the spray is kept at a
distance and only used for a very short time.
●
Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash, please make sure to retract the ex-
terior mirrors to prevent them from being
damaged. Electrically retractable exterior
mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand,
always use the electrical power control.
CAUTION
●
Befor
e washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash, please proceed as follows to lock
the wiper arms so that they are not moved to-
wards the top of the windscreen:
–
the bonnet must be closed.
–
switch the ignition on and off.
–
press the windscreen wiper lever forward
briefly (windscreen washer function).
This will lock the wiper arms.
»
247
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
For the sake of the environment
The car should only be washed in special
wash b
ays. These areas are prepared to pre-
vent oily water from getting into the public
drains. In some places, washing vehicles out-
side the areas intended for this purpose is
prohibited.
Camera sensors and lenses
●
Use a small brush to remove snow and a
de-icer spr
ay to remove ice.
●
Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod-
uct and a soft, dr
y cloth.
●
Moisten the camera lens using a standard
alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and
clean the lens with a dry cloth. In the active
lane assist*, the area in front of the lens is
normally cleaned with the windscreen wash-
er.
CAUTION
●
When you c
lean the vehicle with a pressure
washer:
–
Stay a suitable distance from the sensors
on the front and rear bumpers.
–
Do not clean the camera lenses or sur-
rounding area with the pressure washer.
●
Never use warm or hot water to remove
snow and ice from the reverse camera lens,
as it could crack the lens.
●
Never use abr
asive cleaning agents on the
lens.
Waxing and polishing
Care
Waxin
g protects the paintwork. It is time to
apply a coat of good wax when water no lon-
ger forms droplets and rolls off the clean
paintwork.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the
vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro-
tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least
twice a year.
In the summer, you will find it is much easier
to remove dead insects (which accumulate
on the bumper and the front of the bonnet) if
the car has been treated with care products
recently.
Polishing
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has
lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be
brought back by putting on wax.
If the polish does not contain wax, a wax
product should be applied after polishing.
CAUTION
●
Do not use po
lishes and hard wax on pain-
ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic
parts.
●
Do not apply paint polishes to the side trim
that runs around the panoramic roof and ends
on the windscreen. However, it can be treated
with hard wax.
Trims
In respect for the environment, the silver-
p
l
at
ed trims on the body are made of pure
aluminium (they do not contain chrome).
Dirt or marks on the trim mouldings should
be removed with a cleaning product with a
neutral PH (do not use a chrome cleaner).
Body polish is also unsuitable for use on trim
mouldings. The intensive cleaning fluids of-
ten used before the car goes into a car wash
may contain alkaline substances, which can
cause dull or milky patches when they dry
out.
SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaning
products which have been tested for use on
your vehicle and are not harmful to the envi-
ronment.
248
Care and maintenance
Plastic parts
Plastic parts are cleaned with a power wash-
er. If thi
s is not sufficient, plastic parts
should only be treated with a special solvent-
free plastic cleaning agent. Do not use paint-
work cleaners, polishes or wax on plastic
parts.
Carbon parts
The carbon parts on your vehicle have a pain-
t
ed s
ur
face. They do not need any special
care and are cleaned just like any other pain-
ted part
›››
page 246.
Paint damage
Minor damage to the paint, such as scratches
or s
t
one c
hips, should be touched up without
delay before the metal starts to corrode. Suit-
able touch-up brushes or sprays for your car
can be obtained from a SEAT Official Service.
The number of the original paint finish on the
vehicle is given on the data sticker
›››
page 281.
If corrosion is already visible it must be thor-
oughly removed by a specialised workshop.
Windows
Clear vision is an essential safety factor.
The winds
creen must not be cleaned with in-
sect remover or wax, otherwise the wind-
screen wipers will not function properly (jud-
dering).
Traces of rubber, oil, grease or silicone can
be removed with a window cleaning solution
or a silicone remover. Wax residue can only
be removed with a special cleaner. Your SEAT
Official Service will be able to provide you
with more detailed information.
The windows should also be cleaned on the
inside at regular intervals.
Use a separate cloth or chamois to dry the
windows. Cloths used for waxing and polish-
ing contain residues that will cause smears
on the glass.
WARNING
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the
winds
creen. In bad visibility conditions (e.g.
in the rain, dark or with a low sun), these
coatings may cause dazzle: risk of accident!
Such coatings can also cause the windscreen
wiper blades to make noise.
CAUTION
●
Remov
e snow and ice from windows and ex-
terior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid scratches caused by dirt on the glass,
the scr
aper should only be pushed in one di-
rection and not moved to and fro.
●
The heating element for the rear window is
located on the inner side of the window. To
avoid damaging them, do not apply stickers
to these heating elements.
●
Never use warm or hot water to remove
snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This
could cause the glass to crack!
Wheels
The wheels require regular attention to pre-
ser
v
e their ap
pearance. It is important to re-
move road salt and brake dust by washing
the wheels at regular intervals, otherwise the
finish will be impaired.
After washing, the wheels should only be
cleaned with an "acid-free" cleaning agent
for alloy wheels. This is available from SEAT
Official Services and specialist retailers. Nev-
er leave the cleaning agent on the rims for
any longer than specified in the instructions
before rinsing it off. If the wheel cleaner fluid
contains acid it can attack the surfaces of the
wheel bolts.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should
not be used for maintaining the rims. If the
protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying
stones, the damaged area should be re-
paired immediately.
»
249
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
WARNING
Please note when cleaning the wheels that
water
, ice and road salt can impair the effec-
tiveness of the brakes; this can cause an acci-
dent.
Exhaust tail pipe
It is important to remove road salt and brake
dust
by washing the wheels at regular inter-
vals, otherwise the exhaust tail pipe material
could be damaged. To remove impurities, do
not use rim, paint or chrome cleaners or oth-
er abrasive products. Clean the exhaust tail
pipes with cleaning products that are suita-
ble for stainless steel.
SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaning
products that have been tested and ap-
proved for use on your vehicle.
Caring for the vehicle interior
Radio di
splay/Easy Connect* and con-
trol panel*
The display can be cleaned with a soft cloth
and a pr
of
e
ssionally available “LCD cleaner”.
Moisten the cloth with a small amount of the
cleaning fluid.
The Easy Connect control panel* should first
be cleaned with a brush so that no dirt goes
into the device or between the keys and
housing. Next, we recommend cleaning the
Easy Connect control panel* using a cloth
dampened with water and washing-up liquid.
CAUTION
●
To avoid s
cratching the screen, do not wipe
the display with a dry cloth.
●
To avoid damage, ensure that no liquid
goes into the Easy Connect control panel*.
Plastic and leatherette parts
Plastic parts and leatherette can be cleaned
w
ith a d
amp c
loth. If this is not sufficient,
plastic parts and leatherette should only be
treated with a special solvent-free plastic
cleaner.
Textile covers and trim parts
Textile covers and trim parts (e.g. seats, door
trim) shou
l
d be c
leaned regularly with a vac-
uum cleaner. This will remove surface dirt
which could otherwise be rubbed into the
textile material during use. Do not use steam
cleaners, as the steam could carry the dirt
deeper into the textile material.
Normal cleaning
We recommend that you use a soft sponge or
a commercially available lint-free, micro-fibre
cloth for normal cleaning. Only use brushes
on floor coverings and mats, as other textile
surfaces could become damaged.
In the case of normal surface dirt you can use
a foam cleaner. Use a sponge to spread the
foam on the textile surface and to work it into
the material lightly. However, make sure that
the textile material does not become soaking
wet. Then dab off the foam with a dry and ab-
sorbent cloth (e.g. a micro-fibre cloth) and
vacuum off any residue once the surface is
completely dry.
Cleaning stains
Treat drink stains (such as coffee or fruit
juice, etc.) with a cleaning solution for deli-
cate fabrics. This solution should be applied
with a sponge. If the stains are difficult to re-
move, a washing paste can be applied direct-
ly onto the stain and worked into the fabric.
The surface will then have to be wiped with
clear water to remove any residue left by the
paste. To do so, use a damp cloth or sponge
and then dab the stain with an absorbent
cloth.
Remove chocolate or make-up stains with a
cleaning paste (for e.g., soft soap). Then re-
move the soap with water (wet sponge).
250
Care and maintenance
A spirit-based cleaner can be used to remove
gr
e
a
se, oil, lipstick or ball point pen. Then
dab the dissolved grease or colour particles
off with an absorbent cloth or similar. You
may also have to treat the stain once more
using washing paste and water.
If the covers or textile trim panels are badly
soiled we recommend that you have them
cleaned by a professional cleaning company
with a shampoo and spray.
Note
Open Velcro fasteners on clothes can damage
the seat upho
lstery. Make sure they are
closed.
Natural leather
General information
Our r
an
g
e of leathers is large. The main type
used is particularly nappa in various forms,
that is, leather with a smooth surface in dif-
ferent colours.
The amount of dye used determines the ap-
pearance and properties of leather. If the
leather is left in a more natural state, it re-
tains its typical natural napped appearance
and confers excellent all-weather properties
to the seats. Fine veins, healed scars, insect
bites, wrinkles and a subtle variation in shad-
ing remain visible; these are the characteris-
tic features of genuine natural leather.
Natural napped leather does not have a pro-
tective surface coating of dye. It is therefore
somewhat more prone to damage. This
should be borne in mind if children or pets
often travel in the car, or if there are other
factors that could lead to damage.
Types of leather with a coloured surface coat-
ing are likely to be more resistant to damage.
This has a great advantage for day-to-day
use. However, this means that the typical
natural characteristics of the surface are less
apparent, though this does not affect quality.
Cleaning and care
Due to the natural properties of the specially
selected hides employed, the finished leath-
er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt,
etc. so a degree of care is required in every-
day use and when looking after the leather.
Dark clothing (especially if damp or incorrect-
ly dyed) may stain leather upholstery on the
seats. Dust and grit in the pores and seams
can scratch and damage the surface. There-
fore leather should be cleaned at regular in-
tervals, depending on the actual amount of
use. When they have been in use for a certain
time, your car seats will acquire a typical and
unmistakable patina. This is characteristic for
leather as a natural product and is a sign of
genuine quality.
To maintain the value of natural leather you
should note the following points:
CAUTION
●
Avoid e
xposing leather to direct sunlight
for long periods, otherwise it may tend to
lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a
prolonged period in the bright sun, it is best
to cover the leather.
●
Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such as
belts, zip fasteners, rivets or similar, can also
leave permanent scratches and rough marks
on the surface of the leather.
Note
●
Use a suit
able impregnating cream with ul-
tra-violet protection at regular intervals and
after cleaning. The cream nourishes and
moisturises the leather, keeps it supple and
able to breathe. A protective film will also
form.
●
Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months and
remove fresh dirt as soon as possible.
●
Remove stains from fresh ball-pen and oth-
er inks, lipstick, shoe cream and similar
stains as soon as possible.
●
Preserve the colour of the leather. A special
coloured cream will renew the colour of the
leather when required and will eliminate dif-
ferences in colour.
251
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Cleaning and care of leather uphols-
t
er
y
Natural leather requires an extra degree of at-
tention and car
e.
Normal cleaning
–
Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa-
ter and wipe over the leather surfaces.
More stubborn dirt
–
More stubborn dirt can be removed using a
mild so
ap solution (pure liquid soap: two
tablespoons dissolved in one litre of wa-
ter).
–
Do not let the water soak through the leath-
er or penetrate into the seams.
–
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Removal of stains
–
Remove fresh water-based stains such as
coffee, tea, juices, blood etc. with an ab-
sorbent cloth or kitchen roll, or use the
cleaning agent from the care set for dried-
on stains.
–
Remove fresh grease-based stains that
have not penetrated the surface such as
butter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc. with an
absorbent cloth or kitchen roll or with the
cleaning agent from the care set.
–
Treat fat-based, dried-in stains with grease-
dissolving spray.
–
Treat less common stains on leather, such
as ball-pen and other inks, felt-tip pens,
nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream
etc. with a special leather stain remover.
Leather maintenance
–
The leather should be treated regularly
(about twice a year) with a special leather-
care product.
–
Apply these products very sparingly.
–
Then wipe off with a soft cloth.
Should you have questions regarding the
care and cleaning of the leather upholstery in
your vehicle, we recommend that you contact
your SEAT Official Service. Our representa-
tives will be happy to advise you and tell you
about the product range for leather conserva-
tion, for example:
●
Cleaning and care set.
●
Coloured leather-care cream.
●
Stain remover for ball-pen inks, shoe cream
etc.
●
Grease dissolving spray.
●
New products and further developments
CAUTION
On no account use solvents (such as petrol,
turpentine), wax
polish, shoe cream or simi-
lar materials.
Cleaning Alcantara upholstery
Removing dust and dirt
–
Moisten a cloth just a lit
tle and wipe down
the seat covers.
Removing stains
–
Moisten a cloth with lukewarm water or di-
luted whit
e spirits.
–
Dab at the stain. Start at the outside and
work inwards.
–
Dry the clean area with a soft cloth.
Do not use leather cleaning products on Al-
cantara seat covers.
You may use a suitable soap on dust and dirt.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can
scratch and damage the surface. If the car is
left standing in the sun for long periods, Al-
cantara leather should be protected against
direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. How-
ever, slight colour variations will arise in nor-
mal use.
252
Intelligent technology
CAUTION
●
Do not use so
lvents, wax polish, shoe
cream, stain removers, leather cleaning prod-
ucts or any similar products on Alcantara.
●
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should
be removed by a specialised workshop.
●
On no account use brushes, hard sponges
or similar utensils.
Seat belts
–
Keep the seat belts clean.
–
For cleaning, use a mild solution of soap
and w
at
er
.
–
Check the condition of the seat belts at reg-
ular intervals.
The retract function may not operate properly
in very dirty belts. Make sure that the inertia
reel seat belts are completely dry before al-
lowing them to retract.
CAUTION
●
Do not remo
ve the seat belts from the vehi-
cle to clean them.
●
Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the
seat belts, as this can damage the webbing.
Ensure that the seat belts do not come into
contact with corrosive fluids.
●
If you find any damage to the belt webbing,
belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,
the belt in question must be replaced by a
speci
alised workshop.
Intelligent technology
El
ectr
omec
hanical steering
Electro-mechanical power steering assists
the driver when st
eering.
Electro-mechanical power steering adapts
electronically to the speed of the car, torque
and turning angle.
If the power steering should fail at any time
or the engine is switched off (for instance
when being towed), the car can still be
steered. However, more effort than normal
will be required to turn the steering wheel.
Driver warning lamps and messages
(in red) Faulty steering! To
park the vehicle
If the warning lamp remains on and the driver
indication appears, the power steering could
be faulty.
Do not continue driving. Seek specialist as-
sistance.
(in yellow) Steering: System
fault! You may continue driving.
If the warning lamp comes on, the steering
could react with more difficultly or more sen-
sitivity than normal. In addition, when driving
in a straight line the steering wheel may be
off-centre.
»
253
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Drive slowly to a specialised workshop and
h
av
e the f
ault repaired.
(in yellow) Steering lock:
fault! Go to an Official Service
The electronic steering lock is malfunction-
ing.
Go to a specialised workshop as soon as
possible and have the fault repaired.
WARNING
Take it immediately to a specialised work-
shop and have the f
ault repaired: risk of acci-
dent!
Note
If the lamp (in red) or else
(in yellow)
lights up briefly, you may continue driving.
Progressive steering
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
pr
ogr
e
ssive steering can adapt steering hard-
ness to the current driving situation. The
power steering only works when the engine
is running.
In city traffic you do not need to turn so much
on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight
turns.
On the road or on the motorway, progressive
steering transmits, for example, in bends, a
sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy-
namic driving sensation.
Four-wheel drive
3 Valid for vehicles: with four-wheel drive
››
› table on page 2
On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow-
er is distributed to all four wheels
General notes
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine
power is distributed to all four wheels. The
distribution of power is controlled automati-
cally according to your driving style and the
road conditions. Also see
›››
page 176, Brak-
ing and stability systems.
The four-wheel drive is specially designed to
complement the superior engine power. This
combination gives the vehicle exceptional
handling and performance capabilities, both
on normal roads and in more difficult condi-
tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per-
haps especially for this reason), it is impor-
tant to observe certain safety points
›››
.
W
int
er ty
res
Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
have plenty of traction in winter conditions,
even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,
we still recommend that winter tyres or all-
season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to
give even better braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains are mandatory,
this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive
›››
page 60.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four
tyres must have the same rolling circumfer-
ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying
tread depths ››› page 273.
Off-roader?
Your SEAT is not an off-road vehicle: it does
not have enough ground clearance to be
used as such. It is therefore best to avoid
rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as
possible.
WARNING
●
Even w
ith four-wheel drive, you should al-
ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-
tions. Do not let the extra safety features
tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
Risk of accident!
●
The braking capability of your vehicle is
limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no
different from a car without four-wheel drive.
So do not be tempted to drive too fast on firm
or slippery roads just because the vehicle
254
Intelligent technology
still has good acceleration in these
conditions. Ri
sk of accident!
●
On wet roads bear in mind that the front
wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose
contact with the road if the car is driven too
fast. If this should happen, there will be no
sudden increase in engine speed to warn the
driver, as occurs with a front-wheel drive car.
For this reason you should always choose a
driving speed suitable for the road condi-
tions. Risk of accident!
Power Management
Thi
s
sy
stem helps to ensure reliable
starting
The power management controls the distribu-
tion of
el
ectric
al energy and thus helps to en-
sure that there is always enough power avail-
able to start the engine.
If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-
tem is left parked for a long time, the battery
will gradually lose its charge because certain
electrical devices, such as the electronic
gearbox lock continues to draw current even
when the ignition is off. In some cases there
may not be enough power available to start
the engine.
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
power management system to control the
distribution of electrical energy. This signifi-
cantly improves reliability when starting the
engine, and also prolongs the useful life of
the battery.
The main functions incorporated in the power
management system are battery diagnosis,
residual current management and dynamic
power management.
Battery diagnosis
The battery diagnosis function constantly
registers the condition of the battery. Sen-
sors detect the battery voltage, battery cur-
rent and battery temperature. This enables
the system to calculate the current power lev-
el and charge condition of the battery.
Residual current management
The residual current management reduces
power consumption while the vehicle is
parked. It controls the supply of power to the
various electrical devices while the ignition is
switched off. The system takes the battery di-
agnosis data into consideration.
Depending on the power level of the battery,
switch off the individual electrical devices
one after the other to prevent the battery
from losing too much charge and to ensure
that the engine can be started reliably.
Dynamic power management
While the vehicle is moving, this function dis-
tributes the available power to the various
electrical devices and systems according to
their requirements. The power management
ensures that on-board systems do not con-
sume more electrical power than the alterna-
tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-
mum possible battery power level.
Note
●
Neither is the po
wer management system
able to overcome the given physical limits.
Please remember that the power and useful
life of the battery are limited.
●
When there is a risk that the vehicle will
not start, the alternator power failure or low
battery charge level warning lamp will be
shown ››› page 109.
Flat battery
Starting ability has first priority.
Shor
t
trip
s, city traffic and low temperatures
all place a heavy load on the battery. In these
conditions a large amount of power is con-
sumed, but only a small amount is supplied.
The situation is also critical if electrical devi-
ces are in use when the engine is not run-
ning. In this case power is consumed when
none is being generated.
»
255
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
In these situations you will be aware that the
po
w
er m
anagement system is intervening to
control the distribution of electrical power.
When the vehicle is parked for long periods
If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of
several days or weeks, the power manage-
ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-
vices one by one or reduce the amount of cur-
rent they are using. This limits the amount of
power consumed and helps to ensure relia-
ble starting even after a long period. Some
convenience functions, such as remote vehi-
cle opening, may not be available under cer-
tain circumstances. These functions will be
restored when you switch on the ignition and
start the engine.
With the engine switched off
For example, if you listen to the sound sys-
tem with the engine switched off the battery
will run down.
If the energy consumption means there is a
risk that the engine will not start, a text will
appear in vehicles with a driver information
system*.
This driver indicator tells you that you must
start the engine so that the battery can re-
charge.
When the engine is running
Although the alternator generates electrical
power, the battery can still become dis-
charged while the vehicle is being driven.
This can occur when a lot of power is being
consumed but only a small amount supplied,
especially if the battery is not fully charged
initially.
To restore the necessary energy balance, the
system will then temporarily shut off the elec-
trical devices that are using a lot of power, or
reduce the current they are consuming. Heat-
ing systems in particular use a large amount
of electrical power. If you notice, for instance,
that the seat heating* or the rear window
heater is not working, they may have been
temporarily switched off or regulated to a
lower heat output. These systems will be
available again as soon as sufficient electri-
cal power is available.
You may also notice that the engine runs at a
slightly faster idling speed when necessary.
This is quite normal, and no cause for con-
cern. The increased idling speed allows the
alternator to meet the greater power require-
ment and charge the battery at the same
time.
Checking and refilling levels
Fi
l
lin
g the tank
Filling up
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 50
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-
rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the
fuel tank is “full”. Do not try to put in more
fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill
the expansion chamber in the fuel tank.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-
en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank
flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at
›››
page 258.
The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-
en in
›››
page 50.
Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-
brids
Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-
rol until the control lamp switches off and
then the tank must be refilled. This is neces-
sary to ensure that the system works proper-
ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv-
ing with petrol.
256
Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and can cause seri-
ous b
urns and other injuries.
●
Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a
canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the
vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
●
Observe legislation governing the use,
storage and carrying of a spare fuel canister
in the vehicle.
●
For safety reasons we do not recommend
carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle.
In an accident the canister could be damaged
and could leak.
●
If, in exceptional circumstances, you have
to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe
the following points:
–
Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canister
if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. An
electrostatic charge could build up during
filling, causing the fuel vapour to ignite.
Danger of explosion. Always place the
canister on the ground to fill it.
–
Insert the filling nozzle as far as possible
into the spare fuel canister.
–
If the spare fuel canister is made of met-
al, the filling nozzle must be in contact
with the canister during filling. This
helps prevent an electrostatic charge
building up.
–
Never spi
ll fuel in the vehicle or in the
luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is ex-
plosive. Risk of fatal accident!
CAUTION
●
If
any
fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it
should be removed immediately. It could oth-
erwise damage the paintwork.
●
Never run the tank completely dry. An irreg-
ular fuel supply could cause misfiring. As a
result, unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust
system and damage the catalytic converter.
●
When filling the fuel tank after having run it
completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en-
gine, the ignition must be switched on for at
least 30 seconds before starting the engine.
When you then start the engine it may take
longer than normal (up to one minute) to
start firing. This is because air needs to be
bled from the fuel system while starting.
For the sake of the environment
Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause the
fuel t
o overflow if it becomes warm.
Note
There is no emergency mechanism for the
manual
release of the fuel tank flap. If neces-
sary, request assistance from specialised per-
sonnel.
Note
Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective de-
vice th
at prevents the insertion of the wrong
fuel hose
1)
. It is only possible to refuel with
Diesel nozzles.
●
If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if
it is very small, it is possible that it will not
be able to open the protective device. Before
trying to insert the pump nozzle by turning it,
try a different pump or request specialist
help.
●
If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel canis-
ter, the protective device will not open. One
way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in very
slowly.
Refuelling with natural gas
Fig. 239 Tank flap open: gas filler mouth
1
,
fi
l
l
er mouth retainer
2
»
1)
Depending on country
257
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Before r
efuelling, the engine and the igni-
tion, mo
b
ile telephone and heating must be
switched off separately ›››
.
R
e
a
d the instructions on how to use the natu-
ral gas pump carefully.
The vehicle is not prepared for refuelling with
liquefied natural gas (LNG) ›››
. Before refu-
el
lin
g w
ith natural gas, make sure you add
the appropriate type of fuel ››› page 258.
Opening the fuel tank cap
The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fuel
tank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth.
●
Unlock the vehicle with the key or with the
central locking button
situated on the driv-
er door ›
›
›
page 116.
●
Press on the rear area of the flap and open
it.
Refuelling
Special feature: if the ambient temperature is
very high, the natural gas pump protection
against overheating disconnects this auto-
matically.
●
Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth
››› Fig. 239
1
.
●
Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas
fi
l
l
er mouth.
●
The fuel tank will be full when the pump
compressor automatically cuts the supply.
●
If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,
press the button on the pump to stop the
flow.
Closing the fuel tank cap
●
Check that the gas filler mouth retainer
2
is not trapped with the filler nozzle. If neces-
s
ar
y
, place it in the filler mouth again.
●
Insert the plug in the filler mouth.
●
Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it
click into place.
WARNING
Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily flam-
mabl
e substance. Incorrect handling of the
natural gas can cause accidents serious
burns and other injuries.
●
Before refuelling with natural gas, engage
the filling mouth correctly. If you can smell
gas, stop refuelling immediately.
WARNING
The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied
natur
al gas (LNG), and this fuel must not be
added under any circumstances. Liquefied
natural gas can cause the natural gas tank to
explode, resulting in serious injury.
Note
●
The fillin
g nozzles of natural gas pumps
can differ in the way they are operated. If you
do not know, ask a qualified employee at the
petrol
station to do the refuelling.
●
Noises heard when refuelling are normal
and do not indicate the presence of a fault in
the system.
●
The vehicle natural gas system is prepared
both for refuelling with a small compressor
(slow refuel) and a large compressor (fast re-
fuel) in natural gas service stations.
Fuel
T
y
pe
s of petrol
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the
f
uel
t
ank flap.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-
verter and must only be run on unleaded pet-
rol. The petrol must comply with European
Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN
51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re-
fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of
10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti-
ated by their octane rating (RON).
The following titles appear on the corre-
sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap:
258
Checking and refilling levels
Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc-
t
ane u
n
leaded petrol
We recommend you use super 95 octane pet-
rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane
petrol, with a slight decrease in power.
Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95
octanes
You should use super petrol with a minimum
of 95 octanes.
If super is not available, in an emergency you
may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In
this case only use moderate engine speeds
and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon
as possible.
Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc-
tane unleaded petrol
We recommend you use super plus 98 octane
petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc-
tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.
If super is not available, in an emergency you
may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In
this case only use moderate engine speeds
and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon
as possible.
Petrol additives
The quality of the fuel influences the behav-
iour, power and service life of the engine.
This is why the petrol you use should carry
suitable additives already included by the
petrol industry, free of metals. These addi-
tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from
building up in the engine.
If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-
tives is not available or engine problems
arise, the necessary additives must be added
when refuelling ›››
.
Not
al
l
petrol additives have been shown to
be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad-
ditives may cause significant damage to the
engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad-
ditives should never be used. Metal additives
may also be contained in petrol additives for
improving anti-detonation ratings or octane
ratings ›››
.
S
EA
T r
ecommends “genuine Volkswagen
Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”.
These additives can be bought at SEAT deal-
ers, where information on how to use them
can also be obtained.
CAUTION
●
Do not ref
uel if the filler indicates that the
fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Using them may damage the
engine!
●
Never refuel with fuels containing a large
proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85).
This could damage the fuel system.
●
Just
filling one full tank of leaded fuel or
fuel containing other metal additives would
seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic
converter.
●
Only use fuel additives that have been ap-
proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti-
knock additives may contain metal additives
that could seriously damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. These additives must
not be used.
●
High engine speed and full throttle can
damage the engine when using petrol with an
octane rating lower than the correct grade for
the engine.
Note
●
You ma
y use petrol with a high octane num-
ber than the one recommended for your en-
gine.
●
In those countries where unleaded petrol is
not available, you may refuel with a fuel with
a low lead content.
Diesel fuel
Please note the information on the inside of
the f
uel
t
ank flap.
We recommend the use of diesel fuel which
complies to European standard EN 590. If
diesel fuel which meets European standard
EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number
(CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine
»
259
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul-
phur c
ont
ent
of the fuel must be below 50
parts per million.
Winter-grade diesel
Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it
is more difficult to start the engine. For this
reason, petrol stations in some countries al-
so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity
when cold (winter-grade diesel).
Water in the fuel filter
1)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is
equipped with a fuel filter with a water sepa-
rator, the instrument panel may display the
following warning:
Water in the
fuel filter. If this is the case, take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop so that
they can drain the fuel filter.
CAUTION
●
The vehic
le is not designed for the use of
FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would
be damaged if you used biodiesel.
●
Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called
“thinners”, petrol or similar additives with
diesel fuel.
●
If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be
necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre-
quently than is specified in the Maintenance
Programme. We recommend having this done
by a s
pecialised workshop. If water is allowed
to collect in the filter, this can cause engine
performance problems.
Natural gas
›››
table on page 2
Natural gas
Natural gas can be compressed or in liquid
form, addition to others.
Liquefied natural gas (LNG) is the result of
heavy cooling of natural gas. Therefore its
volume is considerably reduced compared
with compressed natural gas (CNG). In vehi-
cles with a natural gas engine, liquefied nat-
ural gas cannot be directly refilled, as the gas
would expand excessively in the vehicle gas
tank.
Therefore, vehicles with a natural gas engine
must only be refuelled using compressed
natural gas ›››
.
Nat
ur
a
l gas quality and consumption
Natural gas is divided into the groups H and
L depending on its quality.
Gas type H has a superior heating power and
inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content
than type L. The higher the heating power of
the natural gas, the lower the consumption
will be.
However, the heating power and the propor-
tion of nitrogen and carbon dioxide can fluc-
tuate within the quality groups. Therefore, ve-
hicle consumption can also vary when using
a single type of gas only.
The engine management automatically
adapts to the natural gas used according to
its quality. Therefore, different quality gases
can be mixed in the tank, without the need
for comprehensive draining before applying a
different quality gas.
Updated information relating to natural gas
quality is displayed on the instrument panel
›››
page 30.
Natural gas and safety
If you can smell gas or suspect that there is a
leak ›››
:
●
Stop the vehicle immediately.
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Open the doors to appropriately ventilate
the
v
ehic
le.
●
Extinguish cigarettes immediately.
1)
Valid for the market: Algeria.
260
Checking and refilling levels
●
Mo
v
e a
way from the vehicle or switch off
objects that may cause sparks or a fire.
●
If you continue to smell gas, do not contin-
ue driving!
●
Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault
repaired.
WARNING
Failure to act when you can smell gas in the
vehicl
e or when refuelling can cause serious
injuries.
●
Carry out the necessary operations.
●
Leave the danger zone.
●
If necessary, warn the emergency services.
WARNING
The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied
natur
al gas (LNG) and this fuel must not be
added under any circumstances. Liquefied
natural gas can cause the natural gas tank to
explode, resulting in serious injury.
Note
Have the natural gas system checked regular-
ly by
a specialised workshop, according to
the Maintenance Programme.
261
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Engine compartment
Chec
k
in
g levels
Fig. 240 Diagram for the location of the various elements.
From time to time, the levels of the different
fluid
s
in the
vehicle must be checked. Never
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
Engine oil dipstick
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
Windscreen washer reservoir
The checking and refilling of service fluids
are carried out on the components men-
tioned above. These operations are descri-
bed in ››› page 262.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Overview
Y
ou w
i
ll find further explanations, instruc-
tions and restrictions on the technical speci-
fications as of ››› page 281.
Work in the engine compartment
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 12
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire
when working in the engine compartment
(e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). Al-
ways observe the warnings listed below and
follow all general safety precautions. The en-
gine compartment of the vehicle is a poten-
tial
ly hazardous area ›››
.
WARNING
●
Switc
h the engine off, remove the key from
the ignition and apply the hand brake. If the
vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the lever
in neutral; if it has an automatic gearbox,
place the selector lever in position P. Wait for
the engine to cool down.
●
Keep children away from the engine com-
partment.
●
Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-
tion on the engine compartment, as these
may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in coolant).
262
Checking and refilling levels
●
Take c
are not to cause short circuits in the
electrical system, especially when working
on the battery.
●
If working inside the engine compartment,
remember that, even when the ignition is
switched off, the radiator fan may start up au-
tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in-
jury.
●
Never cover the engine with additional in-
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
fire!
●
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-
pansion tank when the engine is hot. The
cooling system is under pressure.
●
Protect face, hands and arms by covering
the cap with a large, thick rag to protect
against escaping coolant and steam.
●
If it is necessary to work in the engine com-
partment while the engine is running, the ro-
tating components (for example, poly-V belt,
alternator, radiator fan) and the high voltage
ignition system are an additional hazard.
●
Observe the following additional warnings
if work on the fuel system or the electrical
system is necessary:
–
Always disconnect the battery from the
on-board network.
–
Do not smoke.
–
Never work near naked flames.
–
Always keep an approved fire extinguish-
er immediately available.
CAUTION
When topping up fluids make sure the correct
fluid is p
ut into the correct filler opening, oth-
erwise this can cause serious malfunctions or
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Inspect the ground underneath your vehicle
regu
larly so that any leaks are detected at an
early stage. If you find spots of oil or other
fluids in the area where it was parked, have
your vehicle inspected at the workshop.
Note
In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake flu-
id reser
voirs are on the other side of the en-
gine compartment ››› Fig. 240.
Opening the bonnet
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 12
The bonnet is released from inside the vehi-
cle.
Check that the windscreen wiper arms are
not unfolded. Otherwise the paint may be
damaged.
The bonnet can only be unlocked when the
driver door is open.
WARNING
Never open the bonnet if you see steam or
drips of
coolant being released from the en-
gine compartment. Failure to comply could
result in burns. Wait until no steam or coolant
can be seen before opening the bonnet.
Closing the bonnet
–
Slightly lift the bonnet.
–
Release the bonnet stay before pressing it
b
ac
k
into its support.
–
Carefully close the bonnet.
–
Press the bonnet down until it locks into
place.
–
Make sure that the bonnet catches onto its
clasp. Do not press down too hard
›››
.
WARNING
●
For saf
ety reasons the bonnet must always
be completely closed when the vehicle is
moving. Therefore, after closing the bonnet,
always check that the locking element is
properly engaged. This is the case if the bon-
net is flush with the adjacent body panels.
●
Should you notice that the bonnet is not
safely secured when the vehicle is moving,
stop the vehicle immediately and close the
bonnet. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in an accident.
263
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Engine oil
Gener
a
l
notes
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
oil th
at can be used all year round.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-
tial for the correct operation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
changing oil, use only those oils that comply
with VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in
the following page should appear on the con-
tainer of the service oil; when the container
displays the specific standards for petrol and
diesel engines together, it means that the oil
can be used for both types of engines.
We recommend that the oil change indicated
in the Maintenance Programme, be per-
formed by a technical service or specialised
workshop.
The correct oil specifications for your engine
are listed in the
›››
page 51, Oil proper-
ties.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife
service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis-
tance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on the back of the
Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6,
this means that your vehicle has the LongLife
servic
e programmed. If it lists the codes QI1,
QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is
dependent on time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service
intervals*)
Special oils and processes have been devel-
oped which, depending on the characteris-
tics and individual driving profiles, enable
the extension of the oil change service (Long-
Life service intervals).
Because this oil is essential for extending the
service intervals, it must only be used ob-
serving the following indications:
●
Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in-
tervals.
●
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low ››› page 265 and
LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to
top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter-
vals ›››
page 51 (up to a maximum of 0.5
litres).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife
service interval” or it has been disabled (by
request), you may use oils for fixed service
intervals, which also appear in
›››
page 51, Oil properties. In this case,
your vehicle must be serviced after a fixed in-
terval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)
(whatever comes first) ››› Booklet Mainte-
nance Programme.
●
In exceptional circumstances, if the engine
oil level is too low ››› page 265 and you can-
not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,
you can add a small quantity of oil conform-
ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3
(petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die-
sel engines) (up to 0.5 l).
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
The Maintenance Programme states whether
your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate
filter.
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash
formation, may be used in diesel engines
equipped with particulate filter. Using other
types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-
tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-
fore:
●
Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
●
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low ››› page 265 and
you cannot obtain the oil specified for your
vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil
(once) conforming to the VW 506 00,
VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or
ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).
264
Checking and refilling levels
Checking engine oil level
Fig. 241 Engine oil dipstick.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 50
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of
the oil.
Checking oil level
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until
the operating temperature is reached and
then stop.
–
Wait for about two minutes.
–
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with
a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it
in as far as it will go.
–
Then pull it out once more and check the oil
level ››› Fig. 241. Top up with engine oil if
necessary.
Depending on how you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-
sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil
consumption is likely to be higher for the first
5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level
must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-
bly when filling the tank and before a jour-
ney.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compart-
ment or on the engine mu
st be carried out
cautiously.
●
When working in the engine compartment,
always observe the safety warnings
››› page 262.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area
A
do not
star
t the engine. This could result in damage
to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact
a Technical Service.
Topping up engine oil
Fig. 242 In the engine compartment: Engine
oi
l
fi
ller cap
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 50
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe
the warnings ›››
in Work in the engine
c
omp
ar
tment on page 262.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown
in the corresponding engine compartment il-
lustration ››› page 262.
Engine oil specification ›››
page 51.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil
comes
into contact with hot engine compo-
nents when topping up.
»
265
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
CAUTION
If the oil level is above the area
A
do not
star
t the engine. This could result in damage
to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact
a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above area
A
.
Otherwi
se oil can be drawn in through the
crankcase breather and escape into the at-
mosphere via the exhaust system.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an
engine oil
that conforms to the correspond-
ing VW specifications and recommend keep-
ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-
gine oil will always be available for a top-up if
needed.
Changing engine oil
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 50.
The engine oil must be changed at the inter-
vals given in the service schedule.
We recommend that you have the engine oil
changed by a Technical Service.
The oil change intervals are shown in the
Maintenance Programme.
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you
have the s
pecialist knowledge required!
●
Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
serve the warnings ››› page 262.
●
Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil
may cause burn injuries.
●
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such
as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.
●
When removing the oil drain plug with your
fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre-
vent oil from running down your arm.
●
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
●
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
stored in a safe place out of the reach of chil-
dren.
CAUTION
No additives should be used with engine oil.
This c
ould result in engine damage. Any dam-
age caused by the use of such additives
would not be covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
●
Becau
se of disposal problems and the spe-
cial tools and specialist knowledge required,
we recommend that you have the engine oil
and filter changed by a Technical Service.
●
Never pour oil down drains or into the
ground.
●
Use a suit
able container when draining the
used oil. It must be large enough to hold all
the engine oil.
Cooling system
Toppin
g up coolant
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 51
Top up coolant when the level is below the
MIN (minimum) mark.
Checking coolant level
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
pans
ion tank. When the engine is cold, the
coolant level should be between the marks.
When the engine is hot, it may be slightly
above the upper mark.
Topping up coolant
–
Wait for the engine to cool down.
–
Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with
a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left
›››
.
–
Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-
ant
in the e
xp
ansion tank, otherwise you
266
Checking and refilling levels
could d
amage the engine. If there is no
c
oo
lant in the expansion tank, do not con-
tinue driving. You should obtain professio-
nal assistance ›››
.
–
If there is still some coolant in the expan-
s
ion t
ank, t
op up to the upper mark.
–
Top up with coolant until the level becomes
stable.
–
Screw the cap back on correctly.
Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a
leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle
straight to a specialised workshop to have
the cooling system examined. If there are no
leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of
coolant can only occur if the coolant boils
and is forced out of the system as a result of
overheating.
WARNING
●
The coolin
g system is under pressure. Do
not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-
sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of
burns!
●
The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a
health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze
should be stored in the original container in a
safe place out of reach of children. Failure to
comply could result in poisoning.
●
If working inside the engine compartment,
remember that, even when the ignition is
switched off, the radiator fan may start up au-
tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in-
jury.
WARNING
If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool-
ant
sys
tem, the engine may fail leading to se-
rious damage.
●
Please make sure that the percentage of
additive is correct with respect to the lowest
expected ambient temperature in the zone in
which the vehicle is to be used.
●
When the outside temperature is very low,
the coolant could freeze and the vehicle
would be immobilised. In this case, the heat-
ing would not work either and inadequately
dressed passengers could die of cold.
CAUTION
Do not top up the expansion tank with cool-
ant fluid if it
is empty! Air could enter the
cooling system. In this case, stop driving.
Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, there
is a risk of engine damage.
CAUTION
The original additives should never be mixed
with coo
lants which are not approved by
SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing
severe damage to the engine and the engine
cooling system.
●
If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur-
ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates
that the G13 additive has been mixed with an
inadequat
e coolant. The coolant must be
changed as soon as possible if this is the
case! This could result in serious faults and
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate the
en
vir
onment. If any fluids are spilled, they
should be collected and correctly disposed
of, with respect to the environment.
Brake fluid
T
op
pin
g up brake fluid
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 52
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid level must be between the
MIN and MAX markings.
However, if the brake fluid level goes down
noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
MIN mark, there may be a leak in the brake
system. Seek specialist assistance. A warn-
ing light on the instrument panel display
monitors the brake fluid level ››› page 109.
»
267
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid
r
e
ser
voir is on the other side of the engine
compartment.
Changing brake fluid
The regular intervals at which the brake fluid
should be replaced are listed in the Mainte-
nance Programme. We recommend you have
it replaced at a SEAT Official Service, during
an Inspection Service.
WARNING
●
Brake fluid shou
ld be stored in the closed
original container in a safe place out of reach
of children. Risk of poisoning!
●
If the brake fluid is left in the system for
too long and the brakes are subjected to
heavy use, vapour bubbles may form in the
brake system. This would seriously affect the
efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the
vehicle. This may cause an accident.
CAUTION
Brake fluid should not come into contact with
the vehic
le paintwork, as it is abrasive.
Windscreen washer reservoir
Chec
k
in
g and topping up the wind-
screen washer reservoir
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 52
Check the water level in the windscreen
washer reservoir regularly and top up as re-
quired.
The container for the windscreen washer con-
tains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen,
the rear window and the headlight washer
system*.
●
Open the bonnet
›››
page 262.
●
The windscreen washer reservoir is marked
with the symbol on the cap.
●
Check there is enough windscreen water in
the reservoir.
Recommended windscreen wipers
●
For the hottest seasons we recommend
summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-
tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:
1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-
ter).
●
All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear
glass. Approximate proportion of the winter
mixture, up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part con-
centrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4
proportion of mixture in the washer fluid
tank.
Capacity
The reservoir holds approximately 3 litres in
versions without headlight washer and 5 li-
tres in versions with headlight washer.
WARNING
If the water from the windscreen washer does
not cont
ain enough anti-freeze, it may freeze
on the windscreen and rear window, reducing
forward and rear visibility.
●
In winter, ensure the windscreen washer
contains enough anti-freeze.
●
In cold conditions, you should not use the
windscreen wiper system unless you have
warmed the windscreen with the ventilation
system. The antifreeze could freeze on the
windscreen and reduce visibility.
WARNING
Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other
simil
ar additives with the windscreen washer
water. A greasy layer may be formed on the
windscreen which will impair visibility.
●
Use clean water with a window cleaner rec-
ommended by SEAT.
●
If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to
the water in the reservoir.
268
Checking and refilling levels
CAUTION
●
Do not mix
cleaning products recommen-
ded by SEAT with other products. This could
lead to flocculation and may block the wind-
screen washer jets.
●
When topping up service fluids, make abso-
lutely certain that you fill the fluids into the
correct reservoirs. Using the wrong fluids
could cause serious malfunctions and engine
damage!
●
Not having windscreen wiper fluid reduces
visibility through the windscreen, and leads
to loss of visibility in headlights in models
with headlight washer.
Battery
Gener
a
l
information
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 52.
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is
checked as part of the Inspection Service.
Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean
and have the correct tightening torque, espe-
cially in summer and winter.
Disconnecting the battery
The battery should only be disconnected in
exceptional cases. When the battery is dis-
connected, some of the vehicle's functions
are “lost” (››› table on page 269). These
functions will require resetting after the bat-
tery is reconnected.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you
disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm
will be triggered.
Function Reprogramming
One-touch function of
the electric windows
››› page 128, One-touch
opening and closing*.
Remote control key
If the vehicle does not re-
spond to the key, they
should be synchronised
››› page 123.
Digital clock ››› page 106.
ESC warning lamp
After driving for a few me-
tres, the warning lamp goes
out again.
If the vehicle is not used for long periods
The
v
ehic
le has a system for monitoring the
current consumption when the engine is left
unused for long periods of time ››› page 255.
Some functions, such as the interior lights, or
the remote door opening, may be temporarily
disabled to prevent the battery from running
flat. These functions will come back on as
soon as the ignition is switched on and the
engine started.
Winter conditions
During the winter, the starting power may be
reduced, and if necessary, the battery should
be charged ›››
in Important safety warn-
in
g
s
for handling a vehicle battery on
page 270
Important safety warnings for han-
dling a vehicle battery
All work on batteries requires specialist
kno
wl
edg
e. Please refer to a SEAT Official
Service or a workshop specialising in batter-
ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!
The battery must not be opened. Never try to
change the fluid level of the battery. Other-
wise explosive gas is released from the bat-
tery that could cause an explosion.
Wear eye protection.
Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear
protective gloves and eye protection. In the event
of electrolyte splashes, rinse off with plenty of
water.
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro-
hibited.
The battery should only be charged in a well-ven-
tilated zone. Risk of explosion!
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
»
269
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
WARNING
●
When repairin
g or working on the electrical
system, proceed as follows:
–
1. Remove the key from the ignition. The
negative cable on the battery must be
disconnected.
–
2. When the repair is finished, reconnect
the negative pole of the battery.
●
Switch off all electrical devices before re-
connecting the battery. Reconnect first the
positive cable and then the negative cable.
Never reverse the polarity of the connections.
This could cause an electrical fire.
●
Ensure that the vent hose is always connec-
ted to the battery.
●
Never use damaged batteries. This could
cause an explosion! Replace a damaged bat-
tery immediately.
CAUTION
●
Never dis
connect the battery if the ignition
is switched on or if the engine is running.
This could damage the electrical system or
electronic components.
Charging the battery
Terminals for charging the battery are fitted
in the en
gine c
omp
artment.
–
Note the warnings ›››
in Important safety
w
arnin
g
s for handling a vehicle battery on
page 270 and ›››
.
–
Switch off all electrical devices. Remove the
ignition k
ey
.
–
R
aise the bonnet ››› page 263.
–
Open the battery cover.
–
Connect the charger clamps as described
to the positive pole of the battery (+) and
exclusively to an earth on the bodywork
(–).
–
Only use a charger which is compatible for
use with 12 V nominal voltage batteries.
The charge must not exceed a voltage of 15
V.
–
Now connect the battery charger to the
power socket and switch on.
–
After charging the battery: switch off the
battery charger and disconnect the power
socket cable.
–
Finally disconnect the charger cables from
the battery.
–
Replace the battery cover correctly.
–
Close the bonnet ››› page 263.
Important: Before you charge the battery
make sure you read the manufacturer's in-
structions for using the battery charger.
WARNING
Never charge a battery that has frozen: re-
plac
e battery! Failure to do so may lead to an
explosion.
Note
Use only the terminals in the engine compart-
ment to c
harge the battery.
Replacing the battery
The new battery should have the same speci-
fic
ation
s
(amperage, load and voltage) as the
used battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent
power management system to control the
distribution of electrical energy
›››
page 255.
The power management function ensures
that the battery is charged much more effi-
ciently than on vehicles without a power
management system. To maintain this func-
tion after replacing the battery, we recom-
mend that the replacement battery used is of
the same make and type as the original fitted
battery. To make proper use of the power
management function after the battery has
been changed, have the battery coded to the
power management mode at a specialised
workshop.
270
Wheels
CAUTION
●
Some vehic
les, for example those with the
Start-Stop system* are fitted with a special
battery (AGM-type or EFB-type battery). If any
other type of battery is fitted, the Start-Stop
function may be considerably reduced and
the vehicle may not stop on repeated occa-
sions.
●
Make sure that the vent hose is always at-
tached to the original opening on the side of
the battery. Gases or battery acid can other-
wise escape and possibly cause damage.
●
The battery holder and clamps must always
be correctly secured.
●
Before starting any work on the battery, al-
ways observe the warnings listed under
››› page 269, Important safety warnings for
handling a vehicle battery.
●
Do not forget to replace the battery cover-
ings, where applicable. It is a protection for
high temperatures. This in turn extends the
vehicle service life.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances includ-
ing s
ulphuric acid and lead. They must be
disposed of appropriately and must not be
disposed of with ordinary household waste.
Make sure disconnected batteries cannot tip
over. Sulphuric acid could be spilt!
Wheels
Wheel
s
and ty
res
General notes
–
When driving with new tyre
s, be especially
careful during the first 500 km (300 miles).
–
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar
obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as
possible at a right angle to the obstacle.
–
Check from time to time if the tyres are
damag
ed (punctures, cuts, cracks or
dents). Remove any foreign objects embed-
ded in the treads.
–
Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
placed immediately.
–
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
–
Replace any missing valve caps as soon as
possible.
–
Mark the wheels before taking them off so
that they rotate in the same direction when
put back.
–
When removed, the wheels or tyres should
be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark
place.
New tyres
New tyres do not give maximum grip straight
away and should therefore be “run in” by
driving carefully and at moderate speeds for
about the first 500 km (300 miles). This will
also increase the useful life of the tyres.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-
cording to the type and make of tyre and the
tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily
visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the
car pulling to one side, this may indicate that
one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed
immediately if there is any reason to suspect
that damage may have occurred. Inspect the
tyres for damage. If no external damage is
visible, drive slowly and carefully to the near-
est specialised workshop and have the car
inspected.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-
rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-
ways note the direction of rotation indicated
when mounting the wheel. This guarantees
optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan-
ing, excessive noise and wear.
Retrofitting accessories
If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or
wheel trims, we recommend that you consult
with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice
regarding current techniques.
271
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Tyre useful life
Fig. 243 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-
in
g h
ab
its will increase the useful life of your
tyres.
–
Check tyre pressure at least once a month,
and also prior to any long trip.
–
The tyre pressure should only be checked
when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
pressure of warm tyres.
–
Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-
ried by the vehicle.
–
In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,
save the modified pressure of tyres
››› page 275.
–
Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.
–
Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from
time to time.
The useful life of your tyres depends on the
following factors:
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure values are indicated on the
sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap
››› Fig. 243.
Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-
duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-
ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-
rect inflation pressures are very important,
especially at high speeds.
Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can
be adjusted to medium load to improve driv-
ing comfort (tyre pressure ). When driving
with comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption
may increase slightly.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted according
to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehi-
cle is going to carry the maximum load, the
tyre pressure should be increased to maxi-
mum value indicated on the sticker on the in-
side of the fuel tank flap.
Do not forget the spare wheel when checking
the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-
flated to the highest pressure required for the
road wheels.
In the case of a minimised temporary spare
wheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate to
a pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre
pressure label on the fuel tank flap.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre
wear.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
However, certain circumstances may lead to
imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-
brations in the steering wheel.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as
they otherwise cause excessive wear on
steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted
or if a tyre is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-
cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the
vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you
should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Offi-
cial Service.
272
Wheels
WARNING
●
Alwa
ys adapt the tyre pressure accordingly
when the vehicle load changes.
●
A tyre with low air pressure has to flex a lot
more when the vehicle is heavily loaded or at
high speeds, therefore causing overheating
to occur. Under these conditions, the tyre
bead may be released or the tyre may burst.
Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption.
Wear indicators
Fig. 244 Tyre tread: tread wear indicators
Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is
w
orn.
The origin
al
tyres on your vehicle have
1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” running
across the tread. Depending on the manufac-
turer, there will be 6 to 8 of them spaced at
equal distances around the tyre. Markings on
the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters
“TWI” or a triangle) indicate the positions of
the tread wear indicators.
The minimum tread depth required by law is
1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next
to the tread wear indicators). (Different fig-
ures may apply in other countries.)
WARNING
The tyres must be replaced at the latest when
the trea
d is worn down to the tread wear indi-
cators. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in an accident.
●
Especially in difficult driving conditions
such as wet or icy roads. It is important that
the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be
approximately the same on the tyres of both
the front and the rear axles.
●
The scant driving safety due to insufficient
tread depth is particularly evident in vehicle
handling, when there is a risk of “aquaplan-
ing” in deep puddles of water and when driv-
ing through corners, and braking is also ad-
versely affected.
●
The speed has to be adapted accordingly,
otherwise there is a risk of losing control over
the vehicle.
Changing wheels
Fig. 245 Interchanging tyres.
To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres
the wheel
s
shou
ld be changed round from
time to time according to the system
››› Fig. 245. The useful life of all the tyres will
then be about the same time.
New tyres or new wheels
–
All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of
the s
ame type, s
iz
e (rolling circumference)
and preferably the same tread pattern.
–
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs
and not individually (i.e. both front tyres or
both rear tyres together).
–
Do not use tyres whose effective size ex-
ceeds the dimensions of the factory-ap-
proved makes of tyre.
»
273
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
–
If
y
ou wish to fit the vehicle with rims or
tyres different to those installed in manu-
facture, it is advisable to consult a SEAT Of-
ficial Service before purchasing them.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential
part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and
rims approved by SEAT are specially matched
to the characteristics of the vehicle and make
a major contribution to good roadholding
and safe handling ›››
.
The s
iz
e
s of the rims and tyres approved for
your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-
mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or
COC document
1)
). The vehicle documentation
varies depending on the country of resi-
dence.
A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. The follow-
ing wording can be read on the sides of the
tyre:
205/55 R16 91V
This contains the following information:
205 Tyre width in mm
55 Height/width ratio in %
R Tyre construction: Radial
16 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
V Speed index
The manufacturing date is also indicated on
the tyr
e sidewall (possibly only on the inner
part):
DOT ... 2212 ...
it means, for example, that the tyre was man-
ufactured in the 22nd week of 2012.
But note that with some types of tyre, the ac-
tual tyre size can differ from the nominal size
marked on the tyre (for instance 205/55 R 16
91 W), and there may be significant differen-
ces in the contours of the tyres, even though
the tyres are marked with the same nominal
size designation. When replacing the tyres,
it is therefore important to make sure that
the actual size of the new tyres does not ex-
ceed the dimensions of the factory-approved
makes of tyre.
Failure to observe this requirement can af-
fect the clearance needed for the tyres. If the
tyres rub against the bodywork, in certain
circumstances the tyres, running gear or
bodywork and pipes may be damaged, and
vehicle safety could be severely impaired
›››
.
If
y
ou use tyres that are approved by SEAT
you can be sure that the actual tyre dimen-
sions will be correct for your vehicle. If you
decide to fit a different type of tyre, you must
obtain the appropriate manufacturer's certif-
icate from the tyre retailer to confirm that
the tyres are suitable for your vehicle. Keep
this certificate in a safe place.
Your SEAT Official Service will be able to ad-
vise you on which tyres may be fitted to your
vehicle.
It is best to have all servicing of wheels and
tyres performed by a specialised workshop.
They are familiar with the procedure and
have the necessary special tools and spare
parts as well as the proper facilities for dis-
posing of the old tyres respecting the envi-
ronment.
WARNING
●
It is
very important to ensure that the tyres
you have chosen have adequate clearance.
When selecting replacement tyres, do not re-
ly entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on
the tyre, since the effective tyre size can dif-
fer significantly depending on the manufac-
turer. Inadequate tyre clearance can result in
damage to the tyres or the vehicle, causing a
serious safety risk. Risk of accident! It may
also invalidate the vehicle's registration for
use on public roads.
1)
COC = certificate of conformity.
274
Wheels
●
Avoid ru
nning the vehicle on tyres that are
more than 6 years old. If you have no
alternative, you should drive slowly and with
extra care at all times.
●
If wheel trims are fitted after the car is pur-
chased, ensure that there is an adequate flow
of air for cooling the brake system.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to
the l
aw
s in the country concerned.
Note
●
A SEA
T Service Centre should be consulted
to find out whether wheels or tyres of differ-
ent sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT
can be fitted, and to find out about the com-
binations allowed between the front axle
(axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
●
Never mount used tyres if you are not sure
of their “previous history”.
●
For technical reasons, it is not generally
possible to use the wheels from other vehi-
cles. In some cases, this may also be true for
the same model of wheel.
Wheel bolts
The wheel
bolts ar
e m
atched to the rims.
When installing different wheels (for instance
alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is
important to use the correct wheel bolts with
the right length and correctly shaped bolt
heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-
curely and that the brake system functions
correctly.
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi-
ly.
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-
theft wheel bolts* ›››
page 58.
Tyre monitoring systems
Introduction
WARNING
Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres
may
lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to
tread separation or even to a blow-out.
●
Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure
they are maintained at the pressures indica-
ted. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause
overheating, resulting in tread detachment or
even burst tyres.
●
Tyre pressure should be that indicated on
the label when the tyres are cold at all times
››› page 283.
●
Regularly check the cold inflation pressure
of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre
pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are
cold.
●
Regu
larly check your tyres for damage and
wear.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
speed or loads specified for the type of tyre
fitted on your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel
c
ons
umption and tyre wear.
Note
●
Driv
in
g f
or the first time with new tyres at a
high speed can cause them to slightly ex-
pand, which could then produce an air pres-
sure warning.
●
Only replace used tyres with those author-
ised by SEAT for the corresponding type vehi-
cle.
●
Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring sys-
tem. Regularly check your tyres to ensure
that the tyre pressure is correct and that the
tyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts,
tears and impacts/dents. Remove objects
from the tyres only when they have not
pierced the tyres.
275
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Tyre monitoring indicator
If a light appears
The pressure in one or more tyres has
clearly reduced in comparison to the
tyre pressure set by the driver or the
tyre has structural damage.
Additionally, an audible warning can be heard and a text
message can be seen on the instrument panel display.
Stop! Reduce speed immediately! Stop the vehicle
safely as soon as possible. Avoid sudden manoeuvres
and braking! Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any
damaged tyres.
If flashing
System malfunction
The control lamp flashes for approximately one minute
and then lights up permanently.
If tyre pressure is correct, switch the ignition off and on
again. If the control lamp remains lit up, the tyre moni-
toring indicator can be calibrated. Have the system
checked by a specialised workshop.
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a f
ew sec
onds when the ignition is switch-
ed on while the function is verified. They will
switch off after a few seconds.
WARNING
When the tyres are inflated at different pres-
sure
s or at a pressure that is too low then a
tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of
control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal
accident
.
●
If the warning lamp lights up, stop im-
mediately and check the tyres.
●
If the tyres are inflated at different pres-
sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this will
increase tyre wear, negatively affecting vehi-
cle stability and increasing braking distan-
ces.
●
If tyres are inflated at different pressures or
a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be dam-
aged and burst resulting in a loss of control
of the vehicle.
●
The driver is responsible for ensuring that
all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated
to the right pressure. The recommended tyre
pressure is indicated on the label
››› page 283.
●
The tyre monitoring system can only oper-
ate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated to
the correct pressure when cold.
●
Driving with tyres at the wrong pressure
can damage them and result in an accident.
Ensure that the tyre pressures of all the tyres
correspond to the vehicle load.
●
Before starting a journey, always inflate
tyres to the correct pressure.
●
Tyres with insufficient pressure are subjec-
ted to more flexing. Due to this, the tyre
could become excessively hot, causing tread
separation and also tyre blow-out.
●
With an overloaded vehicle at high speed,
the tyres can overheat and burst resulting in
a loss of vehicle control.
●
Tyr
e pressures which are too high or too
low reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect-
ing vehicle performance.
●
If a tyre has not been punctured and it does
not have to be changed immediately, drive to
the nearest specialised workshop at a moder-
ate speed and have the tyre checked and in-
flated to the correct pressure.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings ›
››
in Warning
and contro
l lamps on page 109.
Note
●
If ex
cessively low tyre pressure is detected
with the ignition on, an audible warning will
sound. In the event that there is a fault in the
system, an audible warning will sound.
●
Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of
time or driving in a sporty style can tempora-
rily deactivate the TPMS. The control lamp
shows a fault, but disappears when road con-
ditions or the driving style change.
276
Wheels
Tyre monitoring indicator
Fig. 246 Instrument panel: warning of loss of
ty
r
e pr
essure.
The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel
r
ev
o
lutions and, with this information, the
tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If
the rolling circumference of one or more
wheels has changed, the tyre monitoring in-
dicator will indicate this on the instrument
panel through a warning lamp and a warning
to the driver ››› Fig. 246. When only one spe-
cific tyre is affected, its position within the
vehicle will be indicated.
Loss of pressure: Check left
tyre pressure!
Wheel tread change
The wheel tread changes when:
●
Tyre pressure is manually changed
●
Tyre pressure is insufficient
●
Tyre structure is damaged
●
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a
load
●
The wheels on an axle are subject to a
heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).
●
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains
●
The temporary spare wheel is fitted
●
The wheel on one axle is changed
There may be a delay in the reaction of the
tyre monitoring indicator or it may not in-
dicate anything under certain circumstances
(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un-
paved roads, or when driving with snow
chains).
Calibrating the tyre monitoring indica-
tor
Fig. 247 Glove compartment: tyre control
sw
it
c
h.
After changing the tyre pressure or replacing
one or mor
e wheel
s, the ty
re monitoring indi-
cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for
example, when the front and rear wheels are
swapped.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy
Connect system with the
button and the
f
u
nction b
utton
Setup
›
›
›
p
age 27 or us-
ing the switch located in the glove compart-
ment
1)
››› Fig. 247.
When driving, the system self-calibrates the
tyre pressure provided by the driver and the
wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied
»
1)
In vehicles without the Infotainment system:
277
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
speeds the programmed values are collected
and monit
or
ed.
W
ith the wheels under very heavy loads, the
tyre pressure must be increased to the total
recommended tyre pressure before the cali-
bration ››› page 283.
Note
●
The tyre monit
oring indicator does not
function when there is a fault in the ESC or
ABS ››› page 176.
●
An erroneous indication may be given when
snow chains are in use because they increase
the tread of the wheel.
Temporary spare wheel
Gener
a
l
information
Fig. 248 Compact temporary spare wheel:
r
ai
sed floor p
anel.
The temporary spare wheel has been de-
s
igned t
o be u
sed for short periods of time.
Have the tyres checked, and if necessary, re-
placed as soon as possible at a SEAT Official
Service or at a specialised workshop.
Please note the following restrictions when
using the compact temporary spare wheel.
The compact temporary spare wheel is de-
signed specifically for this model. For this
reason, do not use a temporary spare wheel
from a different type of vehicle.
Removing the temporary spare wheel
–
Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove
the temporary spare wheel ››› Fig. 248.
–
Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise.
–
Take out the temporary spare wheel.
Chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not
be used on the temporary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front
wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-
porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear
wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel
that you have removed and replace the punc-
tured front wheel with this wheel.
WARNING
●
After fittin
g the temporary spare wheel,
check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.
Failure to do so may cause an accident. The
tyre pr
essures are listed on the inside of the
fuel tank flap.
●
Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)
when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on
the vehicle: risk of accident!
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and
fast cornering: risk of accident!
●
Never use more than one temporary spare
wheel at the same time, risk of accident.
●
No other type of tyre (normal summer or
winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact
temporary spare wheel rim.
●
If you are driving using the spare wheel,
the ACC system could automatically switch
off during the journey. Switch off the system
when starting off.
278
Wheels
Extraction of the spare wheel in vehi-
c
l
e
s with SEAT SOUND 10 speakers
(with subwoofer)*
Fig. 249 In the luggage compartment: re-
mo
v
e the s
ubwoofer.
To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-
mo
v
e the
subwoofer.
–
Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel
(carpet) as follows:
–
LEON/LEON SC model: first, pull the carpet
in the direction of the backrest and then
pull it upwards to remove it. LEON ST mod-
el: lift and secure the floor storage com-
partment as explained in ››› page 160.
–
Disconnect the subwoofer’s speaker cable
››› Fig. 249
1
.
–
T
urn the sec
urin
g wheel in an anti-clock-
wise direction
2
.
–
Remove the s
ub
woofer
speaker and the
spare wheel.
–
When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the
subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim
with care. When doing so, the tip of the
“FRONT” arrow on the subwoofer should
point forward.
–
Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-
tate the securing wheel clockwise so that
the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly
in place.
Winter service
Winter tyres
–
Winter tyres must be fitted on a
l
l
four
wheels.
–
Only use winter tyres that are approved for
your vehicle.
–
Please note that the maximum permissible
speed for winter tyres may be lower than
for summer tyres.
–
Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-
fective when the tread is worn down.
–
After fitting the wheels you must always
check the tyre pressures. When doing so,
take into account the correct tyre pressures
listed on the rear of the front left door
frame ››› page 272.
In winter road conditions winter tyres will
considerably improve vehicle handling. The
design of summer tyres (width, rubber com-
pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice
and snow. This applies particularly to vehi-
cles equipped with wide section tyres or with
high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on
the sidewall).
Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-
proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these
tyres are specified in the vehicle's docu-
ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or
COC
1)
). The vehicle documentation varies de-
pending on the country of residence. See al-
so ››› page 273.
Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-
ties when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The performance of winter tyres is also se-
verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is
still much deeper than 4 mm.
Winter tyres are subject to the following max-
imum speed limits according to speed rating
code letter: ›››
»
1)
COC = certificate of conformity.
279
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Advice
Speed rating
code letter
››› page 273
Maximum speed limit
Q 160 km/h (100 mph)
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V
240 km/h (149 mph) (please note
relevant restrictions)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds
mu
s
t
have an appropriate sticker attached so
that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stickers
are available from the SEAT Official Service
and specialised workshop. Please note the
regulations to this effect in your country.
“All-weather” tyres can also be used instead
of winter tyres.
Using winter tyres with V-rating
Please note that the generally applicable
240 km/h (150 mph) speed rating for winter
tyres with the letter V is subject to technical
restrictions; the maximum permissible
speed for your vehicle may be significantly
lower. The maximum speed limit for these
tyres depends directly on the maximum axle
weights for your car and on the listed weight
rating of the tyres being used.
It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to
check the maximum speed which is permissi-
ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on
the basis of this information.
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum speed permitted for
the winter ty
res fitted on your car can cause
tyre failure, resulting in a loss of control of
the vehicle – risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
Summer tyres should be fitted again as soon
as po
ssible after the winter period; they give
better handling on roads which are free of
snow and ice. Summer tyres perform with
less rolling noise, tyre wear and – most im-
portant – reduce fuel consumption.
280
Technical specifications
Technical data
T
ec
hnic
al specifications
Important
The information in the vehicle documentation
alway
s takes precedence over the informa-
tion in this Instruction Manual.
All technical specifications provided in this
documentation are valid for the standard
model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-
ded in the Maintenance Programme or the
vehicle registration documents shows which
engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending
whether additional equipment is fitted, for
different models, for special vehicles and for
other countries.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi-
cations
section
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly used
to denote engine power.
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
CZ
Cetane number, indication of the diesel
combustion power.
RON
Research octane number, indication of
the knock resistance of petrol.
Vehicle identification data
Fig. 250 Vehicle data sticker (luggage com-
p
ar
tment).
Fig. 251 Chassis number.
VIN in the Easy Connect
–
Select: button
> function button SETUP
> Service > Chassis number.
Ch
a
s
sis number
The VIN is located in the Easy Connect, on the
vehicle data sticker and under the wind-
screen, on the driver side ››› Fig. 251. Addi-
tionally, the chassis number is located in the
engine compartment, on the right-hand side.
The number is engraved on the top side rail,
and is partially covered.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the right side
door pillar. Vehicles for certain export coun-
tries do not have a type plate.
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker is under the carpet
trim in the luggage compartment, in the
»
281
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
spare wheel well. A sticker with the vehicle
d
at
a i
s attached to the inside cover of the
Maintenance Programme.
The following information is provided on the
vehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 250
Vehicle identification number (chassis
number)
Vehicle type, model, capacity, engine
type, finish, engine power and gearbox
type
Engine code, gearbox code, external
paint code and internal equipment code
Optional extras and PR numbers
Identifying letters
The identifying letters of the engine can be
viewed on the instrument panel when the en-
gine is switched off and the ignition is on.
●
Hold down the
0.0/SET
4
›
›
› Fig. 120
but-
ton for more than 15 seconds.
Information on fuel consump-
tion
Fuel consumption
Approved consumption values are derived
fr
om me
a
surements performed or supervised
by certified EU laboratories, according to the
1
2
3
4
legislation in force at the time (for more infor-
m
ation, see the P
ub
lications Office of the Eu-
ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-
ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and
apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.
The values relating to fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions can be found in the documen-
tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-
cle at the time of purchase.
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions depend
on the equipment/features of each individual
vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road
conditions, traffic conditions, environmental
conditions, load or number of passengers.
Note
In practice, and considering all the factors
mentioned here, con
sumption values can dif-
fer from those calculated in the current Euro-
pean regulations.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a
f
uel
t
ank filled to 90% capacity and without
optional extras. The figure quoted includes
75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.
Special versions, optional equipment fittings
or retro-fitting accessories will increase the
weight of the vehicle
›››
.
WARNING
●
Plea
se note that the centre of gravity may
shift when transporting heavy objects; this
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
cident. Always adjust your speed and driving
style to suit road conditions and require-
ments.
●
Never exceed the gross axle weight rating
or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-
missible axle load or the permissible total
weight is exceeded, the driving characteris-
tics of the vehicle may change, which could
lead to accidents, injuries and damage to the
vehicle.
Trailer mode
T
r
ai
ler weights
Trailer weight
The tr
ai
l
er weights and drawbar loads ap-
proved are selected in intensive trials accord-
ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-
proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in
the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50
mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100
km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different
in other countries. All data in the official vehi-
cle documentation takes precedence over
these data at all times
›››
.
282
Technical specifications
Drawbar loads
The maximum permitt
ed dr
a
wbar load on the
ball joint of the towing bracket must not ex-
ceed 80 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend
that you always tow approaching the maxi-
mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-
er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar
load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load
cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and
light-weight single axle trailers or tandem
axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1
metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer
weight is legally required for the drawbar
load.
WARNING
●
For saf
ety reasons, you should not drive at
speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing
a trailer. This also applies in countries where
higher speeds are permitted.
●
Never exceed the maximum trailer weights
or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle
load or the permissible total weight is excee-
ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle
may change, leading to accidents, injuries
and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
T
y
r
e pressure, snow chains, wheel
bolts
Tyre pressures
The stick
er with the tyre pressure values can
be found on the rear of the front left door
frame. The tyre pressure values given there
are for cold tyres. The slightly raised pres-
sures of warm tyres must not be reduced.
›››
The pressure for win
t
er
tyres is 0.2 bar
(2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer
tyres.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front
wheels, and only for the following tyres:
195/65 R15 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
205/55 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
205/50 R17 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
225/45 R17 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm
225/40 R18 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm
225/35 R19 Chains with links of maximum 7 mm
205/55 R17 Snow chains are not permitted
225/45 R18 Snow chains are not permitted
Wheel bolts
Af
t
er the wheel
s have been changed, the
tightening torque of the wheel bolts should
be checked as soon as possible with a torque
wrench ›››
. The tightening torque for steel
and al
lo
y
wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
●
Check the ty
re pressure at least once per
month. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-
portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too
low, there is an increased danger of accidents
- particularly at high speeds.
●
If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-
ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and
threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Technical
Servic
e for information about appropriate
wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
283
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Engine data
P
etr
o
l engine 1.2 63 kW (86 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
63 (86)/4,300-5,300 160/1,400-3,500 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC LEON ST
Top speed (km/h) 178 (V) 178 (V) 178 (V)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.6 7.5 7.8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.9 11.8 12.1
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,800
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,188 1,168 1,233
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 890 940 880
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 860 810 970
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 590 580 610
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,300 1,300 1,300
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100 1,100 1,100
284
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.2 TSI 81 kW (110 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
81 (110)/4,600-5,600 175/1,400-4,000 4/1,197 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights
LEON LEON SC LEON ST
Manual Start-Stop Manual Start-Stop Manual Start-Stop
Top speed (km/h) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V) 194 (V)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.6 6.6 6.7 6.5 6.7 6.7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.9 9.9 10.1 9.8 10.1 10.1
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,740 1,740 1,710 1,730 1,790 1,800
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,213 1,213 1,186 1,193 1,240 1,247
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 900 900 950 950 880 890
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 890 890 810 830 960 960
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 600 600 590 590 620 620
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300
285
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Petrol engine 1.6 MPI 81 kW (110 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
81 (110)/5,800 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights
LEON
manual
LEON
automatic
LEON SC
manual
LEON SC
automatic
LEON ST
manual
LEON ST
automatic
Top speed (km/h) 189 (IV) 185 (V) 189 (V) 185 (V) 189 (V) 185 (V)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.7 7.4 6.6 7.5 6.9 7.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.5 11.4 10.4 11.6 10.8 11.8
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,740 1,770 1,710 1,730 1,790 1,830
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,192 1,230 1,175 1,210 1,228 1,275
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 880 920 940 970 870 910
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 900 820 810 970 970
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 590 610 580 600 610 630
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
286
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.0 TSI 85 kW (115 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
85 (115)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights
LEON
manual
LEON
automatic
LEON SC
manual
LEON SC
automatic
LEON ST
manual
LEON ST
automatic
Top speed (km/h) 202 202 202 202 202 202
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.6 6.6 6.5 6.5 6.8 6.8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.6 9.6 9.5 9.5 9.8 9.8
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,720 1,740 1,710 1,740 1,770 1,800
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,202 1,225 1,180 1,203 1,236 1,259
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 890 910 940 960 880 900
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 880 880 820 830 940 950
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 600 610 590 600 610 620
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,300
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,100
287
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS) Start-Stop
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
92 (125)/5,000-6,000 200/1,400-4,000 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC LEON ST
LEON ST
X-PERIENCE
Top speed (km/h) 203 (V&VI) 203 (V&VI) 203 (V&VI) 200 (V&VI)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 6.1 6.4 6.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.1 8.9 9.4 9.7
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,770 1,750 1,830 1,820
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,233 1,213 1,257 1,263
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 920 970 910 950
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 900 830 970 920
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 610 600 620 630
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400
288
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.4 TSI 110 kW (150 PS) ACT
®
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights
LEON
manual
LEON
automatic
LEON SC
manual
LEON SC
automatic
LEON ST
manual
LEON ST
automatic
Top speed (km/h) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.6 5.6 5.5 5.5 5.8 5.8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8 8 7.9 7.9 8.2 8.2
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,770 1,790 1,750 1,770 1,840 1,860
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,241 1,263 1,223 1,243 1,277 1,297
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 930 950 970 990 910 930
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 890 890 830 830 980 980
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 620 630 610 620 630 640
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500
289
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Petrol engine 1.4 TSI 110 kW (150 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights
LEON
manual
LEON
automatic
LEON SC
manual
LEON SC
automatic
LEON ST
automatic
Top speed (km/h) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI) 215 (V&VI)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.6 5.6 5.5 5.5 5.8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8 8 7.9 7.9 8.2
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,770 1,790 1,750 1,760 1,850
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,241 1,263 1,223 1,238 1,297
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 930 950 970 990 930
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 890 890 830 820 970
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 620 630 610 610 640
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500
290
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.8 132 kW (180 PS) Start-Stop
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
132 (180)/5,100-6,200 250/1,250-5,000 4/1,798 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights
LEON
Manual
LEON
Automatic
LEON
Without
Start-Stop
LEON SC
Manual
LEON SC
Automatic
LEON SC
Without
Start-Stop
LEON ST
Manual
LEON ST
Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 226 (VI) 224 (VI) 224 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI) 224 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.5 5.3 5.3 5.4 5.2 5.2 5.7 5.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.5 7.2 7.2 7.4 7.1 7.1 7.8 7.7
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,830 1,850 1,850 1,830 1,840 1,840 1,900 1,890
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,310 1,327 1,322 1,290 1,307 1,302 1,355 1,372
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 970 990 980 1,020 1,040 1,030 960 980
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 910 920 860 850 860 990 960
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650 660 660 640 650 650 670 680
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to
8% (kg)
1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to
12% (kg)
1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500
291
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Petrol engine 1.8 TSI 132 kW (180 PS) All-wheel drive
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
132 (180)/4,500-6,200 280/1,350-4,500 4/1,798 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights
LEON ST
X-PERIENCE 4WD
Top speed (km/h) 221 (V&VI)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 4.9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.2
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,040
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,486
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,060
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,030
Permitted roof load (kg) 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 740
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500
292
Technical specifications
Petrol engine 2.0 213 kW (290 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
213 (290)/5,900-6,400 350/1,700-5,800 4/1,984 Super 98 RON/Super 95 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights LEON
automatic
LEON SC
automatic
LEON ST
automatic
Top speed (km/h) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds)
a) a) a)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds)
a) a) a)
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,910 1,890 2,000
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,421 1,395 1,466
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,050 1,080 1,030
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 860 1.020
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) – – –
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) – – –
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) – – –
a)
Data not available as this edition goes to print.
293
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Petrol engine 2.0 221 kW (300 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
221 (300)/5,500-6,200 380/1,800-5,500 4/1,984 Super 98 RON/Super 95 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights LEON
manual
LEON
automatic
LEON SC
manual
LEON SC
automatic
LEON ST
manual
LEON ST
automatic
LEON ST
All-wheel
drive
Top speed (km/h) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds)
a) a) a) a) a) a) a)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds)
a) a) a) a) a) a) a)
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,890 1,910 1,870 1,880 1,980 2,000 2,050
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,395 1,421 1,375 1,395 1,440 1,466 1,540
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,020 1,050 1,060 1,080 1,000 1,030 1,050
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 920 910 860 860 1,030 1,020 1,050
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) – – – – – – –
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) – – – – – – –
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) – – – – – – –
a)
Data not available as this edition goes to print.
294
Technical specifications
Petrol/CNG engine 1.4 TSI 81 kW (110 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
81 (110)/4,800-6,000 200/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 CNG
Super 95 RON/Nor-
mal 91 RON
a)
a)
Slight power loss.
Outputs and weights LEON
manual
LEON
automatic
LEON ST
manual
LEON ST
automatic
Top speed (km/h) 194 (V) 194 (VII) 194 (VI) 194 (VII)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.1 7.1 7.3 7.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.9 10.9 11 11
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,840 1,870 1,870 1,900
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,359 1,388 1,395 1,421
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 920 950 870 900
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 970 970 1,050 1,050
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 670 690 690 710
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,700 1,700
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400
295
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Diesel engine 1.6 66 kW (90 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
66 (90)/2,750-4,800 230/1,400-2,750 4/1,598
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CN
Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC LEON ST
Top speed (km/h) 180 (IV) 180 (V) 180 (V)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.2 8.0 8.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.6 12.4 13.0
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,780 1,760 1,860
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,260 1,240 1,305
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 960 1,020 960
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 870 790 950
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 630 620 650
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,700 1,700 1,800
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,400 1,400 1,500
296
Technical specifications
Diesel engine 1.6 77 kW (105 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
77 (105)/3,000-4,000 250/1,500-2,750 4/1,598
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CN
Outputs and weights
LEON
Manual
LEON
Automatic
LEON ST
Manual
LEON ST
Automatic
Top speed (km/h) 191 (V) 191 (VI) 191 (V)
a)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 7.3 7.5
a)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7 10.7 11.1
a)
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,800 1,820 1,880 1,910
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,281 1,306 1,326 1,351
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 980 1,000 970 990
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 870 870 960 970
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 640 650 660 670
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,600
a)
Data not available as this edition goes to print.
297
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Diesel engine 1.6 81 kW (110 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
81 (110)/3,250-4,000 250/1,500-3,000 4/1,598
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CN
Outputs and weights
LEON
Ecomotive
LEON SC
Ecomotive
LEON ST
Ecomotive
LEON ST
All-wheel drive
LEON ST
X-PERIENCE
4WD
Top speed (km/h) 199 (V) 199 (V) 199 (V) 190 (VI) 190 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7 6.9 7.1 7.5 7.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.5 10.4 10.6 12 11.6
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,790 1,770 1,810 1,990 2,030
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,260 1,240 1,280 1,455 1,472
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 970 1,020 950 990 1,050
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 870 800 910 1,050 1,030
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 630 620 640 720 730
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,300 1,300 1,300 1,900 1,900
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,700 1,700
298
Technical specifications
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 81 kW (110 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
81 (110)/3,250-4,500 250/1,500-3,000 4/1,968
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CN
Outputs and weights LEON ST
Top speed (km/h) 189 (V)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,910
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,358
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,000
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 960
Permitted roof load (kg) 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 670
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500
299
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Diesel engine 1.6 85 kW (115 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
85 (115)/3,250-4,000 250/1,500-3,250 4/1,598
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CN
Outputs and weights
LEON
manual
LEON
automatic
LEON SC
manual
LEON SC
automatic
LEON ST
manual
LEON ST
automatic
LEON ST
X-PERIENCE
manual
Top speed (km/h) 197 197 197 197 197 197 193
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds)
a) a) a)
7.1
a) a) a)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds)
a) a) a)
10.4
a) a) a)
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,810 1,830 1,750 1,770 1,870 1,890 1,890
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,260 1,280 1,240 1,261 1,305 1,326 1,331
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 960 980 1,020 1,040 960 980 1,010
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 900 900 780 780 970 970 930
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 630 640 620 630 650 660 660
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500
a)
Data not available as this edition goes to print.
300
Technical specifications
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 105 kW (143 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
105 (143)/3,500-4,000 320/1,750-3,000 4/1,968
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CN
Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC
Top speed (km/h) 211 (V) 211 (V)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 6.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.7 8.6
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,830 1,800
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,301 1,281
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 990 1,050
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 890 800
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650 640
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800 1,800
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,600 1,600
301
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Diesel engine 2.0 110 kW (150 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
110 (150)/3,500-4,000 340/1,750-3,000 4/1,968
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CN
Outputs and weights
LEON
Start-Stop
LEON
Automatic
LEON SC
Start-Stop
LEON SC
Automatic
LEON ST
Start-Stop
LEON ST
Automatic
LEON ST
All-wheel
drive
LEON ST
X-PERIENCE
4WD
Top speed (km/h) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 211 (VI) 208 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.1 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.2 6.2 6.3 6.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.4 8.4 8.3 8.3 8.6 8.6 8.7 8.7
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,820 1,850 1,810 1,810 1,910 1,940 2,010 2,050
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,305 1,335 1,285 1,305 1,358 1,388 1,474 1,491
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,000 1,030 1,050 1,070 1,000 1,030 1,010 1,070
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 870 870 810 790 960 960 1,050 1,030
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650 660 640 650 670 690 730 740
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to
8% (kg)
1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,900 2,000
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to
12% (kg)
1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,700 2,000
302
Technical specifications
Diesel engine 2.0 130 kW (177 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
130 (177)/3,600-4,000 350/1,750-3,000 4/1,968
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CN
Outputs and weights LEON LEON SC
Top speed (km/h) 220 (VI) 220 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.9 5.8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.8 7.6
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,880 1,860
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,365 1,345
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,020 1,070
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 840
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 680 670
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,800 1,800
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,600 1,600
303
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Technical data
Diesel engine 2.0 135 kW (184 PS)
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) Fuel
135 (184)/3,500-4,000 380/1,750-3,000 4/1,968
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
51 CN
Outputs and weights LEON
Start-Stop
LEON
Automatic
LEON SC
Start-Stop
LEON SC
Automatic
LEON ST
Start-Stop
LEON ST
Automatic
LEON ST
X-PERIENCE
4WD
Top speed (km/h) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 228 (VI) 226 (VI) 224 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.7 5.7 5.6 5.6 5.9 5.9 4.9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 7.5 7.5 7.4 7.4 7.8 7.8 7.1
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,880 1,900 1,860 1,890 1,970 1,990 2,080
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,370 1,390 1,350 1,370 1,415 1,435 1,529
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,020 1,040 1,070 1,090 1,010 1,030 1,110
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 910 910 840 850 1,010 1,010 1,020
Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 680 690 670 680 700 710 750
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to
8% (kg)
1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 2,000
Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to
12% (kg)
1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 2,000
304
Technical specifications
Dimensions
Fig. 252 Dimensions
LEON LEON SC LEON ST LEON ST X-PERIENCE
A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 861/785 861/785 861/1,052 861/1,060
C Wheelbase (mm) 2,636 2,601 2,636 2,630
D Length (mm) 4,282 4,247 4,549 4,551
E/F Front/rear
a)
track width (mm)
1,533/1,504
1,549/1,520
1,541/1,505
1,549/1,520
G Width (mm) 1,816 1,810 1,816 1,816
H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,459 1,446 1,454
b)
1,481
b)
Turning radius (m) 10.9
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
b)
Dimension to the roof bars.
305
Technical dataAdviceOperationEmergenciesSafety
Index
Index
A
ABS
s
e
e
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 245
Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
function to avoid overtaking on the wrong
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
warning and control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Adaptive Cruise Control
deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Additional electrical appliances (efficiency pro-
gramme) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Adjusting
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Adjusting the head restraints
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Adjustment
CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 144
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 76
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 78
functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Air conditioning
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 163
heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
user instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Alcantara: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Anchoring
the front tow line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 85
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 85
check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 124
vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys-
tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Anti-theft alarm system
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
see also Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . 10, 116, 122
Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Aspects to take into account before starting the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ASR
see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Assistance systems
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 227
Pedestrian Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Assistance Systems
fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Audible signal
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Audible warning signal
seat belt not fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Automatic car washes
switching the Auto Hold function off . . . . . . . . 195
Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Automatic gear
safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
backup programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
launch control programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
manual release of selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
307
Index
selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
sel
ect
or l
ever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
steering wheel with gearshift paddles . . . . . . 182
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 182
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 262
opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Brake
emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Braking
brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
moving off on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
C
Camera
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
windscreen washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Capacity
natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Car-care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CD-ROM player (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Central locking
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Changing
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
rear light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
rear light in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Changing bulbs
fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Changing gear
engaging gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 179
Changing main headlight
turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing settings
CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Changing the main beam headlight bulb
main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Changing the main headlight bulb
day light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
dipped headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Checking levels
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Child-proof locking
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Child seat
categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 84
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 83
securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 23
City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
carbon parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Easy Connect control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
exhaust pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 250
radio display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
308
Index
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
bonnet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
p
anor
amic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Control and warning lamps
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Controls and displays
general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Controls on the steering wheel
operating the audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
operating the telephone and audio system . . 113
Convenience closing
panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Convenience opening
panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Coolant
checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Cooling system
checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Cornering
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Correct sitting position
front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 195
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
warning and indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
D
Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 17
Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Defective bulbs
changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Detachable ball
assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 237
checking attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
placing in standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Diesel
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Diesel particulate filter
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Direction of rotation
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105
Display of traffic signs on the instrument panel
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Disposal
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Distance control
see Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Doors
childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 66, 67, 68
Driver information system
CD/radio indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
engine oil temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
operation with the windscreen wiper lever . . . . 30
Driving
driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 239, 241, 242
Driving abroad
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
E
E10
see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 110
Economical
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
309
Index
EDL
s
e
e
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Efficiency programme
additional electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Electrical accessories
see Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Electrical socket
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 127
convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 128
Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Electronic torque management (XDS) . . . . . . . . . 177
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
automatic gearbox backup programme . . . . . 186
bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
see Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Emergency operation
passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Emission control system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Engine
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
starting up (driver messages with the mechan-
ical contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
switching off (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Engine and ignition
automatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 171
stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 262
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 269
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 267
closing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 266
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 265
opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 52, 268
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Engine fault
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 264
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264, 266
checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Environment
ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Environmental tips
filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 245
ESC
electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Exhaust gas purification system
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Exhaust pipe: Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Extending
the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Exterior lighting
changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Exterior mirrors
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
310
Index
Exterior rear view mirrors
e
xt
erior
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8
External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
F
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Four-wheel drive
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 78
Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 211
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
see also Front Assist Monitoring system . . . . . 207
Front Assist monitoring system
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
on-screen messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Front Assist Monitoring system
City Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 211
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Front Assist Monitoring System
switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Front passenger front airbag
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 81
Front seat
manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 258
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Fuel consumption
switching off using inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . . . 189
Fuel tank cap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fuel tank flap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Full-LED Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Function Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Function Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 91
fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
G
Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Gearbox DSG
see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 182
General instrument panel
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Hand brake
See Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Handbrake
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 135
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 73
Head-protection airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Headlights
changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
311
Index
Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
a
dju
s
tment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 48
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
I
Identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 167
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 167
see Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Indications on display
traffic signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
assist systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
MKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 180
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 33
Indications on the screen
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105
instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Interior rear vision mirror
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Interior view
left guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 23
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 23
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 85
mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
K
Key-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Keyless-Entry
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Keyless-Exit
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Keyless Access
Keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 120
Keyless Access locking and ignition system
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Keys
assign key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
car key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
driver messages (mechanical contact) . . . . . . 168
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 118
Kick-down
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Knee airbags
safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
L
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
cleaning the camera area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Lane Assist system
see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Launch control programme (automatic gearbox) 184
Leather: care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
312
Index
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 131
audib
l
e s
ignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
lighting of the instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
lighting of the switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Load compartment in the luggage compartment
see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 151
Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Loading the vehicle
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 156
Locking and unlocking
in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
automatic lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
luggage compartment variable floor . . . 159, 160
net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 155
rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
retractable rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 154
unlocking manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
see also Loading the luggage compartment . 151
Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 160
Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . 159, 160
Luggage net
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
M
Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Main panel
turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Malfunction
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
front assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Model plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Moving off
hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
N
Natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 260
smell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Natural leather
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Navigation system
CD-ROM player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Net bag
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 155
Noises
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
refuelling natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 271
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
O
Octane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
313
Index
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
p
ar
ti
al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
On-screen messages
Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
One-touch opening and closing
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Open and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 257
panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 257
in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
rear lid of the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . 11
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Opening manually
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
P
Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Paintwork
code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Panoramic sliding sunroof
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 128
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 183
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Parking Aid
adjusting the display and audible warnings . 230
automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Parking aid system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
automatic release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Parking distance warning system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
ParkPilot
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Particulate filter (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Passenger
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 66, 67, 68
Passenger door manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Passenger seat backrest
folding down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Pedestrian Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Pedestrian protection
see Pedestrian Monitoring system . . . . . . . . . 212
Petrol
additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Plastic parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 250
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Positioning seat belts
during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Power steering
see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Pre-heating system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Press & Drive
starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Progressive steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Puncture
action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
R
Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 208
Radio-operated remote control
see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
314
Index
Radio display: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
R
a
dio tr
ansmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
control of the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Rear
headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Rear bulbs in the side panel
disassembling the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 12
see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rear light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Rear lights
changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Rear lights in the rear lid
disassembling the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rear lights on the side panel
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Rear seat
folding down and raising the backrest . . . . . . 146
Rear seat backrest
folding down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
folding down and lifting the backrest . . . . . . . 147
lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rear seat passengers
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 66, 67, 68
Rear shelf
storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 154
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Rear view mirrors
adjusting the exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . 142
Rear vision mirror
interior anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Refuelling
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
gas gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
opening fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Remote control key
unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Removing and installing head restraints . . . . . . 144
Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Replacing the battery
of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Retractable rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105
Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Rims
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Roll-back function
panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Roof luggage rack
attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Running-in
new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Running in
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
S
Safe
driving safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Safelock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
see also Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . 116
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . 17
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Safety information
knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Safety instructions
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 83
Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Safety notes
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Saving fuel
inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Saving tips (efficiency programme) . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Seat
electric seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Seat belt position
for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 74
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 76
315
Index
safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
u
nf
a
stened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 75
SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Seats
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Selector lever (automatic gearbox)
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Side airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Sitting position
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Sliding panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Smell of gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 283
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Special characteristics
tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 192
switching off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
the engine does not switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Steering
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
engaging the steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Steering wheel
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
gearshift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . 182
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Storage area
front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 139
roll-back function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Switch
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Switching off the engine
with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . 24, 167
System Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
T
Tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . . . 156
Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Technical data
capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Tightening torques of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
lap times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 180, 182
Tire Mobility Set
inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 23
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 23
Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89
Tow-starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Towing bracket
retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
operation and care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Towline anchorage
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 85
Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
316
Index
Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
m
alf
u
nctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must be
switched off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Traffic Sign Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Traffic signs
indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 241
driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Transporting items
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Transporting objects
net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 156
Trim parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Trims
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Turn signal convenience function . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Tyre mobility set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Tyre Mobility System
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Tyre monitoring systems
tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
with compulsory direction of rotation . . . . . . . . 59
with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
U
Unfastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 74
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Upholstery: cleaning
alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Vehicle
chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
unlocking and locking the vehicle with Keyless
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 269
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Vehicle care
natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 63
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system 126
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
317
Index
W
W
arnin
g and c
ontrol lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 109
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 208
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 190
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
for seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 42
instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Warning symbols
see Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Wheel
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
loosening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271, 283
chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 59
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Windows
electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 127
removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . . 87
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 139
Windscreen washer water
capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
window wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys-
tems
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Winter conditions
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
defrosting the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Winter operation
headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
X
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
318
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.16
About this manual
This manual contains a description of the
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the
time this manual was published. Some of the
units described herein will not be available
until a later date or are only available in cer-
tain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the LEON
range, some of the equipment and functions
that are described in this manual are not in-
cluded in all types or variants of the model;
they may vary or be modified depending on
the technical requirements and on the mar-
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details.
The steering indications (left, right, forward,
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-
cept when otherwise indicated.
The audiovisual material only is intended to
help users to understand certain car function-
alities better. It does not replace the instruc-
tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-
al to obtain more comprehensive information
and indications.
The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as op-
tional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
® All registered marks are indicated with
®. Although the copyright symbol does
not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
>> The section is continued on the follow-
ing page.
Important warnings on a given page
Detailed contents on a given page
General information on a given page
Emergency information on a given page
Audiovisual material on a given page
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
mation on safety. They warn you about possi-
ble dangers of accident or injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
vant information concerning environmental
protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
This manual is divided into six large parts,
which are:
1. The essentials
2. Safety
3. Emergencies
4. Operation
5. Tips
6. Technical data
At the end of this manual, there is a detailed
alphabetical index that will help you quickly
find the information you require.
SEAT recommends
SEAT GENUINE OIL
SEAT recommends
Castrol EDGE Professional
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Leon
5F0012720BG
Inglés
5F0012720BG (11.16)
Leon Inglés (11.16)
